JP7235062B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine represented by a pachinko machine.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, symbols are variably displayed on a display device, and symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination to provide a winning game advantageous to a player. In addition to the patterns, the display device also displays various images such as characters and landscapes. This diversified the display contents and improved interest.

JP-A-2003-325886

However, further enhancement of interest is required.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a player in playing a game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the present invention includes display means capable of displaying a display mode corresponding to any one of a plurality of stage information, and the display mode displayed on the display means. is executed in an effect period including at least a display mode variable means capable of varying the display mode to a display mode corresponding to different stage information, and a period in which the variable effect for varying the display mode can be executed multiple times. and a period effect execution means capable of executing a period effect, wherein the first period effect is capable of setting the effect mode of the first period effect at least in the first period in which the variable effect can be executed in the effect period. a setting means, and a second period effect setting means capable of setting the effect mode of the second period effect in a second period which is later than the first period in the effect period and in which at least the variable effect can be executed. and first step information corresponding to the first step as a step of changing from the first step information to the second step information different from the first step information among the plurality of step information ; A plurality of process information including at least second process information corresponding to the second process as a process different from the process and being changed from the first stage information to the second stage information is stored . and a determination means capable of determining predetermined process information from among the plurality of process information stored in the storage means prior to the first period , and The one-period effect setting means can set the effect mode of the first period effect based on the predetermined process information determined by the determining means, and the second-period effect setting means can set the effect mode of the first period effect. It is possible to set an effect mode of the second period effect corresponding to the display mode displayed by the variable effect executed during the effect, and the gaming machine determines the process information determined by the determining means. Regardless of the type, the variable effect can be executed at a specific timing in the first period, and a predetermined first condition is satisfied during the first period effect that is executed in an effect mode based on at least the predetermined process information. The variable performance can be executed during the first period performance when the execution condition is established based on the establishment, and the variable performance is not executed when the execution condition is not established. It is configured such that the first period production can be terminated.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, a display means capable of displaying a display mode corresponding to any one of a plurality of level information, and the display mode displayed on the display means can be displayed as different level information. and a display mode variable means capable of changing the display mode to a display mode corresponding to the display mode, and executing a period performance performed in a performance period including at least a period in which the variable performance for varying the display mode can be executed multiple times. a first period effect setting means capable of setting the effect mode of the first period effect at least in a first period in which the variable effect can be executed in the effect period; a second period effect setting means capable of setting the effect mode of the second period effect in a second period in which the variable effect can be executed at least after the first period in the effect period; Among the step information, the first step information corresponding to the first step as a step of changing from the first step information to the second step information different from the first step information , and a step different from the first step and storage means for storing a plurality of pieces of process information including at least second process information corresponding to a second process as a process in which the first stage information is changed to the second stage information. , determination means capable of determining predetermined process information from among the plurality of process information stored in the storage means before the first period , and the first period effect setting means. is capable of setting an effect mode of the first period effect based on the predetermined process information determined by the determining means, and the second period effect setting means is executed during the first period effect. It is possible to set the effect mode of the second period effect corresponding to the display mode displayed by the variable effect, and the gaming machine, regardless of the type of the process information determined by the determining means, The variable effect can be executed at a specific timing in the first period, and a predetermined first condition is satisfied during the first period effect that is executed in a performance mode based on at least the predetermined process information. When the execution condition is satisfied, the variable performance can be executed during the first period performance, and when the execution condition is not satisfied, the first period performance is performed without executing the variable performance. It is configured so that it can be terminated.

Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. Fig. 3 is a front perspective view of the operating unit; 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit; FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. (a) is a diagram schematically showing a display area of a third pattern display device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a display mode displayed by the third pattern display device in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing an example. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the production|presentation displayed with the 3rd design display apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (a) to (d) are schematic diagrams showing the score display mode displayed on the third pattern display device in the first embodiment and the degree of expectation of each ready-to-win effect, and (e) to (g) are It is the schematic diagram which showed the flow of the score display displayed with the 3rd pattern display apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (a) and (b) are the figures which showed an example of the display mode of the score provision production|presentation displayed with the 3rd design display apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (a) and (b) are the figures which showed an example of the display mode of the score provision production|presentation displayed with the 3rd design display apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (a) and (b) are the figures which showed an example of the display mode of the score provision production|presentation displayed with the 3rd design display apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (a) and (b) are the figures which showed an example of the display mode of the score provision production|presentation displayed with the 3rd design display apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the start time of the second ready-to-win mode displayed by the third symbol display device in the first embodiment, and (b) is the second It is the figure which showed an example during 2 reach mode execution. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the final stage of the second reach mode displayed by the third symbol display device in the first embodiment, and (b) is the second reach displayed by the third symbol display device It is the figure which showed an example of the aspect result. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen emphasizing right-handed hits among small winning game screens displayed on the third symbol display device in the first embodiment, and (b) shows (a) ) is displayed and then the ball wins. It is a figure which shows the outline|summary of various counters in 1st Embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main controller in the first embodiment, (b) is a block showing the electrical configuration of the RAM in the main controller in the first embodiment It is a diagram. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a first winning random number table in the first embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the contents of a special symbol 1 random number table in the first embodiment. FIG. 7C is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a special symbol 2 random number table according to the first embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection table in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table in the first embodiment. (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table in the first embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the small hit classification selection table in 1st Embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a fluctuation pattern table in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a normal fluctuation pattern table in the first embodiment. It is a diagram. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the variation pattern table for time reduction in 1st Embodiment. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of an open scenario table in the first embodiment; FIG. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the game flow of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment; (a) ~ (f) is a timing chart showing the flow of the operation of the various devices at the time of small hit V passage in the first embodiment. 2A is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a ROM within the audio ramp control device in the first embodiment; FIG. 4B is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the RAM within the audio ramp control device in the first embodiment; FIG. It is a block diagram showing. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a first advance notice selection table in the first embodiment; FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a second advance notice selection table in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a given score selection table in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device according to the first embodiment; FIG. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining a power-on image. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a rear surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a rear surface B. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a display data table according to the first embodiment; FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table according to the first embodiment; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list according to the first embodiment; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a small winning start setting process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows time saving number of times update processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 1st embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing a starting winning process executed by an MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing prefetching processing executed by an MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing through gate passage processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing V entrance passage processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing V passage processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; It is a flow chart which shows big hit control processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows small hit control processing performed by MPU in the main controller in a 1st embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing start-up processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing winning information related processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. 7 is a flow chart showing continuous announcement score setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing a win-related process executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing stop command processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment; It is a flow chart which shows the production|presentation setting process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. 4 is a flowchart showing a score giving effect setting process executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing frame button input monitoring/effect processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing effect update processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment; It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation correction process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing reach mode correction processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing deviation correction processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first embodiment. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing boot processing executed by an MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment; (a) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing; 6 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment; (a) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment 8 is a flowchart showing stop type command processing; (a) is a flowchart showing rear image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a flow chart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing error command processing. 7 is a flow chart showing win-related command processing executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment; (a) is a flowchart showing a jackpot start command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing round number command processing; FIG. (a) is a flowchart showing a jackpot end command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment It is a flow chart showing small hit start command processing. (a) is a flowchart showing a small winning end command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment 10 is a flowchart showing V entrance passage command processing. 4 is a flowchart showing V effect command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment; (a) is a flowchart showing press command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment; It is the flowchart which showed production|presentation command processing. 4 is a flowchart showing display setting processing executed by an MPU in the display device according to the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing executed by an MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment; (a) is a flowchart showing transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing resident image transfer setting processing; 7 is a flow chart showing normal image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing drawing processing executed by an MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment; (a) to (c) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the flow of effects in the second embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a ROM within an audio ramp control device according to a second embodiment; (b) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a RAM within the audio ramp control device according to the second embodiment; It is a block diagram showing. FIG. 12 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a scoring effect scenario selection table set in a ROM within the sound ramp control device in the second embodiment; It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the specific production|presentation execution selection table set to ROM in the sound lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of an execution timing selection table set in a ROM within the audio ramp control device according to the second embodiment; 10 is a flow chart showing winning information related processing 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment. 10 is a flow chart showing a score effect scenario setting process executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the second embodiment; It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation setting process 2 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing pre-score effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the second embodiment. 14 is a flowchart showing final score effect setting processing executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device in the second embodiment; 10 is a flow chart showing final specific effect setting processing executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second embodiment; It is a flow chart which shows the production|presentation update process 2 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation variable process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of an operation advance notice effect in a first operation effect example of each embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the operation timing and the display contents of the operation notice effect. It is a schematic diagram. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a composite advance notice effect displayed on a third symbol display device in a first operation effect example of each embodiment, and (b) is a modification of each embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when the frame button is not operated during the first period of the composite notice effect displayed on the third symbol display device in . (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a frame button is operated during a first period of a composite advance notice effect displayed on a third symbol display device in a first operation effect example of each embodiment; , (b) is a diagram showing another example of the display mode when the frame button is operated during the first period of the composite advance notice effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the first operation effect example of each embodiment. is. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a frame button is operated during a first period of a composite advance notice effect displayed on a third symbol display device in a first operation effect example of each embodiment; , (b) is a diagram showing another example of the display mode when the frame button is operated during the first period of the composite advance notice effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the first operation effect example of each embodiment. is. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a frame button is operated during the second period of the composite advance notice effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the first operation effect example of each embodiment; , (b) is a diagram showing another example of the display mode when the frame button is operated during the second period of the composite advance notice effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the first operation effect example of each embodiment. is. 10 is a flow chart showing frame button input monitoring and effect processing 3 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first operation effect example of each embodiment. 10 is a flow chart showing an advance notice mode setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first operation effect example of each embodiment. (a) and (b) are the figures which showed an example of the display mode of the score production|presentation displayed with the 3rd design display apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the score production|presentation displayed with the 3rd pattern display apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a ROM within an audio ramp control device according to a third embodiment; (b) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a RAM within the audio ramp control device according to the third embodiment; It is a block diagram showing. FIG. 12 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a specific variation pattern selection table set in a ROM within the audio ramp control device in the third embodiment; FIG. 12 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a frequency selection table set in a ROM in the audio ramp control device according to the third embodiment; FIG. 12 is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of an execution timing selection table set in a ROM within the audio ramp control device according to the third embodiment; FIG. 12 is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of a winning display score selection table set in a ROM in the sound ramp control device according to the third embodiment; FIG. 12 is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of a display score selection table for error set in a ROM in the sound ramp control device in the third embodiment; FIG. 12 is a flow chart showing a score effect scenario setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the third embodiment; FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing pre-score effect setting processing 2 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the third embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing final score effect setting processing 2 executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device in the third embodiment; FIG. (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a ROM within an audio ramp control device according to a third embodiment; (b) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a RAM within the audio ramp control device according to the third embodiment; It is a block diagram showing. FIG. 12 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a scoring scenario selection table set in a ROM within the sound ramp control device according to the third embodiment; FIG. 14 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of a scenario variation pattern 1 selection table set in a ROM in the audio ramp control device according to the third embodiment; FIG. 13 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of a scenario variation pattern 2 selection table set in a ROM within the audio ramp control device according to the third embodiment; FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing score effect scenario setting processing 3 executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device in the third embodiment; FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing preliminary score effect setting processing 3 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the third embodiment; FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing final score effect setting processing 3 executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device in the third embodiment; FIG. (a) is a diagram showing the period structure of each variation pattern in the first production example of each embodiment, and (b) is the notice content executed during the notice period in the first production example of each embodiment. It is a figure showing. It is the figure which showed the content of the ready-to-win which is performed during the ready-to-win period in the 1st example of production|presentation of each embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the sound lamp control device in the first example of effect of each embodiment, (b) is the sound lamp control device in the first example of effect of each embodiment; 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a RAM inside; FIG. It is the figure which showed typically the specification content of the final variation pattern selection table set to ROM in the sound ramp control apparatus in the 1st production example of each embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing final score effect setting processing 4 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first example of effect of each embodiment. (a) and (b) are diagrams schematically showing the flow of effects in the second example of effects of each embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the sound lamp control device in the second example of effect of each embodiment, (b) is the sound lamp control device in the second example of effect of each embodiment; 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a RAM inside; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation setting process 5 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in the 2nd example of production|presentation of each embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the pre-final score effect setting process performed by MPU in a sound ramp control apparatus in the 2nd example of effect|presentation of each embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows countdown setting processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in the example of the 2nd production of each embodiment. 10 is a flow chart showing final score effect setting processing 5 executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the second example of effect of each embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows countdown production setting processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in the example of the 2nd production of each embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of an operation notice effect in a second operation effect example of each embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the operation timing and the display timing of each notice effect. It is a schematic diagram. (a) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM in a sound lamp control device in a second operation effect example of each embodiment; (b) is a sound lamp in a second operation effect example of each embodiment; 3 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a RAM within the control device; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a score giving effect setting process 6 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second operation effect example of each embodiment. 10 is a flow chart showing comment advance notice setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second operation effect example of each embodiment. 10 is a flow chart showing frame button input monitoring and effect processing 6 executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second operation effect example of each embodiment. 10 is a flow chart showing an advance notice mode setting process 6 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second operation effect example of each embodiment. 10 is a flow chart showing effect update processing 6 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second operation effect example of each embodiment.

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. 1 to 87. FIG. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 5 to 7 are schematic diagrams schematically showing the structure of the V winning device 650 provided on the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 8 is the rear surface of the pachinko machine 10 It is a diagram.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 whose outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, the outer frame 11 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having ball entrances 63, 64, 640 and the like into which a large number of nails and balls can enter is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. Balls (game balls) flow down in front of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 9) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached. Details of the many ball entrances provided on the game board 13 will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1). 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

The front frame 14 has an upper tray 17 for storing balls projected to the front side and formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface, and the upper tray 17 discharges prize balls, rental balls, and the like. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 9). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 . The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is changed, or the content of the super ready-to-win effect is changed. be.

The front frame 14 is provided with light-emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminated portions 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, an indicator lamp 34 is provided in the upper left part of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1).

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 (Fig. 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more splendor, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29-33.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to hit the ball in front of the game board 13. As shown in FIG.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball shooting unit 112a, a shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A ball is shot with a strength (shooting intensity) corresponding to , and is hit in front of the game board 13 with a flying distance corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape as seen from the front, a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, windmills, rails 61 and 62, and a general winning prize. It is constructed by assembling a port 63, a first ball entry port 64, a second ball entry port 640, a first variable winning device 65, a V winning device 650, a normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, a variable display device unit 80, and the like. , and its peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the rear side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first ball opening 64, the second ball opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, the V winning device 650, and the variable display device unit 80 are through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. and fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by tapping screws or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

In front of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially circular arc is planted, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member connecting the rails (a prize winning opening is provided and a shot is played). area where the ball flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 9) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center.

First pattern display devices 37a and 37b having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged in the upper right portion of the game area in front view (the upper right portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are for displaying according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 9), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are configured to be used properly according to whether the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. . Specifically, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the first symbol display device 37a operates, while when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, The first symbol display device 37b is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b use the LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability, the time saving mode, or the normal state by the lighting state, or whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state by the lighting state. Whether the stop pattern is a pattern corresponding to the probability variable jackpot, a pattern corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missing pattern is indicated by the lighting state, the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates the round during the jackpot. Display numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED has a different emission color (for example, red, green, and blue), and depending on the combination of the emission colors, it is possible to suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

Incidentally, in the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is conducted when a prize is won in the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big win (big win lottery), and also determines the kind of big win when it is determined as a big win. As the jackpot type determined here, the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 15 rounds, and the time saving state is given after the jackpot is finished. A 5R time-saving jackpot and a 5R normal jackpot are prepared in which the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 5R and the time-saving state is not provided after the jackpot ends. In addition, in some cases where it is determined that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is not the above-mentioned jackpot but a loss, the player is given less benefits than the above-mentioned jackpot (for example, the V winning device 650 is opened only for one round). Privilege to let) A small hit is prepared. The first symbol display devices 37a and 37b not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a big win (whether or not it is a small win) as a stop symbol after the end of the variation, but also indicate the big win when the result is a big win. A pattern corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed.

Here, the “15R short-time jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to a short-time state after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and the “5R short-time jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 5 rounds. It is a big hit that shifts to a time saving state. In addition, "5R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is 5 rounds, and then the jackpot shifts to the normal state without shifting to the time saving state.

Also, the “time-saving state” is a gaming state in which a ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640 as an added value after the end of the big win, although the probability of the big win is the same as in the normal state. In order to make it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640, in the present embodiment, the variation time of the second symbol is set shorter than in the normal state, and the result of the lottery of the second symbol is a win. The operation mode of the electric accessory 640a to be operated in the case is set so that the period during which the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640 is longer than in the normal state. It should be noted that other configurations may be used to set the game state in which the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640, only a part of the setting contents described above may be used, or the contents described above may be used. Besides, the winning probability of the second symbol may be set higher than that in the normal state.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the "time saving state" is the period until the number of fluctuations (total number of fluctuations) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches the first predetermined number of times (100 times) (first period), Alternatively, it is configured to be set while satisfying both the period (second period) until the number of times of fluctuation of the second special symbol reaches the second predetermined number (once), the above-described first period or When any one of the second periods ends, the end condition is established, and the game state is configured to shift from the time saving state to the normal state. In this way, a plurality of end conditions for shifting the game state from the time saving state to the normal state are prepared, and the time saving state is changed to the normal state when one of the plurality of end conditions is satisfied. By shifting to , it is possible to set multiple timings at which the time-saving state ends, and the player is excited about how long the time-saving state, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state, will continue. be able to.

In addition, in the present embodiment, a plurality of termination conditions of the time saving state are set with respect to the number of fluctuations of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol). For example, the number of times a small win is won in a special symbol lottery, or the number of times the V winning device 650 operates when a small win game is executed is set to a predetermined number (for example, once). The arrival may be used as a termination condition. Also, only a part of the numerous termination conditions described above may be used, or they may be combined as appropriate.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 from which 10 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the winning (starting winning) to the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 is used as a trigger, and while synchronizing with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the third A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") that performs variable display of symbols, and a second symbol triggered by the passage of a ball to a normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67. A second pattern display device (not shown) composed of LEDs for variably displaying is provided. A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 .

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 15-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 9), for example, left, middle and right three patterns. One symbol row is displayed (see FIG. 10). Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are vertically scrolled for each pattern row to variably display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. It's like In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b under the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 9). Decorative display according to the display of the pattern display devices 37a and 37b is performed.

That is, the third pattern is variably displayed ( The third pattern is displayed as a special symbol on the third symbol display device 81 corresponding to the timing when the first symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing the lottery result of the special symbol on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b. The symbols are stopped and displayed in a display mode according to the lottery result of the symbols.

In addition, the third symbol stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 may be a display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol. result only), or may be a display mode corresponding to the details of the special symbol lottery result (for example, the type of jackpot won). In addition, when there are three types of lottery results (for example, big hit, small hit, and loss) as the lottery result of the special design, the lottery result of the special design is the above-mentioned three types of lottery as the display mode of the third design. It is also possible to use a display mode that indicates one of two specific types of results (for example, a big win or a small win).

Further, instead of the display device used in the present embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, reels or the like, or the pachinko machine 10 may be provided with a plurality of display devices.

The second symbol display device 83 displays a symbol "○" and a symbol "x" as display symbols (second symbol (not shown)) each time the ball passes through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67. are alternately turned on for a predetermined period of time to perform a variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that a ball has passed through a normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device 83 stops and displays the symbol "O" after the second symbol is variably displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the second symbol display device 83 stops displaying the symbol "x" after the second symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (symbol of "○" in this embodiment), the electric role object 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is It is configured to be in an activated state (protrude) for a predetermined period of time. Although the details will be described later, the ball can enter the second ball entrance 640 by changing the electric accessory 640a to the operating state.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter in the time-saving state (high-probability state of normal pattern) than in the normal state. As a result, the variable display of the second pattern is performed in a short time during the time-saving state, so that more winning lotteries can be performed than during normal times. Therefore, the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, so that the player can be given more chances to activate the electric accessory 640a of the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加Therefore, the time-saving state can be made into a state in which the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640 .

In addition, during the time saving state, the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 using other methods such as increasing the probability of winning, increasing the opening time and number of openings of the electric accessory 640a for one time. In the case of the easy state, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be fixed regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than during the normal time during the time saving, the winning probability may be made constant regardless of the game state, and the electric role for one winning may be set. The opening time and number of openings of the object 640a may be fixed regardless of the game state.

Furthermore, when the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is varied according to the set game state, and the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a are varied, the variable display of the second symbol is started. The variable display time of the second symbol is determined according to the game state set at the timing, the variable display of the second symbol is stopped, and the timing when the second symbol indicating the win is displayed (the second symbol win The opening time and the number of openings of the electric accessory 640a may be determined according to the game state set in the game (that is, the timing of activating the electric accessory 640a). By configuring in this way, for example, when the second pattern that starts to change during the time saving state is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing the win during the normal state, the corresponding electric accessory 640a during the normal state It can be operated in an actuation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to more accurately associate the set game state with the operation pattern of the electric accessory to be executed.

The relationship between the game state, the variation time of the second symbol, and the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a may be specified other than the contents described above. When it is determined that the time saving state is set as the game state at either timing of the start timing, an operation pattern advantageous to the player as the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a (executed during the time saving state operation pattern) may be set.

The normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is assembled to the game board 13 on the right side of the lower area of the variable display unit 80, and the balls shot to the game board flow down the right side of the game board. A portion (most) of the sphere is configured to be passable. When the ball passes through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device 83, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, a symbol "O" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and the result of the winning lottery is lost. If there is, an "x" symbol is displayed as a stop symbol for variable display.

The number of times the ball passes through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 is reserved up to four times in total, and the number of reserved balls is displayed on the second symbol reservation lamp 84 described above. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 corresponding to the maximum number of holding lamps are provided, and arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81 .

In addition, the variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in the present embodiment. A part of the pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . In addition, the maximum number of held balls for passing the ball through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is not limited to 4 times, but is set to 3 times or less or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). You can In addition, the number of normal symbol starting openings (through gates) 67 to be assembled is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Further, the mounting position of the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, but may be the left side of the variable display device unit 80, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol reservation lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entrance 64 through which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the first ball inlet 64, a first ball inlet switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first ball inlet switch is turned on. A big win lottery is performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 9), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37a.

As shown in FIG. 2, the first ball entrance 64 moves down the left side of the variable display unit 80 in a game (so-called left-handed game) in which the ball flows down. A nail is planted on the game board 13 so that the ball can enter the game more easily than in a game in which the ball flows down (so-called right-handed game). Therefore, when a game state (normal state) in which it is difficult for a ball to enter the second ball inlet 640 is set, a left-handed game is executed to allow the ball to enter the first ball inlet 64. be.

On the other hand, a second ball entrance 640 through which a ball can enter is provided on the right side of the first ball entrance 64 in front view. When the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, a second ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second ball entrance switch is turned on. A big win lottery is performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 9), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on the first symbol display device 37b.

In addition, the first ball entry hole 64 and the second ball entry hole 640 are also one of winning holes from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 are configured to be the same. However, if the number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 are different numbers, for example, the number of the first entrance The number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the ball opening 64 may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 may be five.

In addition, in this embodiment, a switch (first ball entrance switch, second ball entrance switch) for detecting a ball that serves as a special pattern lottery opportunity (big hit lottery opportunity) is provided in the ball entrance. Although it is configured to acquire a special symbol lottery opportunity and win a prize ball, other configurations may be used. When a switch (detection means) for detecting a passing ball detects passage of the ball, it may be configured to obtain a special symbol lottery opportunity. In this case, at least some of the balls that have passed through the area (gate) that can trigger the lottery of the special symbols can enter, and when the balls enter, a predetermined number (for example, 5) of prize balls will be paid out. It is good to provide an entrance. By configuring in this way, the number of acquisition times of special symbol lottery opportunities and the number of winning ball acquisition times can be made different, so that various game characteristics can be provided.

The second entrance 640 is accompanied by an electric accessory 640a. This electric accessory 640a can be changed between a protruding state (allowed state) protruding from the game board 13 to the near side (the near side from the viewpoint of FIG. 2) and a retracted state (restricted state) to the game board 13 side. Normally (when the second symbol is not won), the electric accessory 640a is in a retracted state (restricted state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. It has become. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the ball through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, that is, the second symbol When winning the lottery with two symbols, the electric accessory 640a is in a protruding state (permissive state), and the ball can easily enter the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加

Here, the ball flow to the second ball entrance 640 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, the variable display device unit 80 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area of the game board 13, and the game area is set to the left side of the variable display unit 80 (left-handed area). It is divided into the right side (right hitting area), and by adjusting the operation amount of the operation handle 51, the player can divide the destination of the shot ball into the right hitting area or the left hitting area. It consists of Hereinafter, a game in which the player operates the operation handle 51 to shoot a ball into the left-handed area of the game area is called a left-handed game, and a game in which the player shoots a ball into the right-handed area is called a right-handed game.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, the second ball entrance 640, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640, and the trigger of the lottery to determine whether or not to operate the electric accessory 640a. A normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is arranged in the right hitting area, and when the time saving state is set as the game state, the right hitting game is performed.

On the left side of the second ball entrance 640, a nail is planted for prohibiting (suppressing) the ball fired by the left-handed game from entering the second ball entrance 640. It is configured so that a ball does not enter the second ball entrance 640 during a game. By configuring in this way, in the left-handed game, the ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64 in order to vary the first special symbol, and in the right-handed game, the second special symbol is varied. Therefore, it is possible to perform a game in which the ball is entered into the second ball entrance 640, and it is possible to appropriately provide different game characteristics according to the game method.

Above the second ball entrance 640, a nail is planted for regulating the flow of balls fired in a right-handed game. 2 It is constructed so as not to enter the ball into the ball entrance 640 . Here, the configuration of the game board 13 near the second ball entrance 640 will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 3, of the balls fired in the right-handed game, the balls that have passed through the through gate 67 pass through the area where the electric accessory 640a is arranged and are directed to the V winning device 650 described later. It is configured to flow down. The second ball inlet 640 is located 30 mm vertically below and 70 mm horizontally to the left of the ball ejection position 67a of the through gate 67, allowing the ball that has flowed directly down through the through gate 67 to flow down. is located on the left side of the region a (see FIG. 3).

Below the through gate 67, an electric accessory 640a is provided. This electric accessory 640a has a guiding state (projection state) in which the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 can be guided to the second ball entrance 640, and a non-guiding state (retraction state) in which the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is not contacted. state).

As shown in FIG. 3, the electric accessory 640a is provided so as to be inclined downward toward the second ball entrance 640 side (lower left side from the viewpoint of FIG. 3), and the electric accessory 640a is in the induced state ( The ball passing through the through gate 67 during the period of the projecting state) is received by the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a and then flows down toward the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 46, in the present embodiment, the periods during which the electric accessory 640a continuously operates are different in the game state.

Specifically, the operation period of the electric accessory 640a is configured to be 2 seconds during the time saving state and 0.2 seconds during the normal state. Then, the electric accessory 640a is configured so that the falling period for the ball to flow down the area shown in FIG. 3 is longer than 0.2 seconds and shorter than 2 seconds (in this embodiment, 0.4 seconds). By configuring in this way, even if a right-handed game is played in the normal state, winning the normal symbol, and the ball flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a in operation, Since the operation of the electric accessory 640a ends before the ball flowing down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a reaches the second ball entrance 640, it is ensured that the lottery for the second special symbol is executed in the normal state. can be prevented.

In addition, during the time saving state, the electric accessory 640a is operated for a period longer than the period (0.4 seconds) in which the ball flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a and reaches the second ball entrance 640. , the ball flowing down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a in the guided state (protruding state) can easily reach the second ball entrance 640, and the lottery for the second special symbol can be easily executed.

In this embodiment, the operation period of the electric accessory 640a during the time saving state is longer than the period (0.4 seconds) in which the ball flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a and reaches the second ball inlet 640. A sufficiently long period (2 seconds) is set so that the ball is surely entered into the second ball entrance 640 when the electric accessory 640a is operated. The operation period of the electric accessory 640a in the state is set to a period slightly longer (for example, 0 .7 seconds). By configuring in this way, after the ball is passed through the through gate 67 in the time saving state, the act of stopping the ball from being launched and starting to launch the ball again after confirming that the electric accessory 640a has been operated ( Since it is possible to suppress so-called stop hitting), it is possible to improve the operation of the game by continuing the right hitting game during the time saving state.

Returning to FIG. 2, the description is continued. As described above with reference to FIG. 3, the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 flows down toward the second ball entrance 640 or the V prize winning device 650 depending on the operation status of the electric accessory 640a. Next, the configuration of the V winning device 650 will be described.

The V winning device 650 is configured to be variable between an open state in which a ball can win a prize and a closed state in which it is difficult to win a prize. The opening/closing door 650f1 of the device 650 is operated to change to an open state in which a ball can win in the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a.

In addition, although the details will be described later, in some of the "jackpots" of the special symbols (jackpot D), the opening/closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is operated in the same manner as in the case of winning the above-mentioned "small win". It is configured to operate As a result, when the open/close door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 operates, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp whether the special symbol "big win" or "small win" is won.

Here, the configuration of the V winning device 650 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 3 to 7. FIG. First, as shown in FIG. 3, when the opening/closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is in a closed state closing the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a, the ball is configured to be able to flow down its upper surface. A ball that reaches the V winning device 650 while the V winning device 650 is in the closed state flows down toward the lower left side (see FIG. 3) on the opening/closing door 650f1 and flows out toward the variable winning device 65. On the other hand, when the V winning device 650 is open (that is, during the small winning game), the ball enters the V winning device 650 .

In this embodiment, the opening period of the V winning device 650 during the small winning game is configured to be 0.1 seconds x 12 times, and at the timing when the V winning device 650 opens, it flows down on the opening and closing door 650f1. The ball that is in position enters the V winning device 650 . Balls that have won a prize in the V winning device 650 are arranged to flow down toward the detection port 650a1 (see FIG. 6A) while flowing down on the first regulating member 651 or the second regulating member 652. there is With this configuration, even if the ball flowing down on the opening/closing door 650f1 enters the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a of the V winning device 650 from any position on the opening/closing door 650f1, the ball can be smoothly released. can flow down.

In the present embodiment, the period during which the opening/closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is continuously opened is set to 0.1 seconds, but during the opening period of the opening door 650f1, Any other period may be set as long as the ball can enter the V winning device 650 during the period. Also, in the present embodiment, the number of times the opening/closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is opened in one small winning game is set to 12 times, but other times may be set.

Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the opening and closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is opened once in the small winning game and then opened next time (opening interval period). Five seconds are set after the first and tenth opening operations, and 0.5 seconds are set at other timings. This is for making it easier for the V winning device 650 to win the ball during the period in which the small winning game is being played. Specifically, when it is determined that the V switch 650e3 has not detected the ball at the time when the fifth opening operation is completed during the small winning game, during the interval period between opening after the fifth opening operation is completed In addition, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display a game guide display for emphasizing and prompting the player to play the game to the right.

Then, even when a right-handed game is started by grasping the game guide display displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the interval period between openings is set so that the ball can enter the V winning device 650 is set longer than usual. Also, when it is determined that the V switch 650e3 has not detected the ball at the time when the 10th opening operation during the small winning game is completed, the same control processing is executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for a player who does not play an appropriate game during a small winning game (a player who does not play a right-handed game) to perform an appropriate game. In this way, during the specific game (small winning game) in which the opening action is executed multiple times, when it is determined that the interval period between opening is set longer than the other and it is determined that the appropriate game is not performed By making it possible to display a game guidance display for prompting proper game contents, a player who is playing a wrong game can be made to play the game without anxiety.

In this embodiment, a longer special opening interval period than others is set after the 5th and 10th opening operations during the small winning game. In this way, by providing a plurality of timings for displaying the game guidance display to the player during one small win game, it is possible to make the player more likely to play an appropriate game. In addition, in the case where the timing for displaying the game guidance display is provided a plurality of times, at least the notification timing for the second shift should be set to a timing that the player who is playing the game normally cannot reach. That is, although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, by performing a right-handed game continuously during a small winning game, at least one ball enters in one opening operation of the opening and closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650. Since it is configured to be able to hit the ball, if a normal game (continuous right-handed game) is performed, the number of winning prizes (10), which is a condition for ending the small winning game, will be reached during the tenth opening operation. It reaches and the small winning game is ended.

That is, the inter-opening interval period executed after the 10th opening operation during the small winning game is a timing that cannot be reached when a normal game (continuous right-handed game) is performed. Therefore, by setting the timing for displaying the game guidance display using this timing, the interval period between special openings that is unnecessarily long for the player who is playing a normal game (continuously playing a right-handed game) It is no longer executed, and the small winning game can be smoothly executed.

It should be noted that, as in the present embodiment, if the first special opening interval period is set to the timing reached even if a normal game (continued right-handed game) is performed (after the fifth opening operation is completed) , the timing at which the first inter-special opening interval period starts (fifth opening operation end timing), or the timing at which a predetermined period has elapsed since the first inter-special opening interval period started (fifth opening operation It is determined whether the V switch 650e3 has detected the ball at the timing when the period required for the ball entered inside to be discharged from the V winning device 650), and if the V switch 650e3 has detected the ball If it is determined, a notification effect is displayed to notify that during the first special opening interval period, and if it is determined that the V switch 650e3 has not detected the ball, the game guide is displayed as described above. Configure it to display. As a result, the interval period between special openings set during the small winning game can be effectively used according to the game content.

Furthermore, during the second special opening interval period, it is preferable to display the game guidance display even when the V switch 650e3 has already detected the ball. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the small winning game ends without causing the predetermined number (10) of balls to enter the V winning device 650 during the small winning game.

Next, the structure of the V winning device 650 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the V winning device 650. As shown in FIG. The V winning device 650 is, as shown in FIG. A base member 650c for screwing to the game board 13, and a plurality of LEDs arranged on the back side of the base member 650c for lighting the front side of the pachinko machine 10 from the back side of the base member 650c. The arranged LED board 650d, the back cover body 650e sandwiching the LED board 650d with the base member 650c, and the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a formed in the opening forming member 650b. An opening/closing unit 650f having an opening/closing door 650f1, a flow path cover body 650g combined with the back side of the back cover body 650e to form a flow path, and a flow path formed by the back cover body 650e and the flow path cover body 650g. A switching member 650h that protrudes into the path and switches the flow path of the game ball, a link member 650i that is engaged with the switching member 650h, a rear surface cover body 650j that is arranged on the rear side of the flow path cover body 650g, and its rear surface. A channel solenoid 650k fixed to the back side of the cover body 650j to operate the link member 650i, and a fixing cover body 650m for covering the channel solenoid 650k from the back side and fixing it to the back cover body 650j with screws. It consists of

FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view of the V winning device 650. As shown in FIG. 5(c) is a top view of the V winning device 650, and FIG. 5(b) is a cross-sectional view of the V winning device 650 taken along the line Lb-Lb. As shown in FIG. 5(b), the V winning device 650 is formed with a specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a, which is an opening into which a game ball can enter. The specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a has a substantially rectangular opening above the pachinko machine 10, and the game balls passing through the opening are guided leftward in FIG. 5(b). A bottom surface that is inclined downward to the left is formed. A detection port 650a1 composed of a magnetic sensor (ball detection switch) 650c1 for detecting the winning of a game ball is arranged at the left end of the bottom surface. A game ball that has passed through the detection port 650a1 is guided to a sorting channel formed on the back side of the back cover body 650e shown in FIG. 5(b).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 5B, the opening of the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a is opened so that game balls can be entered by an opening/closing door 650f1 configured with a shutter mechanism that can be retracted from the game board 13 side. It can be changed between a state and a closed state in which it is impossible to enter the ball (difficult to enter the ball). In the closed state, the opening is completely covered with the opening/closing door 650f1, and the game ball can roll on the upper portion of the opening/closing door. In the open state, the opening/closing door 650f1 is retracted inside the base member 650c (inside the game board 13) to be retracted from the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a.

By configuring in this way, when the opening of the V winning device 650 is closed, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the open/close door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 and moves toward the second ball entrance 640 side. It is constructed so as to be guided, and it is possible to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 while keeping the right hitting state even during the time saving game (including the probability variable game), and immediately after the big win game. It is possible to reduce the trouble of changing the game method to left-handed. Therefore, the game can be played more easily.

In addition, in the open state, since the surface perpendicular to the direction in which the game balls flow down can be configured as the opening of the V winning device 650, more game balls can efficiently win in the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a. . Therefore, the time required for the jackpot game can be shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

FIG. 5(a) is a cross-sectional view along La-La shown in FIG. 5(b). As shown in FIG. 5A, the magnetic sensor 650c1 having the detection port 650a1 is fixed to the base member 650c so that the detection port 650a1 is inclined toward the distribution channel side of the back cover body 650e.

Next, with reference to FIG. 6, a description will be given of a configuration for distributing game balls guided to distribution channels of the back cover body 650e to a normal discharge channel 650e1 and a special discharge channel 650e2, which will be described later.

FIG. 6(a) is a rear view of the back cover body 650e showing a state in which the switching member 650h is actuated so that game balls are distributed to the special discharge port 650e2. As shown in FIG. 6(a), the switching member 650h has a locking hole 650h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 650i is inserted and a guiding piece 650h2 for guiding the game ball. is rotatably supported from the rear side. Here, the channel cover 650g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 650h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 650h can be rotated into the distribution channel from the back side of the channel cover 650g. It is configured so that it can be arranged as much as possible.

As shown in FIG. 6(a), the game ball guided into the distribution channel from the detection port 650a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 650h2 arranged diagonally downward to the left and guided to the special discharge port 650e2. . A game ball passing through the special discharge port 650e2 is detected by a V switch 650e3 configured by a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of the game ball provided in the special discharge port 650e2, and discharged out of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball. .

Here, details will be described later, but in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, a game ball passes through the V switch 650e3 described above during a small winning game, so that a big winning game is set after the small winning game. That is, the V switch 650e3 is configured as a trigger for starting a big winning game. In addition, the switching member 650h is a flow path (special discharge flow path 650e2) in which the ball that has won the V winning device 650 during the small win can pass through the V switch 650e3, or a flow path that cannot (difficultly) pass through the V switch 650e3. By setting the flow path solenoid 650k to ON, the winning ball in the V winning device 650 flows down the normal discharge flow path 650e1. (see FIG. 6(b)).

In the pachinko machine 10 used in the present embodiment, the flow path solenoid 650k is set to be OFF while the game is being played normally, and the winning ball of the V winning device 650 flows down the special discharge flow path 650e2. It consists of Then, when a fraudulent state is detected (for example, when a state in which the opening/closing door 650f1 is open despite the fact that no small prize has been won) is detected, the channel solenoid 650k is turned on to illegally win a prize. It is constructed so as to prevent (suppress) the ball from passing through the V-switch 650e3. Thus, when the channel solenoid 650k is set to OFF, the state maintained for a long period of time in the pachinko machine 10, that is, the ball winning the V winning device 650 flows down the special discharge channel 650e2. The power consumption of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced by providing a state in which the switching member 650h is maintained (see FIG. 6(a)).

In this way, the game state set after the small winning game is changed by the flow-down route of the game balls winning the V winning device 650 during the small winning game, so that the interest of the player is improved even during the small winning game. be able to. The time required to pass from the opening (specific winning opening) of the V winning device 650 to the entrance of the special ejection opening 650e2 (opening surface closed by the guiding piece 650h2 of the switching member 650h) is 1 second at the shortest. It is configured. By configuring in this way, even if the switching member 650h switches the flow-down route of the ball after detecting that the opening/closing door 650f1 has been opened in spite of the fact that no small win has been won, the ball will surely flow. It is possible to prevent the water from flowing down the special discharge channel 650e2.

In addition, a discharge confirmation switch 650e4 composed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting passage of a ball is provided at the end of the normal discharge passage 650e1. As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls that have entered the V winning device 650 have been discharged by the sum of the discharge confirmation switch 650e4 and the variable probability switch 650e3. In addition, the end timing of the small winning game (condition for ending the small winning game (when the V winning device 650 wins a predetermined number (10 pieces), or when the opening scenario of the V winning device 650 ends) is established When all the game balls that have entered the V winning device 650 are not discharged at the timing after the small winning ending period has passed, it is determined that there is an abnormality inside the V winning device 650, and it is sent to the outside. It is preferable to configure so as to notify the abnormality or stop the game so that the jackpot game or the normal game is not started. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from progressing in a state in which a part of the pachinko machine 10 has an abnormality, thereby preventing a secondary abnormality from occurring.

In this way, the game ball that has entered the specific winning port (V winning port) 650a of the V winning device 650 is detected by the magnetic sensor 650c1, and based on this, the player receives a prize ball (one ball winning in this embodiment) as a privilege. 10 prize balls) can be paid out. In addition, by using the game ball after being detected, it can be sorted whether or not it passes through the V switch 650e3, so that it can be sorted whether or not the big win game is executed after the small win game is finished. can be done. Therefore, there is no need to provide a dedicated prize winning port (specific area) for awarding a jackpot game separately from the V winning device 650, and the space of the game board 13 can be effectively used.

Next, with reference to FIG. 7, the structure of the spherical lower surface of the opening/closing door 650f1 that opens and closes the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650 will be described. FIG. 7(a) is a schematic plan view showing a state in which the opening/closing door 650f1 closes the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650. FIG. As shown in FIG. 7(a), the opening/closing door 650f1 of the present embodiment moves the ball that reaches the upper surface of the V winning device 650 along the slope of the upper surface of the V winning device 650 (see FIG. 2) to the V winning device. It is configured to flow down from the right upper surface 650 y 1 of the 650 to the left upper surface 650 y 2 via the upper surface of the opening/closing door 650 f 1 and flow toward the variable winning device 65 .

A first delay member 650fa, a second delay member 650fb, and a third delay member 650fc are provided on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 650f1 as delay members for delaying the falling of the ball. is configured so that the period of time during which the water flows down is 0.6 seconds. This flowing period (0.6 seconds) is longer than the interval (closing period (0.5 seconds)) when the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a of the V winning device 650 is opened multiple times by the small winning game. configured to be long. By configuring in this way, the ball flowing down on the opening/closing door 650f1 is configured to surely win when the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a is opened by the small winning game.

When the small winning game is executed in the state shown in FIG. 7(a) and the opening/closing door 650f1 is changed to the open state, the state shown in FIG. 7(b) is entered. FIG. 7(b) is a schematic plan view showing a state in which the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650 is open. As shown in FIG. 7(b), when the opening/closing door 650f1 is in an open state, it moves so as to retreat inside the game board 13, and the ball flowing down the right upper surface 650y1 enters the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a. The specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a is opened so that winning is possible. In addition, the ball flowing down on the opening/closing door 650f1 also enters the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a when the opening/closing door 650f1 is positioned at the retracted position.

In addition, the V winning device 650 is equipped with a third mechanism for smoothing the flow of the ball after winning regardless of the position from which the ball flowing down on the opening and closing door 650f1 enters the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a. 1 regulating member 651 and 2nd regulating member 652 are provided (see FIG. 2). After being aligned in a line via the 2 regulating members 652, it is configured to flow down toward the detection port 650a1 having a passage width of one ball. By providing the first regulating member 651 and the second regulating member 652 in this way, even if the detection opening 650a1 is provided below the first regulating member, the ball that has won with great force from the opening/closing door 650f1 is directly detected through the detection opening 650a1. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the failure of the ball detection switch 650c1 provided in the detection port 650a1. In addition, a flow path (a flow path flowing down on the first restricting member 651 and the second restricting member 652) for aligning the balls until the balls pass through the detection port 650a1 having a passage width corresponding to one ball is secured. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the balls are clogged in the V winning device 650 and the game is hindered.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the determination result of the determination means (the result of the lottery of the special symbols) is a predetermined determination result (small hit). The falling period (0.6 seconds) required for the ball to flow down on the variable member (opening/closing door 650f1) is longer than the interval period (0.5 seconds) between opening of the variable member (opening/closing door 650f1). Therefore, the ball flowing down on the variable member during the opening interval (the timing when the open/close door 650f1 is closed) during the small winning game is surely won in the V winning device 650 at the next opening timing. be able to.

In addition, only the balls flowing down on the variable member are allowed to enter the V winning device 650 during the small winning game so that a predetermined number (10) can be won during the small winning game. Since the number of times of opening operation in the winning game (12 times) is set more than the number of winning prizes (10 pieces) for the end condition of the small winning game, even if one opening period (0.1 seconds) is set short , a sufficient number of prizes can be secured. In addition, by setting one opening period long, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which an excessive number of balls are awarded to the V winning device 650 during the small winning game.

As shown in FIG. 8, on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. and a payout device 133 which is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and which pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 9). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 9) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In the main controller 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as the setting of the jackpot lottery, the display settings of the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display results of the second symbol display device. to run.

In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc., and a stack area for storing various flags, counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the second symbol display device, the second symbol reservation lamp, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing driving and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side as a front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these through the input/output port 205 to send.

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. , and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253 .

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot the ball. . The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51 , and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51 .

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effects. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the first frame button 22, the second frame button 23, and the like. The other devices 228 include various drive motors for operating drive accessories for presentation provided in the pachinko machine 10 .

Sound lamp control device 113, based on various commands (fluctuation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from main control device 110, determines the display mode of third symbol display device 81, and sends the determined display mode to the command The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). The audio lamp control device 113 also receives input from the first frame button 22 and the second frame button 23 (hereinafter, when both the first frame button 22 and the second frame button 23 are indicated, they are referred to as the frame button 22). is monitored, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the display control device changes the stage displayed on the third pattern display device 81 or changes the effect contents at the time of super reach. 114. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the rear image is an image displayed on the rear side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 . The display control device 114 displays various images on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 .

When the frame button 22 is operated by the player, an accessory drive command is transmitted to the other device 228 in order to drive an accessory for performance (not shown), or a command corresponding to the operation content of the frame button 22 is sent. A sound output command for outputting sound to the sound output device 226 is set, and a lamp output command for causing the lamp display device 227 to emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the operation content of the frame button 22 is set. can be configured to

Also, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the display control device 114 . In the audio lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third pattern display device 81, output the audio corresponding to the display content from the audio output device 226, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 changes the third pattern, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113 . The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 8). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 8) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

Next, the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 19. FIG. FIGS. 10A and 10B are schematic diagrams schematically showing display contents of the third pattern display device 81 in this embodiment. The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a 15-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114, which will be described later, so that, for example, three pattern columns, left, middle and right, are displayed. Is displayed. As shown in FIG. 10(a), the third design (special design 1 or special design 2) displayed on the display screen of the third design display device 81 is 10 imitating numbers from "0" to "9". Each is composed of a main pattern of the type. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the lottery by the main controller 110, which will be described later, is a big hit, the same main symbols (for example, "777") are displayed in a variable display, and the variable display is performed. It is configured so that a jackpot occurs after the is over. That is, the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol by the main control device 110 .

Specifically, the main display area Dm displays three pattern rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 on the left, middle, and right, respectively. The above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is periodically scrolled from top to bottom for variable display.

Also, in the main display area Dm, a third symbol is stop-displayed on the activated line L1. When the third symbols are stopped on the activated line in a combination of big winning symbols (in the first embodiment, a combination of the same main symbols), a big winning moving image is displayed as a big winning.

In addition, the mode of the variable display of the third symbols in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the one described above, and is arbitrary. The number of symbols in the row can be changed as appropriate. Also, the patterns displayed in a variable manner on the third pattern display device 81 are not limited to the above. Further, the area where the third symbol is variably displayed may be configured to be variable. For example, when a specific effect is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the variable display area of the third symbol or moving the variable display area to a position that is difficult for the player to visually recognize (for example, a corner of the display screen), making it difficult for the player to understand whether the third symbol is changing. You may make it Also, during the period when the special symbol is fluctuating, the fluctuation of the third symbol may be temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) and then changed again.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol and the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol are the same (to the extent that the player has difficulty distinguishing ), but the display mode and display area of the third symbol may be changed so as to correspond to the type of special symbol that is fluctuating.

Next, the contents actually displayed on the third pattern display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 10(b). As shown in FIG. 10B, a small display area Dm2 is formed on the upper left of the main display area Dm in front view. This small display area Dm2 displays a guidance display mode for guiding the player in the direction in which the ball is to be shot (game direction) (see FIG. 19(a)). That is, in this embodiment, the small display area Dm2 is used as the guidance display area. With this configuration, the player can easily grasp which area of the game board the ball should be shot to by simply looking at the guide display mode displayed in the guide display area. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for players to understand.

A small display area Dm1 is formed on the upper right side of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front. This small display area Dm1 is configured to allow the variable display of the third pattern to be displayed in a simple manner. Here, when the variable display is executed in the small display area Dm1, for example, a display effect such as an effect in which a predetermined character performs an action or an effect to prompt the user to press the frame button 22 is executed in the main display region Dm. is the case. During execution of the display effect, by displaying the effect in a larger main display area Dm, it is possible to provide a more comprehensible effect. Further, by simply displaying the variable display of the third pattern in the small display area Dm1 during execution of the display effect, it is easy for the player to know that the variable display of the third pattern is continuing. can be understood.

Furthermore, a sub-display area Ds is formed below the main display area Dm. In this secondary display area Ds, as shown in FIG. 10(b), a reserved symbol consisting of a black circle is displayed. As described above, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while the first symbol display device 37 is performing the variable display, the number of times the ball enters is suspended up to four times. The number of reserved symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds is the same as the number of reserved ball entries. In the first embodiment, the maximum number of reserved balls for the first special symbol is four, and the second special symbol is set so that the reserved balls cannot be secured. , a maximum of four reserved symbols corresponding to the first special symbol are displayed.

In this embodiment, the number of reserved symbols is varied in correspondence with the number of reserved balls, but the method of displaying the number of reserved balls is not limited to this. For example, the number of held balls may be displayed numerically. In addition, it is also possible to visually inform the player of the number of reserved balls by changing the appearance of the character according to the increase or decrease in the number of reserved balls.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, in addition to this, the game result suggesting mode for suggesting the game result (lottery result of each symbol) to the player, and the content of the effect display executed in the main display area Dm. The effect explanation mode for explanation, the frame button related display mode for indicating the timing of operating the frame button 22 and the result of the operation, and the win related information display mode for displaying information about the big win game are displayed in the sub display area Ds. The ratio of the display area between the main display area Dm and the sub-display area Ds is set to differ depending on the content to be displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

In addition, when the combination of the third symbols stopped and displayed is a combination corresponding to a loss and there is a held ball, a variable display corresponding to a lottery based on the held ball is started after the stop display for 1 second. . In addition, when there are a plurality of reserved balls, a lottery is executed based on the reserved ball corresponding to the oldest incoming ball in terms of time.

On the other hand, when the third pattern of the combination corresponding to the missing of the special pattern is stop-displayed for one second in the absence of the reserved ball, the stop-display of the third pattern continues thereafter. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses or a new ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 . Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed since the third symbol was stop-displayed, a demonstration effect indicating that the game is not being executed is displayed. It is rare that no ball enters either the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 even though the player continuously shoots the ball for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). In many cases where the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the game is not played at all by the pachinko machine 10 because the player quits the game. caused by.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed after the third symbol is stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing a game, and the demonstration effect is started. do. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily judge whether the game is being played based on the presence or absence of display of the demonstration performance. On the other hand, if a new ball enters either the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 before a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, the new ball enters A variable display of the corresponding third symbol is executed.

The sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally below the main display area Dm, and among the balls that have entered the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640, the balls that have not been changed ( This is an area for displaying the number of held balls, which is the number of held balls. Although the details will be described later, the sub display area Ds includes a first display area Ds1, a second display area Ds2 for displaying game contents and effect contents to the player, and a reserved ball display area. and a running region Ds3 in which the pending symbols are shifted and displayed as running pending symbols Dsa corresponding to the variation currently being executed (see FIG. 13(a)).

The pending symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds are the pending symbols corresponding to the next variation (front view of FIG. 13(b) The leftmost reserved pattern Dsb) is erased, and the remaining reserved patterns (Dsc to Dse) are shifted leftward and displayed. Then, the erased reserved design Dsb is displayed as the reserved design Dsa during execution in the display area Ds3 during execution. As a result, it is possible to notify the player of which reserved symbol the variable display being executed corresponds to, for example, the display mode of the reserved symbol can be changed to display the special symbol corresponding to the reserved symbol. To enable a player to easily know that variable display corresponding to reserved symbols whose display mode is changed by the look-ahead performance is executed when a performance (so-called look-ahead performance) for increasing expectations that a lottery is a big win is executed. can recognize.

In the present embodiment, only the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 can be held up to four times. Alternatively, the number of times may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Also, the number of balls entering the second ball entrance 640 may be configured to be able to be reserved up to a predetermined number, and the upper limit of the number of balls entering the first ball entrance 64 and the second The upper limit of the number of held balls for entering the ball opening 640 may be different from the upper limit of the number of held balls for entering the first ball opening 64. It may be more than the upper limit of the number of retained balls for, or conversely it may be less. In addition, instead of displaying the reserved symbols in the sub-display area Ds, the number of reserved balls may be indicated by a number in a part of the third pattern display device 81, or the four divided areas may be changed by the number of reserved balls ( For example, they may be displayed in different colors or lighting patterns. Further, since the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37, the third symbol display device 81 may not display the number of reserved balls. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, which is the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

11 to 19, description will be given of the effects displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. This third pattern display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first pattern display device 37 . For example, when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (start winning), the first special symbol or the second special symbol (first pattern) is displayed in a variable manner. Furthermore, in the third symbol display device 81, the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. In addition, the variable display of the third symbol is performed in common with respect to the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Also, the second special symbol is prioritized over the first special symbol and is configured to be variably displayed, so that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not variably displayed at the same time. It is

In this embodiment, as the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 corresponding to the special symbol lottery, it is possible to set a continuous effect executed across a plurality of special symbol variations. This continuous effect is executed when a winning information command for indicating various counter values (lottery results) acquired when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. The lottery result of the special symbol variation corresponding to the command is displayed during the period until the variation display corresponding to the special symbol variation is executed (variation display corresponding to the special symbol variation executed before the target special symbol variation is executed) is used to suggest to the player.

In this way, by suggesting the lottery result of the target special symbol by using the fluctuation period of the special symbol executed before the target special symbol, a longer-term effect is provided to the player. can be provided and the production effect can be enhanced. In addition, the result of the lottery of the special symbols (for example, loss) can be executed continuously without being highlighted each time, so that the player's desire to play can be prevented from occurring. can.

In this embodiment, the score effect is executed as the above-described continuous effect. This score effect includes the effect (score giving effect) for giving points for changing the predetermined level information (gauge amount) to different level information (gauge amount), and the case where the level information becomes the specific level information (When the gauge amount reaches 6 and the charge amount is accumulated), a specific effect (charge effect) that can be executed is an effect that can be executed.

Overall, in the scoring effect that is executed as a continuous effect, the stage information varies a lot, and the more the charge amount is accumulated, the higher the expectation that the lottery result of the special symbol that is the target of the scoring effect will be a big hit. is configured to be

As a result, during the period during which the score effect is being executed (a plurality of special symbol fluctuation periods), the score giving effect is executed so as to gradually change the stage information, thereby increasing the player's expectation of winning the jackpot. It is possible to visually notify the player, prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early, and enhance the presentation effect.

In the present embodiment, during the above-described score effect, the final score effect to be executed during the period in which the target special symbol variation is executed, and the special symbol variation other than the target special symbol variation (that is, the target It consists of a pre-score effect that is executed during the period in which the special symbol variation that is executed before the special symbol variation) is executed, and in each score effect, the stage information (gauge amount) that is executed is different stage information ( Gauge amount) can be executed multiple times. Then, this score giving effect is set to be executable a predetermined number of times (1 to 4 times) corresponding to one special symbol variation period, and furthermore, points are given in one score giving effect. The number of suggesting effects that suggests that a score is actually given out of the suggesting effects (or the number of times that points are not given (Gase effect)), and the number of times given in one given effect It is configured so that the number of points obtained can be different.

By using the scoring effect configured as described above, various effects can be executed during the scoring effect, and the player can quickly grasp the lottery results of the special symbols targeted for the scoring effect. It is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the scoring performance early.

In this embodiment, as a score giving effect, the score is displayed (given) on the display screen of the third design display device 81 during the variable display of the special design, and the displayed (given) score is a predetermined amount (for example, 6). A specific effect (charge effect) is executed when accumulated. Thus, by grasping the score displayed in the third pattern, the presence or absence of execution of the specific performance and the execution timing of the specific performance can be predicted, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

Here, with reference to FIG. 11, the flow of the score giving effect and the specific effect executed in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 11(a) is a timing chart showing an example of the flow of an effect when the player operates the frame button 22 when an operation score giving effect requiring the operation of the frame button 22 is executed as the score giving effect. FIG. 11(b) is a timing chart showing the flow of effects when an operation score effect requiring operation of the frame button 22 is executed as the advance notice effect and the player does not operate the frame button 22. is. In addition, in FIGS. 11(a) and (b), in order to explain the flow of the score giving effect and the specific effect, an example in which the score giving effect and the specific effect are executed in one special symbol variation is shown. However, the score giving effect and the specific effect can be executed even over multiple special symbol variations.

As shown in FIG. 11(a), as the effect mode of the effect executed during one variable display, the score giving effect (GP effect) for giving the score is performed three times, and the player presses the frame button 22. An operation score giving effect (operation GP effect) in which points are given when operated is performed once, and a specific effect (charge effect) that is executed when a predetermined amount (6) of points is accumulated is performed twice. It is configured such that the effect mode to be displayed is set as a variable display.

When the variation of the special symbols is started, the first score giving effect (GP effect) is started after a predetermined period, and the score (P) "2" is displayed (given) as the result of the effect. As a result, when the first score giving effect (GP effect) is completed, the stage information is displayed in a display mode indicating the gauge amount "2". Next, an operation score imparting effect (operation GP effect) is executed, and a score (P) of "3" is obtained as a result of the execution of a predetermined operation on the operation means (frame button 22) in the effect. Displayed (given). As a result, the gauge amount is variably displayed from "2" to "5" when the operation score imparting effect (operation GP effect) ends.

After that, the second score giving effect (GP effect) is started, and the score (P) "1" is displayed (given), so that the gauge amount is variably displayed from "5" to "6". In this embodiment, when the gauge amount reaches "6", the charge amount "1" is accumulated and the gauge amount is variably displayed to the initial value "0". Then, when the charge amount becomes "1", the first specific effect (charge effect) is executed.

Here, as the content of the effect executed as the specific effect, a suggestive effect that suggests the lottery result of the special symbol that is the target of the score effect this time, and a special image that is given to the player only when a specific condition is met. and videos. When the first specific effect is completed, the third score giving effect (GP effect) is executed with the gauge amount “0” and the charge amount “1” indicated, and the score (P) “5” is displayed (given ), the gauge amount is variably displayed from "0" to "5".

After that, the fourth score giving effect (GP effect) is executed, and the score (P) "1" is displayed (given), so that the gauge amount is variably displayed from "5" to "6" and charged. The amount is variably displayed from "1" to "2". Then, the second specific effect (charge effect) is executed.

In addition, this second specific effect is a predetermined effect (for example, a big hit An effect for notifying that an effect that sharply increases the expectation of the player) will be executed. Specifically, immediately before the predetermined effect is executed, an effect prompting the player to operate the operation means (the frame button 22) is executed as the second specific effect. With such a configuration, the player can be made to think that the predetermined performance has been executed based on the operation of the operation means (the frame button 22), so that the player is motivated to participate in the game. be able to.

According to the example described above with reference to FIG. 11(a), the success of the operation score giving effect (operation GP effect) causes the second specific effect to be executed at a predetermined timing (timing immediately before the predetermined effect is executed). However, if the operation point giving effect (operation GP effect) fails, points cannot be obtained in the operation point giving effect (operation GP effect), and at a predetermined timing There was a problem that the second specific effect could not be executed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, based on the effect result of the operation point giving effect (operation GP effect), the specific effect is executed at the timing immediately before the predetermined effect is executed, so that it is executed after that. It is configured to be able to execute a process of varying (correcting) the effect mode of the score giving effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 11(b), in the operation score giving effect (operation GP effect) executed during the score effect, the effect is produced when the player does not perform the predetermined operation on the frame button 22. explain the flow of As shown in FIG. 11(b), if the operation score giving effect (operation GP effect) fails and the score (P) cannot be obtained, the first specific effect (charge effect) is not executed, and correction is performed. By executing the subsequent score giving effect (changed GP effect) and displaying (given) the total score (P) of "10", the charge amount of "2" is acquired in the same manner as in FIG. 11(a) described above. A second specific effect (charge effect) is executed in the state of being held.

By configuring in this way, even if the score effect uses the effect (operation score giving effect) in which the score to be given is changed based on the operation result of the operation means by the player, the specific effect is executed at the predetermined timing. Therefore, the performance effect can be enhanced.

Next, the display mode of the points given (displayed) during the score giving effect in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 and 13(a). FIG. 12(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the number of times the gauge amount reaches "6" (accumulated number of charge amounts) in this embodiment, and FIG. FIG. 12C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the gauge amount to be charged, and FIG. 12C shows, among the ready-to-win effects executed in the present embodiment, the degree of expectation of the first ready-to-win state is made to correspond to the charge amount and the gauge amount. FIG. 12D is a schematic diagram showing the degree of expectation of the second ready-to-win state among the ready-to-win effects executed in the present embodiment, in correspondence with the charge amount and the gauge amount. FIG. 12(e) to (g) show the flow of the display mode of the stage information (gauge amount and charge amount) when points are given in the score giving effect in this embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. Further, FIG. 13(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the score giving effect is executed in this embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 12A and 12B, in this embodiment, the gauge amount is accumulated up to a maximum of "6", and when the gauge amount reaches "6", the charge amount is added (accumulated) by "1". The charge amount is set to be added (accumulated) by "3" at maximum. That is, the step information is configured so that it can be divided into 18 steps as a whole.

Then, when the score (P) is displayed (given) on the third pattern display device 81 by executing the score giving effect, the gauge amount or charge amount is made to correspond to the displayed (given) score (P). The display mode is variably displayed so that is added. Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the number of points to be given in the score effect in the variable display is set based on the lottery result of the special symbols. In other words, the lottery results of the special symbols are divided into 18 levels of expectations, and are configured to be suggestible to the player.

In addition, in the present embodiment, at least a first ready-to-win mode and a second ready-to-win mode are provided as variable display (ready-to-reach display) for indicating whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a win. The reach mode is set so that the expected degree of big hit is different corresponding to the above-described charge amount and gauge amount. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12(c), the first ready-to-win state is set so that the degree of expectation for a big hit increases according to the number of points given in stages (that is, 18 levels). , As shown in FIG. 12(d), the second ready-to-win state is set so that the degree of expectation for a big win increases corresponding to only the gauge amount (that is, 6 levels).

With this configuration, the most advantageous stage for the player among the stage information displayed during the score presentation can be varied according to the contents of the variable display to be executed (the type of ready-to-reach mode to be executed). Therefore, it is possible to make the player expect a big win until the end (until the ready-to-win display is executed).

Next, with reference to FIG. 13(a), the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 displayed during the score giving effect will be specifically described. As shown in FIG. 13(a), when the score giving effect is executed, the storage gauge Dg is displayed in the main display area Dm. This storage gauge Dg visually displays the given score, and has six stages of gauge amounts (gauge 1 display area Dg1 to gauge display area Dg6) and three stages of charge display for indicating the charge amount. and a region Dg7.

The accumulation gauge Dg notifies the player of the current accumulated score amount (gauge amount and charge amount) by changing the display mode each time a score is awarded as a score giving effect. Here, the flow of changing the display mode of the storage gauge Dg will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 12(e) to 12(g).

First, when both the gauge amount and the charge amount are "0", when the score (P) "1" is displayed (given) by the score giving effect, the display mode of the gauge 1 display area Dg1 changes ( In FIG. 12(e), it is blacked out), and the display mode changes to indicate that the current gauge amount is "1" and the charge amount is "0". Further, when the given score (P) is accumulated up to "11", the display mode of the gauge 1 display area Dg1 to gauge 5 display area Dg5 changes (black filled), and the current charge amount "1" is displayed in the charge display area Dg7 to change the display mode to indicate that the current charge amount is "1" and the gauge is "5".

Then, when the score "1" is further accumulated from the state of FIG. 12(f), as shown in FIG. Thereafter, a value of "2" is displayed in the charge display area Dg7, and the gauge 1 display area Dg1 to gauge display area Dg6 are variably displayed in a display mode (initial display mode) indicating that no score is given. As a result, it is possible to visually notify that the gauge has reached the predetermined amount (6) and that the charge amount has been increased by one.

Next, the contents of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the score effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 18. FIG. First, FIG. 13(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a screen during execution of a score imparting effect in a state where a reserved pattern indicating winning information to be the target of the score effect is displayed in the first reserved pattern Dsb. be. As shown in FIG. 13(a), the portion (first reserved symbol Dsb) where the winning information to be the target of the score effect is displayed allows the player to determine which reserved symbol is the winning information to be the target of the score effect. Displayed as a target reserved pattern mode (a display mode formed by a "black circle" indicating that there is winning information and "three dots" indicating that it is a target for scoring effects). there is As a result, since it is possible to grasp the period during which the score effect is continuously executed for the player (the number of special symbol fluctuations in which the score effect continues), the effect situation of the score effect (executed during the score effect) The result of the present score presentation can be predicted based on the performance result of the already executed score presentation performance (given points) and the remaining period of the score presentation among the plurality of score presentation performances.

In addition, in the present embodiment, a configuration is used in which the winning information to be the target of the score effect is notified by changing the display mode of the reserved pattern, but other configurations may be used. The number of times of special design fluctuations to be continuously executed, that is, the number of special design fluctuations until the special design fluctuations corresponding to the winning information to be the target of the score production are executed (or the winning information to be the target of the score production) The number of times display indicating the number of special symbol variations including the corresponding special symbol variations) is displayed on the display screen, and is displayed at the timing when a new special symbol variation is started (or when the special symbol variation is finished). The display of the number of times may be subtracted, or the time during which the score effect is continuously executed may be specifically displayed. Further, it may be determined whether or not the period during which the score effect is continuously executed is longer than a predetermined period, and a display mode corresponding to the determination result may be displayed on the display screen.

In addition, in this embodiment, a configuration is used in which the player can grasp the period during which the score presentation is continuously executed, but it is configured so that the player is not allowed to grasp the period during which the score presentation is continuously performed. can be As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to understand how long the score performance will continue, and the player can always play the game while the score performance is being executed, making the player's heart pound.

While the score giving effect is being executed, the storage gauge Dg is displayed in the main display area Dm, and the display content (score The display mode of each display area is changed corresponding to the effect result of the given effect). In addition, a period during which the score giving effect is not executed during the score effect period, or a display mode with a higher display priority than the score giving effect (for example, a specific effect corresponding to the charge amount or to notify an abnormality of the pachinko machine 10 ) is displayed, the storage status display area DK is displayed instead of the storage gauge Dg, and the current storage status (score acquisition status) is simply displayed. As a result, it is possible to display other contents in an easy-to-understand manner for the player while informing the player that the score presentation is in progress.

It should be noted that the storage status display area DK may be configured to be displayed all the time during the period in which the specific effect is being executed. The storage gauge Dg may be configured to be displayed only during the period when it is not displayed. In the case of using the former configuration, since the accumulated state display area DK is continuously displayed during execution of the score effect, it is easy for the player to understand that the accumulated state display area DK indicates the effect contents of the score effect. can be grasped. Further, when the latter configuration is used, it is possible to reduce the area of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 for indicating the production situation of the score production (score giving situation up to the present time), and display the third pattern. The display screen of the device 81 can be effectively used for other effect displays.

In FIG. 13(a), an effect of giving a score (P) of "2" is displayed as the point giving effect, and the display mode of the storage gauge Dg is changed to the display mode corresponding to the given score (P). A display for making the change (corresponding to an arrow for reflecting the display content of the effect display area Da1 on the storage gauge Dg) is executed. Also, a value corresponding to the result of the score giving effect is added to the storage status display area DK. After that, the display mode of the storage gauge Dg is varied in accordance with the display contents displayed in the effect display area Da1. Specifically, the charge 1 display area Da1 and the charge 2 display area Da2 are changed in display mode corresponding to the point (P) "2" being given, and the charge amount is stored to indicate that the charge amount is "2". It changes to the display mode of the gauge Dg (see FIG. 13(b)).

As described above, the display mode of the storage gauge Dg is changed after the result of the score giving effect executed during the score effect is displayed in the effect display area Da1. It is possible to make the player pay attention to the executed score giving effect in order to quickly grasp the .

In the present embodiment, the display mode of the storage gauge Dg is changed after the result of the score giving effect is displayed in the effect display area Da1. Part of the performance result of the score giving performance (for example, a part of the score (P) to be given as a result of whether or not the score is given) is stored so as to notify the player during the execution of the score giving performance. The display mode of the gauge Dg may be varied, or the display mode of the storage gauge Dg may be varied so as to notify the player of the range of points (P) that can be given in the score giving performance being executed. can be As a result, it is possible to predict the performance result of the current score giving performance based on the performance contents of the score giving performance being executed and the variable state of the display mode of the storage gauge Dg, so that the performance effect is enhanced. can be done.

In this case, as a configuration for changing the display mode of the storage gauge Dg, for example, a display mode different from the first display mode (black display mode in FIG. 13B) indicating that the score (P) is given (for example, a display mode in which the corresponding display area blinks, a display mode in a color different from black, etc.). As a result, the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner that the current display mode of the storage gauge Dg is in the middle of the state in which the score giving effect is being executed.

In addition, when using a configuration in which the display mode of the storage gauge Dg is changed to an intermediate stage display mode in order to suggest the effect result of the score giving effect during execution of the score giving effect, there are operations that can be performed by the player. The content of the intermediate stage display mode may be changed according to the operation content of the means (frame button 22). In this case, when a predetermined operation is performed on the operating means (frame button 22), it is preferable to display the result of the point giving effect being executed in a detailed manner. As a result, the player who wants to quickly grasp the performance result of the score giving performance can positively operate the operation means (the frame button 22), and the performance effect can be enhanced.

In the state shown in FIG. 13(a), when the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning information to be the target of the score effect displayed in the reserved symbol Dsb is started, the display contents shown in FIG. 13(b) are executed. be done. FIG. 13(b) shows the score giving effect when the variable display (hereinafter referred to as target variable display) corresponding to the winning information to be the target of the score effect (hereinafter referred to as target winning information) is executed. It is a schematic diagram showing an example. As shown in FIG. 13(b), when the pending symbol indicating the target winning information is shifted to the digested symbol (executing symbol) Dsa, that is, when the target fluctuation display is executed, the digested symbol (executing symbol) ) A score giving effect using Dsa is executed by enlarging the small area Ds3 of the sub-display area Ds.

Here, the digested pattern (executing pattern) Dsa is changed to a plurality of performance symbols and displayed in rotation, and the performance result of the score giving performance is presented to the player in the display mode of the performance symbols stopped and displayed in the roulette performance display area Ds4. A notifying effect is executed.

In addition, the score giving effect executed in the small area Ds3 is set to stop display when the player operates the operation means (frame button 22). is notified to the player using the comment display in the main display area Dm and the button display mode Da2 imitating the frame button 22 . When the player operates the frame button 22 in this state, as shown in FIG. 14(a), the rotating display of the performance symbols is stopped, and the result of the score giving effect (FIG. 14(a)) is displayed in the roulette effect display area Ds4. , the score (P) 4 points given) is displayed. Then, the display modes of the storage gauge Dg and the storage status display area DK are changed to indicate that 4 points have been given, and it is notified that the charge amount has become "1".

In addition, in this embodiment, in the operation score imparting effect for displaying the effect result by operating the frame button 22, the point is not given if the frame button 22 is not operated. As a result, depending on whether or not the player operates the frame button 22, it is possible to change the state of giving points. Therefore, the player can be motivated to participate in the production.

When the charge amount becomes "1" by the score giving effect shown in FIG. 14(a), a specific effect is executed as shown in FIG. 14(b). FIG. 14(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a score effect. When the special effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 14(b), a display mode for operating the frame button 23 (see FIG. 1) is displayed in the main display area Dm, and the acquired charge is displayed in the small area Ds2. A comment indicating that a specific effect using is being executed is displayed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 15(a) and FIG. 15(b), the content of the score giving effect during the score effect in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 15(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect mode of the score giving effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 15(b) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing another example of the effect mode of the score giving effect;

According to the score giving effect shown in FIG. 15(a), the effect result of the score giving effect is displayed using the display mode of the third pattern displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. ing. Specifically, the display mode (character "P") indicating that the score (P) is given as the result of the score giving effect this time, and the score (P) given in the score giving effect this time. A production result display mode Da2 configured from a score display mode Da3 (value of "1") indicating a number is displayed.

FIG. 15(a) shows an example of a pattern in which a score (P) of "1" is given as a result of the score giving effect. replaces the display mode of the effect result display mode Da2 with a display mode (letter "P") indicating that the score (P) is given as the effect result of the score giving effect this time, and the score (P) is displayed. A display mode (for example, the character "?") that suggests that the score is not given is displayed, or the character "P" is displayed, and a display mode in which the score display mode Da3 is set to ("0") is displayed. be.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, this effect result display mode Da2 is also used when notifying the player of the effect contents other than the effect result of the score giving effect, for example, it corresponds to the special symbol variation during execution. Then, as the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the number of executions of the expectation effect that improves the expectation of the big hit (for example, the third symbol is temporarily stopped and changed again). It is also used to notify in advance the number of times the characters "chance" are displayed during the variable display. In this case, specifically, as the effect result display mode Da2, a display mode in which the characters "chance" and the value indicating the number of executions are combined is displayed.

With this configuration, when the display of the performance result display mode Da2 is started, the player is informed of whether the display mode is to display the performance result of the score giving performance or other performance contents. It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether it is a thing or not, and it is possible to make people pay attention to the content of the production.

In the above-described effect result display mode Da2, at the timing when any one of the third symbols (three third symbols) being variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is stopped and displayed, the third symbol is stopped and displayed. The effect result display mode Da2 is stopped and displayed in place of the three symbols. In this effect result display mode Da2, a part of the effect result display mode Da2 (display indicating the target effect of the current effect result display (for example, the letter "P")) is displayed at the point of stop display, and then , the display control is performed so that the score display mode Da3 is displayed. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in order of which performance the current performance result display mode Da2 is and what the result is, so that the player can continue to pay attention to the contents of the performance. be able to.

In addition, the display order of the effect result display mode Da2 is not limited to the contents described above. may be configured to display In addition, a plurality of display modes (letter "P") indicating that a score (P) is given as a result of the present score giving effect are prepared, and the value displayed in the score display mode Da3 is predetermined. It may be configured to determine whether the value is larger than a value (for example, 3) and display a display mode corresponding to the determination result from among a plurality of display modes.

In addition, during the period in which the display mode (character "P") indicating that the score (P) is given as the effect result of the score giving effect this time is displayed, and the score number display mode Da3 is not displayed, By grasping the type of the display mode displayed for indicating that the score (P) is given as the effect result of the score giving effect, the value displayed as the score display mode Da3 can be predicted, You can enjoy the performance effect. In this case, as the plurality of display modes, it is preferable to use, for example, display modes in which the colors of the displayed "P" are different. As a result, it is possible to display a display mode that is easy for the player to understand without preparing a plurality of image data for the effect result display mode Da2.

Next, with reference to FIG. 15(b), the content of the score giving effect different from the score giving effect explained with reference to FIG. 15(a) will be described. The score giving effect shown in FIG. 15(b) is a effect that is executed using the entire main display area Dm of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and is composed of three rotating displays formed in a cube. By rotating the bodies (Ds5 to Ds7) and combining the display surfaces (surfaces on which the player can see the entire surface) of the rotating display bodies that are stopped and displayed, the effects are displayed.

Specifically, the first rotating display body Ds5 displayed on the leftmost side of the display screen can at least display a display mode for indicating that a score (P) is given as a result of the present score giving effect. , and displayed on the rightmost side of the display screen is a display mode for indicating the number of points to be given in the present score giving effect ("3" in FIG. 15(b) ) is formed so as to be able to display at least, and the second rotary display body Ds6 displayed in the center of the display screen is a display mode (Fig. 15(b), at least "X") is formed so that it can be displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 15B, one effect result display mode Da2 is displayed by combining the display modes of the display surfaces of the first rotary display body Ds5 to the third rotary display body Ds7.

In addition, in the score giving effect shown in FIG. 15(b), similarly to FIG. It may be configured such that a plurality of stop orders of the body can be set. As a result, during the period from when each rotating display body is displayed (rotated display) on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 until it is stopped and displayed, the display mode displayed on each rotating display body being rotated is displayed. While visually recognizing, the game can be played while predicting which combination will be stopped and displayed. Furthermore, when the effect result display mode Da2 is displayed by combining the display modes displayed on the display surfaces of the rotary display bodies, for example, one character can be displayed on the display surface of each rotary display body, A combination of characters displayed on the display surface of each rotary display body may suggest (notify) the lottery result of the special symbol.

Further, any one of the rotating display bodies may be stopped once and then rotated again, or the rotating display that is normally rotated from top to bottom may be rotated in the opposite direction. In addition, when a specific condition is established, for example, when the special symbol lottery during variable display or the special symbol lottery result corresponding to the winning information to be scored is a big hit, the vertical rotation display is performed. , and display is rotated in the left-right direction so that display surfaces (two surfaces in the case of a cube) that are normally not displayed in a stopped state can be displayed in a stopped state.

13 and 15, a plurality of patterns of the effect mode of the score giving effect have been described, but the effect mode of the score giving effect is not limited to this, and the effect result display mode Da2 can be finally displayed. Anything is fine. For example, the display mode of the effect result display mode Da2 is displayed in a transparent state, and the transparency of the rendered effect result display mode Da2 is gradually reduced until the final effect result display mode (not transparent) is displayed. display mode), the corresponding score (P) may be given. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to grasp in advance the score to be given when the final effect result display mode is statically displayed, so that the score progresses when the final effect result display mode is statically displayed. A game can be played while specifically predicting the performance.

Next, with reference to FIG. 16, the contents of an example of the specific effect executed when the charge amount is accumulated will be described. FIG. 16(a) is a schematic diagram showing the display screen during the period when the specific effect is being executed, and FIG. It is a schematic diagram shown.

As shown in FIG. 16(a), in this example, as the specific effect, a countdown display Dg10 for counting down the time until some effect is executed is executed. It should be noted that this countdown display Dg10, for example, as described with reference to FIG. , is displayed by operating the frame button 23 during the performance period.

Then, through a plurality of performances for giving points, a countdown is displayed corresponding to the timing when the charge amount is "1" and the gauge amount is "6" (i.e., the charge amount is "2" and the gauge amount is "0" immediately after). The remaining period indicated by Dg10 becomes "0", and a display mode for operating the frame button 23 is displayed as the second specific effect.

In this way, by executing an effect suggesting the execution timing of the second specific effect as an effect corresponding to the first specific effect, it is possible to prevent the execution of the second specific effect during the current variable display. Players can make predictions.

Next, among the ready-to-win effects executed in the present embodiment, the contents of the second ready-to-win mode (mission ready-to-win) will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 18. FIG. FIG. 17(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example displayed on the display screen when the second reach mode (mission reach) is started, and FIG. 17(b) is a second reach mode. FIG. 18(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display screen during a preemptive attack that is executed first in (mission reach), and FIG. FIG. 18B is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example, and FIG. 18B is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display screen showing the effect result of the second reach mode (mission reach).

When the second reach mode (mission reach) is executed, first, as shown in FIG. As the contents of the reach mission, the characters "defeat 100 enemies" are displayed, and the value "100" is displayed as the remaining number of enemies in the effect display area Da1. A display mode indicating the gauge amount used during the mission reach is displayed in the storage gauge Dg and the storage status display area DK.

Note that the second reach mode (mission reach) of the present embodiment includes a preemptive attack effect in which the content of the mission is changed in advance using the accumulated gauge amount, and a player operation means (frame button 22). and a main effect for accomplishing the mission by pressing the second ready-to-reach mode. .

According to the example shown in FIG. 17(a), when the second reach mode (mission reach) is started, the gauge amount is "5", so as shown in FIG. 17(b), the preemptive During the attack production, a production is executed in which the number of players "50" corresponding to the gauge amount "5" is subtracted from the mission content "100". In this embodiment, it is configured to subtract the number of people obtained by multiplying the gauge amount at the start by 10 from the number of people in the mission contents in the preemptive attack production of the second reach mode (mission reach). , The number of people subtracted in the preemptive attack production increases (the number of people to defeat in this production can be reduced). In this manner, by varying the presentation mode of the preemptive attack presentation in accordance with the gauge amount, the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot can be varied in accordance with the size of the gauge amount when the second ready-to-win mode is started. are doing.

When the preemptive strike effect of the second reach mode (mission reach) configured in this way is started, the value displayed in the effect display area Da1 is reduced to "50" as shown in FIG. 17(b). , the mission content displayed in the main display area Dm is also variably displayed from "defeat 100 enemies" to "defeat 50 enemies". In addition, in the second display area Ds2, characters of "super chance" indicating the degree of expectation for winning the current mission reach are displayed.

Then, when the main effect of the second reach mode (mission reach) is started, as shown in FIG. Then, an image simulating a button for causing the player to hit the frame button 22 repeatedly is displayed, and the characters "button repeated hitting" are displayed in the second display area Ds2. Also, in the effect display area Da1, "1" is displayed as a value required to reach the mission in mission reach.

After that, the button is repeatedly hit, and when the value displayed in the effect display area Da1 becomes "0", the mission is accomplished, so the message "Congratulations" is displayed in the small area Ds2, and the display is changed. In the region Dm1, the third symbol combination (7.7.7) indicating that the jackpot has been won is stopped and displayed.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

In the main control device 110, the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the display setting in the first symbol display device 37, the display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and the display setting in the third symbol display device 81 Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 20, counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters, etc. are the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the setting of the display in the first design display device 37, the setting of the display in the second design display device 83, and the setting of the display in the third design display device 81. etc., it is used in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 .

In order to select the special symbol lottery and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first winning random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol jackpot type. A first hit type counter C2 used for , a stop type selection counter C3 used to select the stop type of the special symbol, and a small hit type counter C5 used to select the small hit type of the special symbol. , a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first hit random number counter C1, and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection. Also, the second winning random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of normal symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 52). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 . The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a corresponding to the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 consisting of four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). , according to the timing of entering the first ball entrance 64, each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the small winning type counter C5, and the variation type counter CS1 are stored respectively.

Then, when the starting condition (fluctuation condition) of the first special symbol is established, various values stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are shifted to the special symbol reserved ball execution area, A special symbol variation is started based on various stored values. Note that this embodiment does not have a configuration for suspending and storing the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 and a configuration for suspending and storing that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, but these configurations are provided. Also, as a predetermined number (for example, four) of reservation areas (reservation first to fourth areas), a special symbol 2 reservation ball storage area or a normal symbol reservation ball storage area may be provided.

Subsequently, each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 999). It is configured to return to In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 999, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that ranges from 0 to 999. This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 52).

The value of the first winning random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and is the timing at which the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 and the special symbol reserved ball execution area. The value of the random number for the special symbol jackpot is set by the first winning random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is the first winning random number table. If it matches the value of the random number set by 202a as a big hit, it is determined as a special symbol big hit.

In addition, the first random number table 202a is provided with two types of a special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 for the first special symbol and a special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 for the second special symbol. Although the number of different random numbers is the same, the number of small winning random numbers is set differently (see FIG. 22). In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that become small wins, the degree of expectation for giving benefits (big wins or small wins) to players can be increased between the lottery for the first special symbols and the lottery for the second special symbols. can be different. The special symbol 1 random number table 202 a 1 and the special symbol 2 random number table 202 a 2 are provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 .

Here, the first winning random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first winning random number table 202a, and FIG. 22(b) shows the contents defined in the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1. FIG. 22(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2. In this first winning random number table 202a, a random number value (determination value) determined as a big win and a random value (determination value) determined as a small win in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol are set. is a table.

Specifically, when executing the lottery for the first special symbol, the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 is referred to. As shown in FIG. 22(b), in the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1, "0 to 4" among the values of the random number counter C1 are defined as jackpot determination values, and other values are other than jackpots (that is, outside) is defined as a judgment value. Then, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is discriminated in the lottery for the first special symbol, and when the value is any one of "0 to 4", it is discriminated as a big win.

When executing the lottery for the second special symbol, the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 is referred to. As shown in FIG. 22(c), in the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2, "0 to 4" among the values of the random number counter C1 are defined as big hit determination values, and "5 to 997" are small hit determination values. , and "998, 999" is defined as a judgment value other than that (that is, out of range). Then, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is discriminated in the lottery of the second special symbol, and when the value is any one of "0 to 4", it is discriminated as a big win, and when the value is any one of "5 to 997". In some cases, it is determined to be a small hit.

The first win type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol jackpot is won, and adds 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the special symbol 1 of the RAM 203 is displayed. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203a. Also, in a state in which the lottery (fluctuation) of special symbols can be executed (that is, in a state other than during fluctuation of special symbols and during a big win game or a small win game), the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 It is stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area of the RAM 203 at the timing of hitting the ball.

Here, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol reserved ball execution area is not a random number determined to be a special symbol jackpot or small hit, That is, if it is a random number that is determined to be out of the special symbol, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is out of.

On the other hand, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol reserved ball execution area is a random number for a special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 The display mode corresponding to the displayed stop symbol is the one at the time of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol reserved ball execution area.

The first winning random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter ranging from 0 to 999. FIG. In this first winning random number counter C1, there are five random numbers that become a big hit in the special symbols when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are drawn. are stored in the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 and the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 of the first per random number table 202a. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the total number of random numbers for a big hit is 5 among the total number of random numbers for 1000, so the probability of a big win for special symbols is "1/200".

The value of the first win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. In this embodiment, using the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2, the first hit type selection table 202b is referred to to determine the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. Here, the contents of the first winning type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 23(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first winning type selection table 202b. As shown in FIG. 23 (a), in the present embodiment, when the first special symbol (special figure 1) is selected, the special figure 1 jackpot type used when determining the value of the acquired first per type counter C2 It has a selection table 202b1 and a special figure 2 big hit type selection table 202b2 used when determining the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 at the time of the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2). . As a result, the jackpot type when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the special figure 1 and the jackpot type when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the special figure 2 are made different, or each of a plurality of jackpot types is selected. Since the ratio can be changed, the game using the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the game using the second special symbol (special figure 2) provide different game characteristics to the player It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Next, the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202b1 used at the time of lottery for the first special symbol (special figure 1) will be described with reference to FIG. 23(b). FIG. 23(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202b1. As shown in FIG. 23(b), in the first hit type counter C2, the jackpot type when the random number is one of "0 to 9" is "jackpot A", and any of "10 to 49" The jackpot type is "jackpot B" when the number is 1, and the jackpot type is "jackpot C" when the number is one of "50 to 99".

"Jackpot A" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 15 rounds as a jackpot game, and the game state after the jackpot is set to a time-saving state (time-saving number of times is once). Since the number of rounds is large and the game state after the big win is set to a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player, the "big win A" is the most advantageous big win type for the player. Of the 100 counter values (random numbers) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 10 random numbers select "jackpot A", so the first special pattern (special pattern 1) lottery is a jackpot. When it becomes, the ratio of selecting "jackpot A" is 10%.

"Jack B" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is five as a jackpot game, and the game state after the jackpot is set to a time-saving state (time-saving once). Although the number of rounds is smaller than that of the above-mentioned "jackpot A", the game state after the jackpot is set to a time-saving state advantageous to the player, so the "jackpot B" is a jackpot type advantageous to the player. Of the 100 counter values (random numbers) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, the number of random numbers for which "jackpot B" is selected is 40, so the lottery for the first special symbol (special figure 1) When it becomes, the ratio of selecting "jackpot B" is 40%.

"Jackpot C" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 5 as a jackpot game, and the game state after the jackpot is set to a normal state (non-time-saving state). Since the number of rounds is small and the normal state is set after the big win, the "jackpot C" is a big win type disadvantageous to the player. Of the 100 counter values (random numbers) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 50 random numbers are selected as "jackpot C", so the first special symbol (special figure 1) lottery is a big hit. When it becomes, the ratio of selecting "jackpot C" is 50%.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the jackpot game of 15 rounds is selected at a rate of 10% when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol (special figure 1) lottery, and 90 A percentage of 5 rounds of jackpot games are selected. In addition, a jackpot is selected in which the game state after the jackpot game ends shifts to the time-saving state at a rate of 50%.

Next, with reference to FIG. 23(c), the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202b2 used during the lottery for the second special symbol (special figure 2) will be described. FIG.23(c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content prescribed|regulated to the special figure 2 jackpot classification selection table 202b2. As shown in FIG. 23(c), in the first hit type counter C2, the jackpot type is "jackpot A" when the random number is any one of "0 to 99". That is, when a big win is won in the lottery for the second special symbol (special figure 2), the most advantageous "big win A" for the player is always selected as the big win type.

In this embodiment, there are three types of jackpots, but the number of types is not limited to three, and one type or four or more types may be provided. Moreover, even if the value of the first winning type counter C2 is the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, different jackpot types may be selected. By configuring in this way, for example, when a big win is made with the second special symbol, by setting a big win type in which a larger number of rounds are executed, the winning with the second special symbol can be made more appealing to the player. can be expected. Therefore, the win in the high probability game state can be made more advantageous to the player, and the amusement of the game in the high probability state can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to make the player strongly desire to shift to the high probability state, and to play the game for a longer period of time.

In addition, the types of jackpot types selected in the first special pattern and the second special pattern and the selection rate (distribution rate) of each jackpot type are made the same, and the first hit type counter C2 corresponding to each jackpot type is set. It may be configured so that only the range is different. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the fraudulent act of acquiring the value of the first winning type counter C2 aiming at a specific counter value in both the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

The small hit type counter C5 determines the small hit type and determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol hits, and has a predetermined range (eg, 0 to 99), it is incremented by 1 in order, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the small hit type counter C5 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the special symbol 1 of the RAM 203 The ball is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203a, and the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 in a state where the special symbol lottery (variation) can be executed (that is, the state other than during the special symbol variation, the big winning game, and the small winning game). Alternatively, it is stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 .

The value of the small hit type counter C5 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. Then, when the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol is a small win, a small win type selection table 202e (see FIG. 24) for determining the type of the small win to be executed is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. is set.

Here, the contents of the small winning type selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the small hit type selection table 202e. As shown in FIG. 24, the small hit type selection table 202e is defined so that three types of small hit A to small hit C are selected by the value of the small hit type counter C5 as the small hit type of the second special symbol. ing. Specifically, when the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is either "0 to 19", the small hit type is "small hit A (15R short time 1 time jackpot when passing V)". , The small hit type if it was any of “20 to 89” is “small hit B (5R time saving 1 time jackpot when passing V)”, and if it was any of “90 to 99” The hit type is “small hit C (5R time-saving no big hit when passing V)”.

Here, each small winning type (small winning A to small winning C) is executed after the small winning game ends when the ball passes through the V switch 650e3 in the V winning device 650 in the respective small winning game. The type of jackpot game is set. In the case of the small win A, a 15R time-saving one-time big win is set, and after the execution of the small win A, the variable winning device 65 is set to the 15R open state, and a big win is executed, and then once as a time-saving state. time-saving game (a period until the variation of the special symbol is executed 100 times or the variation of the second special symbol is executed once and is stopped) is set. In addition, in the case of the small win B, a 5R time-saving one-time big win is set, and after the execution of the small win B, the variable winning device 65 is set to the 5R open state, and a big win is executed, and then as a time-saving state. It is configured to set one time-saving game (a period from when the special symbols are changed 100 times or when the second special symbols are changed once and is stopped and displayed). In the case of the small win C, no 5R time-saving big win is set, and after the execution of the small win C, the variable winning device 65 is set to the 5R open state, and the big win is executed, but after the big win game, the time-saving It is configured so that no state is set and normal state is set.

Thus, depending on the selected small winning type, the content of the big winning game executed after the small winning game is completed and the game state set after the big winning game can be varied. Specifically, the small win A has a large number of rounds (15R) executed in the big win game, and since a time saving state that is advantageous to the player after the big win game is completed is set, it is the most advantageous for the player. It is set as a small win, and the small win B has a small number of rounds (5R) executed in the big win game, and is set more disadvantageously than the above-described small win A, but a time saving state is set after the big win game. be. The small win C is set as the most disadvantageous small win for the player because the number of rounds executed in the big win game is small (5R) and the time saving state is not set after the big win game.

In addition, in this embodiment, as the end condition of the time saving state, the number of times of variation of the second special symbol is 1 time (first termination condition), or the number of times of variation of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) A total of 100 times (second end condition) is set. By configuring in this way, when the jackpot is won in a state where the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern is 1 or more, and the time saving state is set after the jackpot is finished, the first special pattern (special figure 1) is set after the jackpot is finished. ) is executed, the time saving state will not end. Also, when the variation of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed, the second end condition described above is satisfied and the time saving state can be terminated, so any special symbol (second special pattern) can be reliably changed a predetermined number of times.

The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). Rough display modes such as so-called short-time out, long-time out, normal reach, and super reach are determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1. Determination of the display mode is, specifically, determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode are determined by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. be. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 52), which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process. A variation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 25(a)) storing a random number for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random number) of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. is provided in

Here, the contents of the variation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. 25(a). FIG. 25(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variation pattern table 202d. As shown in FIG. 25(a), the variation pattern selection table 202d includes a normal variation pattern table 202d1 used when the normal state is set as the game state, and a normal variation pattern table 202d1 used when the time saving state is set. A time saving variation pattern table 202d2 is defined. Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, since the data table used for selecting the variation pattern is different according to the game state, the variation pattern (variation time) selected according to the game state is made different. be able to.

FIG. 25(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the normal variation pattern table 202d1 provided in the variation pattern table 202d. As shown in FIG. 25(b), in the normal variation pattern table 202d1, the symbol type, the lottery result, the value range of the variation type counter CS1, and the variation pattern are defined in association with each other.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 25(b), the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1), the lottery result is "out", and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 139". A short deviation with a fluctuation time of 7 seconds is defined in the range of , and a fluctuation time of 20 seconds is defined in the range of "140 to 149", and fluctuations in the range of "150 to 179" Various types of normal reach with a time of 40 seconds are defined in correspondence, super reach a with a fluctuation time of 80 seconds is defined in the range of "180 to 187", and a fluctuation time of 100 is defined in the range of "188 to 194". A super reach b of seconds is associated and defined, and a super reach c of 120 seconds in the range of "195 to 198" is associated and defined.

In addition, the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1), the lottery result is "jackpot", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 29", and the variation time is 40 seconds. The range of "30 to 79" is defined in association with super reach a with a fluctuation time of 80 seconds, and the range of "80 to 129" is associated with super reach b with a fluctuation time of 100 seconds. Defined, super reach c with a fluctuation time of 120 seconds is defined in the range of "130 to 189", and various special reach with a fluctuation time of 140 seconds are defined in the range of "190 to 198". ing.

Next, when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special figure 2) and the lottery result is "out", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, the variation time in the entire range 180 seconds long out is stipulated, and if the lottery result is "big hit or small hit", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, the entire range has a variation time of 180 seconds. Long out is defined.

In this way, according to the lottery result of the special symbol, one of the variation patterns with variation time of 7 seconds to 180 seconds is set, and a command indicating this variation pattern is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. By doing so, the third symbol display device 81 executes a variable effect corresponding to the variable time.

Here, in this embodiment, as described above, when a right-handed game is executed in a state in which the normal state is set as the game state, the ball is configured so as not to enter the second ball entrance 640. Therefore, during the normal state, a game for entering a ball into the first ball entrance 64, that is, a game for executing a lottery for the first special symbol is performed. The case where the lottery for the second special symbol is executed in the normal state configured in this way is the case where the player illegally enters the ball into the second ball entrance 640, so the normal state A variation pattern having a long variation time is selected for the variation of the second special symbol in . As a result, it is possible to suppress the situation where the second special symbol lottery is illegally performed in a short period of time. In addition, when it is determined that the second special symbol lottery (variation) is executed during the normal state, the period (180 seconds) until the lottery result is displayed is used to illegally draw the second special symbol. It may be configured to notify the outside that (variation) has been executed. In addition, when the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol is executed illegally, the result of the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol that is illegally executed is forced to be the result of the lottery (variation). It may be configured to create and display.

As shown in FIG. 25(b), the variation pattern (variation time) selected in the normal variation pattern table 202d1 is 7 seconds (the selection ratio is 70%), 40 seconds (selection rate is about 15%), 20 seconds (selection rate is about 5%), 80 seconds (selection rate is about 4%), 100 seconds (selection rate is about 3.5%) , 120 seconds (selection rate is about 2%). Also, if the lottery result is a jackpot, 120 seconds (selection rate is about 30%), 80 seconds (selection rate is about 25%), 100 seconds (selection rate is about 25%), 40 seconds (selection rate is about 25%) 15%) and 140 seconds (selection rate is about 5%).

In this way, there is a relationship between the special symbol lottery result and the selected variation pattern (variation time), and the ratio of the variation time (variation pattern) selected when the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, and the special It is configured to be able to suggest the degree of expectation for a big win when a specific variation time (variation pattern) is selected by the ratio of the variation time (variation pattern) selected when the lottery result of the pattern is a loss. ing. By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player to predict whether or not a big win is won based on the selected variation time (variation pattern).

In the present embodiment, the same variation pattern table is used regardless of the jackpot type won, but the jackpot type indicates a jackpot (for example, jackpot A) that is advantageous to the player without being limited to this. Different variation pattern tables may be used for the case of the jackpot type and the case of the jackpot type indicating other jackpots (jackpot B, jackpot C). In this case, for example, the variation pattern table used when winning a jackpot type indicating an advantageous jackpot (jackpot A) is shorter than the variation pattern table used when winning a jackpot type indicating other jackpots. It is preferable to configure so that the time variation pattern can be easily selected. As a result, the longer the variation time set in the variation pattern to be executed, the more advantageous the player can expect the game result, so that the player is interested in the variation time of the special symbol. be able to.

Further, the variation pattern table used when winning the jackpot type indicating the normal jackpot makes it easier to select a variation pattern with a longer variation time than the variation pattern table used when winning the jackpot type indicating the probability variable jackpot. In this way, when a jackpot is won in a short variation time, the player can be provided with an unexpected game result, even when a short variation time is selected. , can keep you hopeful until the end.

Next, the contents of the variation pattern table 202d2 for time reduction provided in the variation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the time saving variation pattern table 202d2. As shown in FIG. 26, in the time saving variation pattern table 202d2, the pattern type, the lottery result, the value range of the variation type counter CS1, and the variation pattern are defined in association with each other.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 26, when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the lottery result is "out", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198" That is, when an ultra-short deviation with a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds is defined in the entire range and the lottery result is "big hit", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, the entire range The range is specified with an ultra-short excursion with a variation time of 0.5 seconds. Also, if the symbol type is the second special symbol (special figure 2) and the lottery result is "out", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, the variation time is 0 in the entire range .5 seconds is specified, and if the lottery result is a "small win", a variation time of 1 second is specified, and if the lottery result is a "big win", the variation type counter CS1 A short jackpot with a fluctuation time of 1 second is defined in the range of "0 to 149", and a medium jackpot with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is defined in the range of "150 to 198".

Returning to FIG. 20, the description continues. The second hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that increments by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one cycle, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39), and it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal start opening (through gate) 67. It is acquired at the same time and stored in the second symbol reserved ball execution area of the RAM 203 .

Then, the value of the random number that is the winning of the normal symbol is set by the second winning random number table 202c stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is the value of the second winning random number table 202c. If it matches the value of the random number that is set as a hit, it is determined as a hit of the normal design (second design). In addition, this second hit random number table 202c is for normal design low probability (normal state period of normal design), and for high probability that normal design hit is higher than the low probability time (normal design It is divided into two types, one for the time saving state, and the other for the time saving state, and the number of random numbers that will be the big hits included in each is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be winning different, the probability of winning is changed between when the probability of normal symbols is low and when the probability of normal symbols is high.

When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of normal symbols, when the ball passes through the normal starting port 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and the normal symbols fluctuate on the second symbol display device 83. The display runs for 30 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined to be a winning, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol ), and the second ball entrance 640 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of normal symbols, the second ball entrance 640 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time" when the normal symbols are won. , the opening time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 sec x 2 times".

On the other hand, there are 200 random numbers for the normal symbol jackpot when the probability of the normal symbol is high, and the range is "5 to 204". These random numbers are stored in the second winning random number table 202c for high probability. In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be a big hit is 200 out of the total number of random numbers of 240, so the probability of a big win of the special symbol is "1/1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of normal symbols, when the ball passes through the normal starting port 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is obtained, and the normal symbols fluctuate on the second symbol display device 83. The display runs for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the obtained second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined to be elected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol ), the symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the second ball entrance 640 is opened “2 seconds×2 times”. In this way, when the normal pattern has a high probability, compared to when the normal pattern has a low probability, the variable display time is very short from 30 seconds to 3 seconds, and the second entrance 640 is opened. Since the period becomes very long as “0.2 seconds×1 time→2 seconds×2 times”, the ball easily enters the second ball entrance 640 . A table (not shown) is provided in the ROM 202, which stores random numbers for judging whether or not it is a normal symbol win from the value (random number) of the second winning random number counter C4. In this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of normal symbols, the second ball entrance 640 is opened only for "2 seconds x 2 times" when normal symbols are won. The time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "1 second x 3 times".

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once per timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39). In addition, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 52).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 controls the big winning lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters and the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result in the second pattern display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 20, the description is continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 20, the RAM 203 includes a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 52) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (see FIG. 51) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 50) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 21(b), the RAM 203 includes a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b, a time saving medium sum counter 203c, a jackpot start flag 203d, a jackpot middle flag 203e, a small It has a hit start flag 203f, a small hit middle flag 203g, a V passage big hit type storage area 203h, a V flag 203i, a short time medium special 2 counter 203j, a V passage flag 203k, and other memory areas 203z.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a has four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area) as shown in FIG. Each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the small hit type counter C5, and the variation type counter CS1 obtained based on the hitting is stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3, C5, CS1 is acquired, and the acquired data is converted into four Among the vacant areas of the reservation areas (first reservation area to fourth reservation area), the area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in ascending order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first reserved area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the lottery for the first special symbol is performed in the main controller 110, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is executed. Based on the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) to the area and stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery for special symbols is performed.

When data is shifted from the first reservation area to the execution area, the first reservation area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process that packs the winning data stored in other reservation areas (second reservation area to fourth reservation area) to reservation areas (first reservation area to third reservation area) with an area number smaller by 1. done. In this embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data shift is performed only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

In addition, since the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment does not have the function of holding the second special symbol, each counter C1 to C3 , C5 and CS1 are acquired, and the acquired data are stored as they are in the special symbol reserved ball execution area.

In addition, since the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment does not have a function of holding the normal symbol (second symbol), the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is changed at the timing when the ball passes through the normal starting port 67. is acquired, and the acquired data is stored as it is in the special symbol reserved ball execution area.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is the first special symbol (first symbol) variable display (first It is a counter that counts up to four times the number of held balls (number of waiting times) of variable display performed by the three-symbol display device 81 . The initial value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of reserved balls displayed in a variable display increases, the maximum value is 4. 1 is added (see S604 in FIG. 44). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is decremented by 1 each time a special symbol variable display is newly executed (see S207 in FIG. 40).

The value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b (the number of times N of holding the variable display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the special figure 1 reserved ball number command (S208 in FIG. 40, FIG. 44 S605). The special figure 1 reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 changes the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b, by the special figure 1 reserved ball number command sent from the main controller 110, the variation reserved by the main controller 110 It is possible to acquire the value of the number of held balls displayed. As a result, the number of variable display pending balls managed by the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed to the actual variable display pending ball number that was held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from the number, the deviation can be corrected by the next pending ball number command received.

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of pending balls based on the number of pending balls command, and every time the number of pending balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of pending balls. Send a pitch command. The display control device 114 displays the number of reserved balls pattern (reserved pattern) of the third pattern display device 81 based on the number of reserved balls notified by the number of reserved balls command for display.

The summing counter 203c during time saving is a counter for adding up the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol executed during the time saving state and counting up to 100 times. This time-saving middle total counter 203c is set to 0, which is the initial value, when the jackpot is won (see S217 in FIG. 40), and is set to 100 when the jackpot ends (see S1514 in FIG. 53). Then, 1 is subtracted each time the variation of the special symbol ends during the time saving state (see S502 in FIG. 43). The value of the time saving sum counter 203c is referred to when it is determined whether or not the conditions for ending the time saving state have been met. : Yes), the normal state is set as the game state (S508 in FIG. 43).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of times the total variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol during the time saving state reaches 100 times (first end condition), or the second special during the time saving state The time saving state is terminated when any of the conditions that the number of pattern variations reaches one (second termination condition) is satisfied, and whether the first termination condition is satisfied or not. In order to discriminate|determine, the addition counter 203c is used in time saving. In addition, the value of the total counter 203c during shortening of working hours is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the command of the number of remaining shortening hours (see S505 in FIG. 43). The remaining time reduction command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 each time the value of the total counter 203c is changed during the time reduction.

Voice lamp control device 113, every time the value of the total counter 203c during time saving is changed, by the remaining time reduction number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the number of remaining fluctuations until the first end condition of the time saving state is satisfied can be obtained. As a result, the number of remaining time reductions managed by the game state storage area 223i of the voice ramp control device 113 deviates from the actual remaining variation count counted by the time reduction medium summing counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise and the like. Even if the remaining time shortening number command is received next, the deviation can be corrected.

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of remaining time reductions based on the remaining time reduction number command, but the remaining time reduction number command corresponding to the value of the above-described time reduction medium total counter 203c, that is, the first time reduction state Information indicating the number of remaining fluctuations until the end condition is satisfied is not transmitted to the display control device 114 . This is because when a normal game is played, the time saving state is configured to shift to the normal state by satisfying the second end condition of the time saving state, and the first end condition is A situation in which the second end condition is met while the third symbol display device 81 displays the number of remaining fluctuations until it is met, and the time saving state ends is suppressed.

The jackpot start flag 203d is a flag indicating that it is time to start the jackpot game. When the lottery result is determined to be a big win and the special symbols stop changing, the big win start flag 203d is set to ON (S216 in FIG. 40). When it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203d is ON and it is identified that it is time to start the jackpot, it is set to OFF (S1503 in FIG. 53). Note that the jackpot start flag 203d is set to OFF in the initial state, and is configured to be backed up and held in the state immediately before the power interruption in the event of a power interruption or the like.

The jackpot middle flag 203e is a flag indicating that the jackpot game is in progress. It is set to ON at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose determination result is a big hit is stopped (S216 in FIG. 40). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is time to end the jackpot (when it is determined that the number of rounds of games corresponding to the set jackpot type has ended), it is set to OFF (S1517 in FIG. 53). This jackpot flag 203e is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as RAM clear, and is retained by backing up the state immediately before the occurrence of a power failure or the like when a power failure or the like occurs. is configured as follows.

The small winning start flag 203f is a flag indicating that it is the start timing of the small winning game. It is set to ON at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose determination result is a small hit is stopped (S404 in FIG. 42). It is determined that the small winning start flag 203f is ON, and when it is identified as the start timing of the small winning game, it is set to OFF (S1603 in FIG. 54). This small winning start flag 203f is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as RAM clear, and when a power failure or the like occurs, the state immediately before the power failure or the like is backed up and retained. configured to be

The small hit medium flag 203g is a flag indicating that the small hit game is in progress. It is set to ON at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose determination result is a small hit is stopped (S404 in FIG. 42). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the small win (when it is determined that the game of the set number of rounds of the small win is completed), it is set to OFF (S1620 in FIG. 54). This small hit medium flag 203g is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as RAM clear, and when power failure or the like occurs, it is held by backing up the state immediately before the power failure or the like occurs. configured to be

The V passing jackpot type storage area 203h stores data for determining the jackpot type that is set when a winning ball in the V winning device 650 is detected by the V switch 650e3 when a small winning game is being executed. This is the storage area where the data is stored. The V passage big win type storage area 203h stores a data value corresponding to the big win type corresponding to the determined small win type when the fluctuation of the special symbol that results in a small win stops (FIG. 42). of S402). When the ball flows down the special discharge channel 650e2 in the V winning device 650 and the ball is detected by the V switch 650e3, a V flag corresponding to the jackpot type corresponding to the data value stored in the V passing jackpot type storage area 203h. 203i is set to ON. At the end of the small winning game, the data value stored in the V passing big winning type storage area 203h is cleared. This V pass jackpot type storage area 203h is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as RAM clear, and when a power failure occurs, the state immediately before the power failure occurs is backed up. is configured to be held by

The V flag 203i corresponds to the type of the small winning game being executed when the ball flows down the special discharge channel 650e2 in the V winning device 650 during the small winning game and the ball is detected by the V switch 650e3. A flag corresponding to the jackpot type is set to ON. At the end of the small winning game, it is determined whether this V flag 203i is on (S1615 in FIG. 54), and when it is determined that the V flag 203i is on (S1615 in FIG. 54: Yes), it is set to on The jackpot type to be executed is discriminated from the executed flag, and the start of the corresponding jackpot game is set (S1616 in FIG. 54). This V flag 203i is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as when the RAM is cleared. is configured as

The time saving medium special 2 counter 203j is a counter for counting up to one time the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol executed during the time saving state. This time-saving medium special 2 counter 203j is set to 0, which is the initial value, when the jackpot is won (see S217 in FIG. 40), and is set to 1 when the jackpot ends (see S1514 in FIG. 53). Then, when the variation of the second special symbol ends during the time saving state, 1 is subtracted (see S504 in FIG. 43). The value of this time saving middle special 2 counter 203j is referred to when determining whether the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied, and when it is determined that the counter value has been decremented to 0 (of FIG. 43 S506: Yes), the normal state is set as the game state (S508 in FIG. 43).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of times the total variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol during the time saving state reaches 100 times (first end condition), or the second special during the time saving state The time saving state is terminated when any of the conditions that the number of pattern variations reaches one (second termination condition) is satisfied, and whether the second termination condition is satisfied or not. In order to discriminate, the time saving medium special 2 counter 203j is used. In addition, the value of the short time medium special 2 counter 203j is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the short time remaining command (see S505 in FIG. 43). The remaining time reduction command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 each time the value of the total counter 203c is changed during the time reduction.

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 manages the remaining time reduction number based on the remaining time reduction number command, but the remaining time reduction number command corresponding to the value of the above-described time reduction medium special 2 counter 203j, that is, the time reduction state number 2, information indicating the number of remaining fluctuations until the end condition is satisfied is transmitted to the display control device 114 . This is because when a normal game is played, the time saving state is shifted to the normal state by satisfying the second end condition of the time saving state. , to provide an easy-to-understand game by displaying the number of remaining fluctuations until the time saving state ends on the third symbol display device 81. - 特許庁

The V passage flag 203k is a flag used for determining the state in which the V flag 203i is set to ON during the small winning game, and is set to ON when the V flag 203i is set to ON. be done. In this embodiment, most of the balls that have won the V winning device 650 during the small winning game are configured to flow down the special discharge flow path 650e2, and correspond to the balls that have won the special discharge flow path 650e2 first. It is set to ON in the V passage processing (see FIG. 49) (S1107 in FIG. 49).

Then, in the V passage processing (see FIG. 49), it is determined whether or not the V passage flag 203k is set to ON (S1101 in FIG. 49). ), and the processing of S1102 to S1108 in the V passing processing (see FIG. 49) is skipped. As a result, even when the V switch 650e3 detects a plurality of balls during one small winning game, only the V passing process corresponding to the first detected ball is executed. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the processing executed during the small winning game, and the V passing command is transmitted to the voice ramp control device 113 a plurality of times, and the V passing management on the side of the voice ramp control device 113 is complicated. can be prevented from becoming

The other memory area 203z is set (stored) with other data necessary for the game, counters, flags, and the like.

Returning to FIG. 9, the description continues. The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is equipped with a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201. The ROM 202 contains at least the above-described first winning random number table 202a In addition to the type selection table 202b, the second winning random number table 202c, the variation pattern table 202d, and the small winning type selection table 202e, an opening scenario table 202f is stored.

Here, the contents of the release scenario table 202f will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the release scenario table 202f. This open scenario table 202f is a winning device (variable winning device 65) in which a ball can enter in a privilege game (big win game, small win game) executed when the lottery result of the special symbols is a big win or a small win. , V winning device 650) is defined as operation data (opening scenario) for differentiating the opening operation according to the winning type (big winning type, small winning type).

In this way, the winning device (variable winning device 65, V winning device 650) and the contents of the opening operation (opening scenario ), it is possible to set the degree of advantage of the privilege game in multiple stages. can.

In the opening scenario table 202f, the start interval period during the winning game (the period from the start of the winning game to the first opening operation of the winning device) corresponding to the winning type (big winning type, small winning type). , the opening operation mode of the winning device (type of winning device to be opened, the number of seconds for one opening operation (round game), the total number of opening operations (number of rounds)), and the inter-round interval period (between round games ) and the end interval period (the period from the end of all round games to the end of the winning game (the period to allow the start of new special symbol fluctuations) )) are defined respectively.

Specifically, corresponding to jackpot A, the winning type is "2 seconds" as the start interval period, "15 rounds" for the "variable winning device 65" as the opening operation mode of the winning device, and 1 round. As a game, an opening operation mode in which the game is opened continuously for 29 seconds is stipulated with an inter-round interval period of '1 second' and an end interval period of '4 seconds'. Therefore, when the jackpot type wins the jackpot A, a jackpot game in which the variable prize winning device 65 is opened for 15 rounds is executed, and a jackpot game in which a large number of prize balls are paid out to the player. . Furthermore, when the jackpot type is the jackpot A, since the jackpot is a jackpot in which a time-saving state, which is a game state that is advantageous to the player after the jackpot game is finished, is set, the jackpot A is given a privilege that is most advantageous to the player. It is a big hit.

Next, corresponding to jackpot types B and C, the start interval period is set to "2 seconds", the opening operation mode of the prize winning device is set to "5 rounds" for the "variable prize winning device 65", and one round game is set. The opening operation mode of "continuously 29 seconds" is defined with an inter-round interval period of "1 second" and an end interval period of "4 seconds". Therefore, when the jackpot types are jackpots B and C, a jackpot game is executed in which the variable winning device 65 is opened for five rounds, and a jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot A is played for the player. It becomes a jackpot game in which about 1/3 of prize balls are paid out. Further, when the jackpot type is jackpot B, a time-saving state, which is a game state advantageous to the player after the jackpot game is finished, is set, and when the jackpot type is jackpot C, the time-saving state is not set after the jackpot game is finished. Since it is configured, the jackpot B becomes a jackpot in which a privilege that is more disadvantageous than the jackpot A and more advantageous than the jackpot C is given.

The start interval period corresponds to the jackpot D, the start interval period is "1 second", the "V winning device 650" is opened in the "first round" as the opening operation mode of the winning device, and the "variable winning device 65" is operated. is opened in the "2nd to 15th rounds", and as one round game, the first round opens "0.1 seconds open 12 times with an interval of 0.5 seconds open", 2- In the 15th round, the opening operation mode is "continuously open for 29 seconds", the inter-round interval period is "10 seconds" after the first round, otherwise "1 second", and the end interval period is "4 seconds". is stipulated.

In other words, although the details will be described later, the period between the start interval period of the jackpot D and the period until the second round is executed (round game content of the first round (opening/closing operation mode), and the interval between rounds after the end of the first line Period) is configured to be the same as the content stipulated in the small winning game described later. By configuring in this way, whether the winning game being executed this time is a big winning game or a small winning game is determined until the timing when the first round ends (if it is a small winning game, the small winning game ends It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand until the timing to do so). As a result, it is possible to provide an unexpected winning game to a player who has won a small winning and recognized that a small winning game is being executed.

In this embodiment, the jackpot D is a jackpot type that is always selected when a jackpot is won by the second special symbol, and most of the second special symbol lotteries are set so that a small win is won. (See FIG. 22(c)). Therefore, the time-saving state is set as the game state, and during the period in which the variation of the second special symbol is mainly performed, some winning game is started after the variation of the special symbol is stopped and displayed. In this case, since the winning game is started from the same opening operation regardless of whether the player wins the big win or the small win, which win (big win or small win) is won by the player. can be difficult to grasp.

In addition, in the lottery of the second special symbols, the probability of winning the big win is set to be lower than that of winning the small win, and after the big win game corresponding to the big win D is finished. It is set to give a time saving state. Therefore, since a player who has won a big win is not provided with a privilege that is more disadvantageous than when he wins a small win, the player can play an unexpected game (a jackpot game corresponding to the big win D). Since the game can be played in an advantageous manner, the player can be more excited.

Incidentally, when the big win D is won and when various small wins are won, the same performance mode is executed as the variable display (variable performance) displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and In order to make it difficult for the player to identify the lottery result by the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b showing the lottery result of the special symbol, the stop display timing of the special symbol and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed. The stop display timing of the third symbol is made different, or the stop display timing of the special symbol and the stop display timing of the third symbol are synchronized, but the third symbol is displayed at the stop display timing or the period before and after that. In order to make it more difficult for the player to identify than during other periods, the display mode and display area are changed, and at the stop display timing of the special symbol, the effect displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 It is preferable to switch from the third pattern to the normal pattern for production corresponding to the variable display of the normal pattern.

In addition, the winning device (V winning device 650) that opens when a winning game is executed and the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are arranged separately, and the stop display timing of the special symbol (when any winning At the timing of informing the player of the winning, the third symbol display device 81 executes an effect display to draw the player's attention to the V winning device 650, or the first symbol display device 37a, It is preferable that the display area of 37b is made smaller than the display area of the third pattern display device 81 so that the first pattern is more difficult to visually recognize than the third pattern. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish whether the lottery result of this special pattern is a big win or a small win by the stop display mode of the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b, and the big win is continued even during the winning game. can be expected to be elected.

Returning to FIG. 27, the description continues. In addition to the small winning game (1 round game), the small winning game is performed by the V switch 650e3 detecting the ball during the small winning game. A release scenario of a jackpot game (2 to 15 round games) that is continuously executed after the end is also defined. As a result, it is possible to reliably associate the small winning game contents of the winning small winning type with the big winning game contents that can be executed after finishing the small winning game, so that a proper game can be provided.

Specifically, for a small win A, the start interval period is "1 second" as a small win game, and the opening operation mode of the winning device "V winning device 650" is "1 round". Round game "0.1 second open 12 times", interval period between open "0.5 seconds (interval between open 1) other than after the end of the 5th and 10th open, end of the 5th and 10th open 5 seconds (interval 2 between opening)” is defined later.

Then, as a jackpot game that can be executed after the end of the small win game, the "variable prize winning device 65" opens in "2nd to 15th rounds", and one round game "continuously open for 29 seconds" is the interval period between rounds. , "10 seconds" after the end of the first round, "1 second" otherwise, a start interval of "2 seconds", and an end interval period of "8 seconds" are defined.

In addition, for small wins B and C, the start interval period is "1 second" as a small win game, and the opening operation mode "V winning device 650" of the winning device is opened once for "1 round". 's round game "0.1 second open 12 times", interval period between open "0.5 seconds (interval between open 1) other than after the end of the 5th and 10th open, after the end of the 5th and 10th open 5 seconds (opening interval 2)” is defined.

Then, as a jackpot game that can be executed after the end of the small win game, the "variable prize winning device 65" opens in the "2nd to 5th rounds", and one round game "continuously open for 29 seconds" is the interval period between rounds. , "10 seconds" after the end of the first round, "1 second" otherwise, a start interval of "2 seconds", and an end interval period of "8 seconds" are defined.

That is, the big winning game that can be executed after finishing the small winning games corresponding to the small winnings B and C is set so that the number of round games is smaller than that of the big winning game corresponding to the small winning A described above. Further, when the small win type is a small win B, a time-saving state, which is a game state that is advantageous to the player after the corresponding big win game is finished, is set, and in the case of the small win C, after the corresponding big win game is finished. Since the time-saving state is not set, the small win B becomes a small win to which a privilege that is more disadvantageous than the small win A and more advantageous than the small win C is given.

Returning to FIG. 9, the description continues. An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol reservation lamp 84, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. , the large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side, the V opening solenoid for opening and closing the opening and closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650, and the switching member 650h provided in the V winning device 650 are driven. A solenoid 209 consisting of a flow path solenoid 209a for driving an electric accessory (another solenoid 209z) is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these through the input/output port 205. do.

The input/output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. , and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253, various processes are executed.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 70) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues a ball shooting instruction. The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and the operating handle is activated under the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effects. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main controller 110, the display controller 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like.

The sound lamp control device 113 monitors inputs from the frame button 22 and the frame button 23, and when the player operates the frame button 22, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81, It controls the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 and instructs the display control device 114 so as to change the content of the performance during super reach. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 .

The audio lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the error type. Send to device 114 . The display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

As shown in FIG. 30(a), the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 contains a variation pattern selection table 222a, a first score effect selection table 222b, a second score effect selection table 222c, a total given score selection table 222d, and a given score selection table 222d. A score selection table 222e and other various data and programs required for game control are stored.

In the variation pattern selection table 222a, a variation pattern of each variation pattern type (out of range, out of reach, various types of reach, etc.) is set to a counter value for selecting a variation pattern (not shown). The sound ramp control device 113 selects a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110, the result of the suitability determination, and the acquired counter value for selection. This allows the audio ramp control device 113 to select a wide variety of variation modes while strictly observing rough information such as the variation time and the type of variation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode from being displayed frequently, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored early.

The first score effect selection table 222b is a selection table for selecting whether or not to execute the above-described score effect, which is a continuous effect, and the effect mode of the score effect to be executed. (See FIG. 57), when it is determined that the winning information command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2209 in FIG. 57: Yes), it is referred to in the winning information related process (see FIG. 58) (FIG. 58). of S2306). When it is determined in the process of S2306 that the score effect is to be executed, the above-described score effect is executed.

Here, the contents of the first score effect selection table 222b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first score effect selection table 222b. This first score effect selection table 222b is a data table used for determining the effect mode of the score effect, and includes the variation type included in the winning information command, the number of reserved balls of the special symbol (first special symbol), The effect mode of the score effect executed corresponding to the value of the effect lottery counter 223f1 is defined.

Specifically, when the variation type is a special reach hit and the number of pending balls is 2 or 3, the value of the acquired effect lottery counter 223f1 is in the range of "0 to 14". is defined, and "no score effect" is defined in the range of "15 to 99". In addition, when the number of pending balls is 4, the value of the acquired effect lottery counter 223f1 is specified in the range of "0 to 39" for "scoring effect A", and in the range of "40 to 49", "scoring effect C” is specified, and “no score effect” is specified in the range of “50 to 99”.

Then, when the variation type is per super reach (super reach a to super reach c) and the number of held balls is 2 or 3, the value of the obtained effect lottery counter 223f1 is in the range of "0 to 9". "Scoring effect A" is defined in the range of "10 to 39", "Scoring effect B" is defined in the range of "40 to 49", "Scoring effect C" is defined in the range of "50 to 99" "No scoring effect" is specified in the range. In addition, when the number of pending balls is 4, the value of the obtained effect lottery counter 223f1 is specified in the range of "0 to 19" for "scoring effect A", and in the range of "20 to 39", "scoring effect B" is specified, "scoring effect C" is specified in the range of "40 to 59", and "no scoring effect" is specified in the range of "60 to 99".

When the variation type is a normal reach hit, when the number of pending balls is 2 to 4, the value of the acquired effect lottery counter 223f1 is defined as "score effect A" in the range of "0 to 9". A "score effect B" is defined in the range of "10 to 24", and a "score effect C" is defined in the range of "25 to 80".

On the other hand, if the variation type is out of super reach (super reach a to super reach c) and the number of held balls is 2 or 3, the above-mentioned variation type is per super reach (super reach a to super reach c). The production mode of the score production is defined at the same ratio as in the case of a certain case. On the other hand, when the number of pending balls is 4, the value of the obtained effect lottery counter 223f1 is specified in the range of "0 to 4" for "scoring effect A", and in the range of "5 to 39", "scoring effect B" is defined. ” is defined, “scoring effect C” is defined in the range of “40 to 59”, and “no scoring effect” is defined in the range of “60 to 99”.

When the variation type is out of normal reach, when the number of pending balls is 2 to 4, the value of the effect lottery counter 223f1 is defined as "score effect A" in the range of "0 to 4", and "5 to 99". , "scoring effect B" is defined in the range of ".

As described above, in the first scoring effect selection table 222b in this embodiment, the scoring effects A to C are defined as the effect modes of the scoring effects. Here, when the score effect A is selected, a score effect is executed in which the number of points given during one score effect (total number of points given) is rather small. Next, a performance mode is executed in which a large number of points is likely to be set as the number of points (total number of points to be given) given during one score presentation in the order of the score presentation B and the score presentation C.例文帳に追加

In this way, in addition to the presence or absence of the execution of the specific performance, in addition to the execution or non-execution of the specific performance, the degree of the score to be given during the specific performance is set in advance in accordance with the lottery result of the target special symbol and the number of reserved balls. The number of points given during the scoring performance is biased against the success/failure determination result of the special symbol corresponding to the winning information to be the performance, and the performance effect of the scoring performance is reduced, that is, during the scoring performance. It is possible to suppress a situation in which the degree of expectation for a big win is almost lost when the total number of points to be given is small.

Furthermore, the number of reserved balls, the variation pattern of the special symbol corresponding to the target winning information, and the result of the judgment result of the special symbol are defined. Therefore, for example, when the variation type is super reach and the number of pending balls is 4, the ratio of selecting the score effect A, which tends to set the total number of points to be given low, is the case where the result of the judgment of the special symbol is out. It is defined to be four times higher than the case of winning (see FIG. 31). In this way, it is stipulated that the larger the number of points given during the scoring effect (total number of points given), the higher the expectation of the jackpot, but in some cases (target winning When the variation type of the special symbol corresponding to the information is "super reach" and the number of pending balls is 4), by stipulating that the smaller the score given during the score presentation, the higher the expected jackpot, the score It is possible to provide an unexpected performance as a performance.

The second score effect selection table 222c is a data table that is referred to for selecting whether or not to execute the score effect and the effect mode of the score effect to be executed, like the above-described first score effect selection table 222b. be. Unlike the above-described first scoring effect selection table 222b, the second scoring effect selection table 222c uses the reserved balls acquired at the time when the scoring effect ends (the reserved balls newly acquired during the scoring effect). It is referred to when determining whether or not to execute the score presentation again.

Here, the contents of the second score effect selection table 222c will be described with reference to FIG. 32(a). FIG. 32(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second score effect selection table 222c. This second score effect selection table 222c is a stop command process (Fig. 61), it is determined that the scoring effect has ended (S2601 of FIG. 61: Yes), and when it is determined that the number of pending balls at that time is 2 or more (S2604 of FIG. 61: Yes), it is referred to (S2607 in FIG. 61).

The details defined in the second score effect selection table 222c will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 32(a). In the case of 2 and 3, the value of the obtained effect lottery counter 223f1 is specified in the range of "0 to 29" for "scoring effect C", and in the range of "30 to 99", "no scoring effect" is specified. be done. In addition, when the number of pending balls is 4, the value of the obtained effect lottery counter 223f1 is specified in the range of "0 to 49" for "scoring effect C", and the value in the range of "50 to 99" is defined as "scoring effect None” is specified.

Then, when the variation type is a normal reach hit, when the number of pending balls is 2 to 4, the value of the acquired effect lottery counter 223f1 is defined as "score effect C" in the range of "0 to 9". , “10 to 99”, “no score effect” is defined.

On the other hand, when the variation type is out of super reach (super reach a to super reach c), when the number of held balls is 2 or 3, the value of the obtained effect lottery counter 223f1 is "0 to 9". "Scoring effect C" is defined in the range of , and "No scoring effect" is defined in the range of "10 to 99". In addition, when the number of pending balls is 4, the value of the obtained effect lottery counter 223f1 is specified in the range of "0 to 4" for "scoring effect C", and in the range of "5 to 99", "scoring effect C" is defined. None” is specified.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when selecting (scoring effect determination) whether or not to execute the scoring effect and the effect mode of the scoring effect to be executed (scoring effect A to score effect C) , uses a data table that defines different selections depending on the situation. Specifically, the score effect determination (second score effect selection table 222 c is harder to execute the score presentation, and the degree of expectation for the big win is higher when the score presentation is carried out.

By configuring in this manner, when the score presentation is continuously executed, the player's expectation for the big win can be heightened, and the presentation effect can be enhanced. In addition, while the player expects the score performance to be continuously executed, the player can continue playing the game for obtaining a new reserved ball even while the score performance is being executed. , can improve the operation of the game.

In this embodiment, when the scoring effect is completed, the second scoring effect selection table 222c is used to determine whether or not to execute the scoring effect. For example, it may be configured to determine whether or not to execute the score effect using the second score effect selection table 222c for the reserved ball acquired after the end of the big hit. . As a result, when the score performance is executed after the end of the big win, the player can be made to have high expectations for the next big win at the timing immediately after the end of the big win.

Also, in the present embodiment, two types of data tables are used for determining whether or not to execute the score presentation, but three or more types may be used. In this case, when the scoring effect is executed three times in a row, the result of the third scoring effect, that is, the lottery result of the special pattern corresponding to the winning information to be the target of the third scoring effect will be a big hit. It is preferable to define the contents of the third score effect selection table in . Also, when setting the score effect in succession, the effect content of the second score effect is based on the effect content (selected effect mode and total number of points given) set in the first score effect. It may be configured to be selected, or at least a part of the points given in the first scoring presentation may be carried over to the second scoring presentation as it is and displayed.

The total awarded score selection table 222d is a data table referred to when setting the total score to be awarded to the player during the current score presentation when executing the score presentation. ) Or, in the stop command process (see FIG. 61), when it is determined to execute the score effect (S2307 in FIG. 58: Yes, or S2608 in FIG. 61: Yes), the total given score setting process (see FIG. 59), it is referred to when setting the total given score (S2402 in FIG. 59). The total given score set here is stored in the total given score storage area 223o, and is used when setting each presentation mode of a plurality of variable displays executed during the score presentation.

Here, the contents of the total assigned score selection table 222d will be described with reference to FIG. 32(b). FIG. 32(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the total given score selection table 222d. As described above, in the present embodiment, the maximum value of the total given points that can be given during one score effect is configured to be "18", and the variation type included in the winning information command and the special symbol (first The total score to be given corresponding to the number of reserved balls of special symbols) and the set effect type (the effect type of the score effect set in the effect type flag 223n) is defined.

Specifically, when the variation type is per special reach and the number of pending balls is 2 or 3, the total given score "18" is defined for the score effect C, and the number of pending balls is In the case of 4, a total given score of "4" is defined for the score effect A, and a total given score of "18" is defined for the score effect C, respectively. By defining the total given score in this way, it is possible to give a score corresponding to the frequency of occurrence of the score giving performance during execution of the scoring performance, and to provide the player with a performance that does not cause discomfort. It should be noted that the "-" portion in the total given score selection table 222d is a portion that is not selected when referring to the first score effect selection table 222b and the second score effect selection table 222c.

Next, when the variation type is per super reach (super reach a to super reach c) and the number of pending balls is 2 or 3, the total given score "5 to 11" for the score effect A The range is defined as a total given score range of "6 to 14" for the score effect B, and a total given score range of "11 to 18" for the score effect C, and the number of pending balls is 4. In some cases, the range of the total given points "5 to 11" for the scoring effect A, the total given score "12" for the scoring effect B, and the total given score "12 to 15" for the scoring effect C ” are defined respectively. Here, with regard to a portion where a predetermined range is defined as the total assigned score, one score is selected from the effect counter 223f according to a value obtained from a score apportioning effect counter (not shown). there is As a result, it is possible to vary the total score given in the set score effects under the same conditions (the same variation type and the number of pending balls), so that the effect of the effects can be enhanced.

Also, when the above-described variation type is super reach, compared with the case where the variation type is special reach hit, it is stipulated that a low score is likely to be given as the total score given during the score presentation. This is for associating the expected jackpot of the variation type and the value of the given total score with the expected jackpot. Thus, the player can enjoy the performance while predicting whether or not the player wins the jackpot based on the variation type to be executed and the total number of points to be given.

If the variation type is per normal reach and the number of pending balls is 2 to 4, the total given score "6" for the score effect A, the total given score "12" for the score effect B, and the score effect A total award score of "18" is defined for C respectively. In this way, in the normal ready-to-win game where the degree of expectation for a big hit is low as a variation type, the total given score "18" is selectable in order to provide the player with an unexpected effect.

On the other hand, when the variation type is out of super reach (super reach a to super reach c) and the number of pending balls is 2 or 3, the total given score "5 to 11" for the score effect A In the case where the range is defined as "6 to 14" for the total given score for the score effect B and "12" for the total given score for the score effect C, and the number of pending balls is 4 , the range of the total given score "5 to 11" for the score effect A, the total given score "12" for the score effect B, and the total given score "12 to 15" for the score effect C defined respectively. Then, when the variation type is out of normal reach and the number of reserved balls is 2 to 4, the total given score "1 to 15" is defined for the score effect A.

As described above, when the variation type is super reach, the total given score is selected in the same range, except for a part, depending on whether the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot or a loss. It is configured as follows. By configuring in this way, the effect executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (variation display corresponding to the variation type and the score given during the score effect) corresponds to the current variation display. It is possible to suppress the fact that it is grasped in advance whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot.

In addition, when the variation type is super reach and the score effect C is set, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the maximum value of the total given score "18" is included in the selection range. (selectable range “11 to 18”), and if the lottery result of the special symbol is out, it is configured so that “18”, which is the maximum value of the total given score, is not included in the selection range (selection Possible range "12 to 15"). By configuring in this way, the score "18" is given only when the lottery result of the special pattern is a big hit, so when the super reach is set as the variation type, the given score during the score production The game can be played while observing that the number reaches "18".

In addition, in the present embodiment, the higher the score given during the score presentation, the higher the expectation of the big win, and the player is configured to provide an easy-to-understand presentation. A configuration may be used, for example, when the score given during the score presentation is a predetermined value (for example, "7") other than the maximum value, the expectation of the big win is configured to be high, or the score presentation is being executed, if the given score is low (for example, in the range of "1" to "3"), it may be configured such that the degree of expectation for the big win is high. Thus, by giving regularity to the relationship between the given score and the degree of expectation for big win, only the players who have played the pachinko machine 10 for a long time can accurately predict the degree of expectation for big win.

The given score selection table 222e is a data table for selecting the score to be given (displayed) as the score giving effect in each variable display during the execution of the score effect, and is used in the effect setting process (see FIG. 63) to be described later. If it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter 223m is greater than 0 (S2801 in FIG. 63: Yes), that is, if it is determined that the score effect is currently being executed, the score giving effect setting process (FIG. 64 reference) (S2905 in FIG. 64).

In this awarded score selection table 222e, the number of points that can be displayed at present, that is, the total awarded scores selected with reference to the total awarded score selection table 222d and stored in the total awarded score storage area 223o are already displayed. The number of points obtained, that is, the value obtained by subtracting the count value of the given score counter 223p, the value of the effect variation number counter 223m, that is, the remaining number of special symbol variations in which the score effect is continuously executed, and the value of the effect counter 223f Among them, the display score is defined in association with the value of the display score effect counter (not shown), and the given score is selected according to the situation when the score giving effect setting process (see FIG. 64) is executed. be.

Next, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 30(b). As shown in FIG. 30(b), the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 includes a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, a fluctuation start flag 223d, a stop type selection flag 223e, a production counter 223f, SW valid time storage area 223g, variable time counter 223h, game state storage area 223i, effect prohibition flag 223j, effect prohibition cancellation flag 223k, effect change counter 223m, effect type flag 223n, total given score storage area 223o, given score counter 223p, an operation score execution flag 223q, an operation completion flag 223r, and other memory area 223z.

The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), each of which stores winning information. Based on the information stored in the prize winning information storage area 223a, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the lottery result of the reserved ball and the like before the change starts.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b of the main control device 110, is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). ), which is a counter that counts up to four times the number of pending balls (number of standby times) of the variable effect that is being held in the main controller 110 . That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from main controller 110 .

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and obtain the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b counts the reserved balls of the first special symbol. It is designed to manage numbers.

Specifically, in main controller 110, when the number of pending balls for variable display is added by entering the first ball entrance 64, or when main controller 110 executes variable display in the special symbol. When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b after addition or after subtraction is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, it acquires the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b of the main controller 110 from the reserved ball number command, It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b (see S2208 in FIG. 57). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, so that the special symbol 1 reserved ball of the main controller 110 Its value can be updated while synchronizing with the number counter 203b.

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is used for the display of the reserved ball number pattern in the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in response to the reception of the number of reserved balls command in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number after storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the counter 223b, a display reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114. FIG.

When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113. Image drawing is controlled so that several patterns are displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third pattern display device 81. FIG. As described above, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. FIG. Therefore, the number of pending ball number symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol pending ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. FIG. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variable display is held.

The information contained in the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller may be the actual number of reserved balls, that is, the information indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a, or the special symbol reserved ball number counter. Information indicating that the value of 203a has been incremented or decremented by one may be used. When transmitting information indicating that the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a has been incremented or decremented by 1 as the reserved ball number command, it is included in the reserved ball number command received by the voice lamp controller 113. It is sufficient to provide a calculation means for calculating and managing the current number of reserved balls based on the information received.

The fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on when a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S2202 in FIG. 57), and is turned off when the fluctuation display in the third pattern display device 81 is set. (See S2702 in FIG. 62). When the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, a fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and the command output processing (S2102 in FIG. 56) of the main processing (see FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 221 Inside, it is sent to the display controller 114 . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third pattern display device 81 performs the variation display of the third pattern in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command, Display control of the variable effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S2205 in FIG. 57), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (see S2708 in FIG. 62). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type (jackpot type in the case of a jackpot) extracted from the received stop type command.

The effect counter 223f is a counter used for score effects and various lotteries. Although not shown, the effect counter 223f is set to 1 each time the main process (see FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed. updated one by one. In the present embodiment, the effect lottery counter 223f1 used at least as the effect counter 223f to determine whether or not to execute the score effect, and the score allocation effect counter used to select the total score to be given during the score effect. (not shown) and the score to be displayed in one variable display (the total of the scores given in a plurality of score giving effects executed in one variable display). It has score effect counters (not shown), and each counter is configured to be updated within a predetermined range (eg, 0 to 99) without synchronism.

The SW valid time storage area 223g is a storage area that stores a period during which the frame button 22 or the frame button 23 is determined to be valid. In this embodiment, when the variation pattern selected by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is a variation pattern (SW variation pattern) for executing an effect that allows the frame button 22 or the frame button 23 to be operated, the variation pattern A defined operation validity period is set. Although detailed description is omitted, this SW effective time storage area 223g stores the variation that is executed in the effect update process (S2112 in FIG. 56) executed in the main process (see FIG. 56) of the sound lamp control device 113. It is determined whether or not the pattern has reached the operation valid period, and if it is determined that the pattern has reached the operation valid period, the elapsed period of the operation valid period is counted, and the operation valid period set in the SW valid time storage area 223g is counted. It is configured to determine whether the period has passed. Also, when it is determined that the player has operated the frame button 22 or the frame button 23 during the operation valid period, the operation valid period is terminated.

The fluctuation time counter 223h is a counter for measuring the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern being executed, and is the effect update process (S2112 in FIG. 56) executed in the main process (see FIG. 56) of the sound lamp control device 113. ), the counter value is updated. By referring to the counter value of the fluctuation time counter 223h, it is possible to grasp the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern.

The game state storage area 223i is an area for storing the game state corresponding to the state command when a state command regarding the game state is received from the main control device 110 . By referring to the information (game state) stored in the game state storage area 223i, the current game state can be identified on the sound lamp control device 113 side. In this embodiment, the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is erased when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. The information indicating the current gaming state is also erased. However, in this embodiment, the state command is set in the start-up process (see FIG. 51) of the main control device which is executed after the power is turned on (S1312 in FIG. 51). is stored information indicating the game state set before the power is turned off. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the game state can always be identified on the sound lamp control device 113 side.

The effect prohibition flag 223j is a flag for prohibiting the setting of a new score effect in a state in which the score effect is set, and is set to ON when the score effect is set. This effect prohibition flag 223j is set when it is determined in the winning information related process (see FIG. 58) or the stop command process (see FIG. 61) to execute the score effect (S2307 in FIG. 58: Yes, S2608 in FIG. 61: Yes), it is set to ON (S2313 in FIG. 58, S2614 in FIG. 61). Then, it is referred to in the winning information related processing (see FIG. 58) (S2304 in FIG. 58), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S2304 in FIG. 58: Yes), the processing for setting the score effect is executed. configured to skip. After that, in the stop command process (see FIG. 61), when it is determined that the effect prohibition release flag 223k is set to ON (S2601 in FIG. 61: Yes), that is, when it is determined that the score effect has ended, It is set to off (S2602 in FIG. 61).

By configuring in this way, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 during the scoring effect executed using multiple variations of the special symbols and a new winning information command is received, a new winning information command is received. It is possible to prevent the setting of a score effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the problem that a new score effect is started during the execution of the score effect and the player is provided with an effect that is difficult to understand.

In addition, in this embodiment, since a configuration is used in which a plurality of score presentations cannot be executed in duplicate, the above-described control is adopted. In the case of having a configuration that can be executed in duplicate, the score effects may be configured to be settable until the number of score effects that can be executed in duplicate is reached.

Specifically, when it is determined to execute a score effect in the winning information related processing (see FIG. 58) (S2307 in FIG. 58: Yes), or when it is determined to execute a score effect in the stop command process (see FIG. 61) (S2608 of FIG. 61: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the effect setting number counter that counts the number of setting times of the scoring effects (the number of scoring effects that have already been executed). Then, in the winning information related processing (see FIG. 58) and the stop command processing (see FIG. 61), before determining whether to set a new score effect, the value of the current effect setting counter is set to the upper limit value (overlapping). (value corresponding to the number of points that can be used to execute the score effect), and if the result of the determination is not the upper limit value, perform processing to set a new score effect, and if it is the upper limit value skips the process of setting a new score effect. Then, in the stop command process (see FIG. 61), when it is determined that the one-point effect has been completed, it is preferable to decrement the value of the effect setting number counter by one.

The effect prohibition release flag 223k is a flag for releasing the period during which the setting of a new score effect is prohibited, and is set in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 62) for setting the variable display corresponding to the special symbol variation. When it is determined that the value of the effect variation counter is not greater than 0 (is 0) in the effect setting process to be executed (see FIG. 63) (S2801 in FIG. 63), that is, the variable display set this time is the score This is the final variation of the effect, and when the effect prohibition flag 223j is set to ON (S2804 in FIG. 63: Yes), it is set to ON (S2806 in FIG. 63). Then, it is referred to in the stop command process (see FIG. 61), and when it is determined that the effect prohibition release flag 223k is set to ON in the stop command process (S2601 in FIG. 61: Yes), together with the effect prohibition flag 223j set to off.

The performance change number counter 223m counts the number of variations of the special symbols executed during the score performance, and is updated to a value corresponding to the current number of pending balls when the score performance is set. Then, the value is referred to in the effect setting process (S2704 in FIG. 63), and when it is determined that the value of the effect variation counter 223m is greater than 0 (S2801 in FIG. 63: Yes), the score giving effect setting is executed. The value of the counter is decremented by 1 in the process (see FIG. 64) (S2908 in FIG. 64).

The effect type flag 223n is a flag indicating the effect type of the score effect, and is assigned a 3-bit storage area, for example. The 1st bit corresponds to the score effect A, the 2nd bit corresponds to the score effect B, and the 3rd bit corresponds to the score effect C, indicating that the score effect corresponding to the ON (1) bit is set. Further, when all bits are off (0), it means that the score effect is not set.

The total given score storage area 223o is an area for temporarily storing the upper limit of the points given during the score presentation, and is executed when it is determined that the score presentation is to be executed (S2307 in FIG. 58: Yes). The total given score set in the total given score setting process (see FIG. 59) is stored.

The given score counter 223p is a counter for measuring the score given (displayed) during the score presentation, and is a value corresponding to the number of given points set in the score presentation presentation setting process (see FIG. 64). is added. Further, an operation score effect is set as a score giving effect in which points are awarded (displayed) when the player operates the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is not operated during the operation score effect, A value corresponding to the score not given (displayed) is subtracted.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing commands received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination processing (see FIG. 57) of the audio ramp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination processing The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 performs variable display (variation) of the third pattern. production) and advance notice production are controlled. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 50).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 8) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the game flow of the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 28 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the game flow of the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 28, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described above, during the normal game state (during the normal state), the left-handed game is performed and the special 1 game aiming at the first ball entrance 64 is executed. be done. Here, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is won, it shifts to a different game state after the jackpot ends depending on the type of the jackpot won.

Specifically, when the jackpot type of the winning jackpot is jackpot C (50% of the total), the normal state is set again after the jackpot ends, and when the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B, the jackpot ends. It is configured to shift later to a time-saving game state (time-saving state), which is a game state more advantageous to the player than the normal state.

In the normal state, a ball is entered into the second ball entrance 640 and a lottery for the second special symbol is executed, and when a big win is won, the normal game state is always set after the big win is completed. are doing. This is because, as described above with reference to FIG. 3, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment does not allow a ball to enter the second ball inlet 640 (hardly) even if a right-handed game is played during the normal game state. Since it is configured as above, the act of executing the lottery of the second special symbol in the normal game state is regarded as a fraudulent act, and measures are taken to prevent the player who has committed the fraudulent act from playing an advantageous game. is. As will be described later, in the present embodiment, the lottery (game) in which the lottery of the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol can be performed in the time saving state. Therefore, there is a risk that the second special symbol lottery may be conducted by cheating. Therefore, by taking the measures described above, it is possible to suppress the lottery for the second special symbol from being performed due to fraud.

When the time-saving game state (time-saving state) is set as the game state, the ball can be easily entered into the second ball entrance 640 by the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640. Therefore, a right-handed game is performed and a special 2 game aiming at the second ball entrance 640 is performed.

Here, when a small win is won by lottery of the second special symbols, the V winning device 650 is opened as a small winning game, and the V switch 650e3 in the V winning device 650 detects a ball, thereby causing a big win. A game is started. Here, it shifts to a different game state after the end of the big hit depending on the type of the small hit won. Specifically, if the winning small hit type is small hit A or small hit B (90% of the total), the time saving state is set again after the big hit ends, and the small hit type is small hit C. In some cases, it is configured to shift to the normal game state after the end of the jackpot.

In other words, once the time-saving game state is shifted to, the time-saving game state is set after the jackpot is completed with a probability of about 90%, so that the game state advantageous to the player can be easily continued, and the interest in the game can be improved. can. In addition, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol during the time saving game state, the time saving game state is always set after the big win is finished. In addition, even when a jackpot is won by lottery of the first special symbol during the time saving game state, the time saving game state is always set after the big win is finished.

This is, for example, in the normal game state in which a left-handed game is performed, when the jackpot is won with the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 being the upper limit, and the time-saving game state is set after the jackpot, the time-saving game Lottery for the first special symbol corresponding to the reserved ball of special figure 1 may be executed during the state. In this way, when the jackpot is won by the reserved ball of special figure 1 (the prize information that the prize is in the normal game state, but the timing at which the lottery is actually executed is in the time-saving game state), the game state shifts to the normal game state If such a configuration is used, there is a problem in that the player who has made the transition to the time-saving gaming state with great difficulty is dissatisfied. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even if the jackpot of the first special symbol is won during the time saving state, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, as part of the end condition of the time saving state, since it has "the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol is 1", when the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol is 1 Also (when the second special symbol variation in the first rotation during the time saving game ends), the game state is shifted from the time saving game state to the normal game state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the flow during the small winning game of the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment will be described. FIGS. 29(a) to (f) are diagrams schematically showing the flow of various configurations during the small winning game. As shown in FIGS. 29(a) to (f), when the small winning game is executed by the control processing of the main control device 110, the small winning game effect is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 by the display control device 114. is executed. Then, when t1 (1 second) elapses after the start of the small winning game, the V winning opening solenoid is driven according to a predetermined scenario (see FIG. 27). In addition, the channel solenoid 650k is always set to OFF, and the winning ball of the V winning device 650 flows down to the special discharge channel 650e2. The ball flowing down the special discharge channel 650e2 is detected by the V winning switch (V switch) 650e3, and the V switch 650e3 is activated for 17 seconds (V effective period t5) from 1 second after the start of the small winning game. By detecting the ball, a big win game is executed after the end of the small win game, and when an opening period t6 (2 seconds) elapses after the start of the big win game, the first round round game is started and the specific winning opening 65 is opened. be released.

Thus, in this embodiment, it is possible to cause the V winning device 650 to win the ball during the small winning game only by executing the right-handed game normally, and to cause the V switch 650e3 to detect the ball. It is configured as follows. By configuring in this way, even if the time saving state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is configured to end when the lottery of the second special symbol is performed once, the game can be played without any inconvenience. can be done. In addition, since it is configured so that the time saving state ends when the lottery of the second special symbol is performed once, for example, the type of small hit won in the lottery of the second special symbol is identified, and the player When winning a small win (for example, a small win whose kind of small win is C), the game aiming at the drawing of the next second special symbol is prevented without winning the ball to the V winning device 650.例文帳に追加can do.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in this first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 38. FIG. FIG. 33 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the sound lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238 , and the MPU 231 , work RAM 233 , character ROM 234 and image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240 . . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237 , and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241 . A third pattern display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239 .

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with a different lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or a different number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot, the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are different. Since there are models with exactly the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce costs.

The MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described below.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio ramp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110 . The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is designed so that a system reset is applied from the power supply 115 immediately after power is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same shall apply hereinafter). is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231 . Each time an instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer indicated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional game machines. The data of the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also control programs and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data continuously arranged in a plurality of pages, the data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed. It takes a long time before the data is output. Also, when reading discontinuous data, a long time is required each time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions that make up the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. store. The MPU 231 then executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233 . The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third pattern display device 81 , and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240 . The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235, which is connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236 .

The character ROM 234 is constructed by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND type flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storage and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Here, the NAND type flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can. Therefore, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to increase the interest of the player.

In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this way, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since the characters can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data is retrieved from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 .

Here, the NAND type flash memory 234a, due to its nature, generates a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) when writing data, and generates defective data blocks into which data cannot be written. or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b applies known error correction to the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and avoids bad data blocks when reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a. data address translation.

The ROM controller 234b corrects errors in the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a that contains error bits. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

In addition, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data blocks of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data blocks. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data corresponding to the designated address. is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 after performing known error correction processing.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one page of data in the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in each bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b, for example, outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while data is set in one bank, or outputs the data specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The processing of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub-storage unit in the character ROM 234, and is intended to complement the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Of the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR-type ROM 234d stores programs that are not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND-type flash memory 234a. At least a first program storage area 234d1 is provided for storing a portion of the boot program to be executed.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third pattern display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after releasing the system reset. As a result, the display control device 114 can be put into a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 stores the boot program within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a), which should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word=2 bytes)) are stored. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 should be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and instructs the bus line 240 to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 .

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and transfers the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. to specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, selects the program previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d. , the instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231 .

Here, in this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time to read out the data of the first page after the address is specified until the data is output. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set the data in the buffer RAM 234c. You spend a lot of time waiting to receive your code. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Thus, when the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. , and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. , fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program are stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. The MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c that is stored, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is transferred to the program storage area 233a. The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, there is no need to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c, so the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the command pointer 231a to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to be set to a first predetermined address. As a result, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined number in the program storage area 233a. Set to a street address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processing can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processes. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute processing for those instructions.

Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1. The instruction pointer 231a is programmed to be included, and the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Execute the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control programs are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Also, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, the initialization process (see S4002 in FIG. 70) executed after the boot process (see S4001 in FIG. 70) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to .

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed by the MPU 231 to the end, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third pattern display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 38) sent from the MPU 231 to be described later, and draws a frame in either a first frame buffer 236b or a second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third pattern display device 81 to display the image on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加. The image controller 237 performs the one-frame image drawing process and the one-frame image display process within the one-frame image display time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third pattern display device 81 . parallel processing in

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 72(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of causing the third pattern display device 81 to display the image developed by the previous drawing.

In this manner, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 . That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND type flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but its read speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image is drawn by the image controller 237 while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. can be processed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed when drawing the image. , the time required for reading the image can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after display is determined by main controller 110 or display controller 114 are permanently resident in resident video RAM 235. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until an image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Further, when the display control device 114 draws an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, before the drawing is performed, the display controller 114 stores necessary data for drawing from the character ROM 234 in the normal video RAM 236. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal-use video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of , and the time required for reading the data can be saved, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, there is no need to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so there is no need to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. FIG. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given to the image controller 237 by the MPU 231 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the head address (storage source head address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and top of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains an address. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address in the character ROM 234 according to various information of this transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and stores it in the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 is not in use. , is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 . Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source start address to the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

As a result, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 in a short time. can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long period of time by transferring the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, these video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for image drawing processing. , it is possible to prevent the display on the third pattern display device 81 from being too late.

In addition, since image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are used for image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine the period during which the display processing on the device 81 is not used, and to simplify the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 can be retained while the power is turned on without being overwritten. 235e and an error message image area 235f are provided, and at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third pattern area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is the power-on main image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 after power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In addition, in the power-on variation image area 235b, a game is started by the player while the main image at power-on is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on varying image for displaying the results of the lottery performed by the main controller 110 in a varying effect when the power is turned on.

The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S4003 and S4004 in FIG. 70).

Here, the power-on variation image will be described with reference to FIG. 34 . FIG. 34 shows a power-on image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234 immediately after the display control device 114 is powered on. It is an explanatory view explaining a time image.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 ("o" and "x" are displayed on the third pattern display device 81).

At this time, when receiving a display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main controller 110, which is an instruction command to start variation, the display control device 114 displays FIG. As shown in FIG. 34(c), on the display screen of the main image at power-on, a variation image at power-on with a symbol "○" at the lower right position of the screen, and a "○" at power-on as shown in FIG. A power-on fluctuation image of an "x" pattern is alternately and repeatedly displayed at the same position as the pattern during the fluctuation period. Then, based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, the lottery performed by the main controller 110 is selected from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113. The result is determined, and if it is a "big hit with a special symbol", the image shown in FIG. 34(b) is displayed for a certain period after stopping the variable effect, and if it is "a loss of a special symbol", it is displayed in FIG. 34(c). is displayed for a certain period of time after the stop of the variable effect.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to use the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person involved in the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the remaining image to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is displayed. To wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.例文帳に追加can be done.

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacture, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Furthermore, by using the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

Further, when the player starts the game while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the entry of the first entrance ball 64 is detected, the power-on fluctuation image area is displayed. 34(b) and 34(c) are alternately displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to do so. As a result, a simple variation effect can be performed using the power-on variation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. When the entry of the first entrance ball 64 is detected while the main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加can.

Returning to FIG. 33, the description is continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. Here, with reference to FIG. 35, the rear image and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c among the rear images will be described. 35A and 35B are explanatory diagrams for explaining four kinds of back images and the range of the back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image. FIG. FIG. 35(b) shows the back surface A corresponding to the "sand beach stage" and the back surface B corresponding to the "deep sea stage".

As shown in FIG. 35, the character ROM 234 prepares back images corresponding to the back surfaces A and B, which are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . The image controller 237 draws the image so that the back image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared for the back surfaces A and B (hereinafter referred to as "scrolling images") are configured such that the back images are continuous at positions a and c. The image between position c and position d and the image between position a and position a' are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between position c and position d is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as the display area, and then the third pattern display device 81 displays an image between the position a and the position a' as the display area. The background image is scrolled in a continuous manner.

When it is decided to change the back face type and the stage is changed to the "sand beach stage" or "deep sea stage", the MPU 231 first sets the position between position a and position a' of the corresponding back face image as the initial position of the display area. Then, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . Then, as time elapses, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third pattern display device 81. When the area reaches the image between position c and position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is again displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as an image from position a to position a'. Therefore, the third pattern display device 81 can display the images between the position a to the position c by scrolling repeatedly in a smooth manner so as to flow toward the left.

Next, for each rear image, the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 35(a), the rear surface A corresponding to the sandy beach stage, which is the initial stage, has all the image data corresponding to the entire range of the rear surface A, that is, from position a to position d. It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often played without changing the stage while the initial stage "Beach Stage" is displayed. By keeping all of them resident in the back image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 35(b), only image data corresponding to a partial area of the back surface, that is, an image between position a and position b, is resident on the back surface B corresponding to the "deep sea stage". It is stored in the rear image area 235 c of the video RAM 235 .

Here, in order to immediately change the back image, it is ideal to keep the entire range of image data for all back images resident in the resident video RAM 235 . As such, a very large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is set to the range from position a to position a' (or the range shown in FIGS. 35(a) to (b)). ), and the image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b including the initial position (or the image between FIGS. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, if a lottery at the start of fluctuation decides to change the stage, the resident video RAM 235 can store the characters on the back of the resident video RAM 235. By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial position of the back surface B can be immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and the scroll display or the color tone can be changed with the passage of time. can be displayed. In addition, since only image data corresponding to a partial range of image is stored for the rear surface B, an increase in storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

After the image of the initial position is displayed on the rear face B, the image data resident in the rear face image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is used to scroll the range from position a to position b from left to right. The range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b' to the position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 during this period. As a result, the image data from position b' to position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from position a to position b is being scrolled. After scrolling the range from position a to position b by using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from position b' to position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the pattern display device 81 .

Image data stored in the normal-use video RAM 236 on the back surface B is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the rear-surface image provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal-use video RAM 236 (see FIG. 33). As a result, the rear image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the rear image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the rear image can be reliably displayed.

In addition, in the back surface B, the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 are images corresponding to images between positions b' and positions b. Data is stored redundantly. Under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video image is displayed. By displaying the image from the position b' on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scrolled and displayed in a smooth connection on the third pattern display device 81. ing.

Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data in the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position c and position d is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as a display area. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position a and position a' is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as the display area. do. As a result, the third pattern display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the images between the positions a to c in a smooth manner so as to flow toward the left.

Returning to FIG. 33, the description is continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for permanently storing the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, in the third pattern area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main patterns with numbers "0" to "9" as the third patterns are resident. As a result, when the third pattern display device 81 performs a variable effect, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. It is possible to quickly start a variable production. Therefore, even though the first pattern display device 37 has started the variable performance after the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the third pattern display device 81 immediately starts the variable performance. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which it is not possible.

The character design area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character designs used in various effects displayed on the third design display device 81. FIG. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "Boy" are displayed according to various effects, and data corresponding to these characters are resident in the character design area 235e to control the display. When the device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, instead of newly reading out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the image data is stored in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading the image data resident in advance, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the character design can be changed immediately.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the sound ramp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound ramp control device 113 detects the occurrence of a vibration error. Notify the display controller 114 with an error command. Also, when the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the error occurrence together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81 when an error command is received.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the standpoint of preventing fraud by the player and protecting the player against errors. In the pachinko machine 10, since image data corresponding to various error messages are preliminarily resident in the error message image area 235f, the display control device 114 displays the error message in the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading the image data pre-resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is read after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data can be overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235, among the image data necessary for drawing the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data to be stored in each sub-area is determined in advance.

The MPU 231 extracts image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 in a sub area provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 . , instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area for storing. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234 and transfers the read image data to the designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including the transfer data information in the later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image controller 237 writes the one-frame image drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby rendering the one-frame image to the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and sent to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information with the third pattern display device 81, a process for displaying the image for one frame is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 can expand the one-frame image drawn in one of the frame buffers and simultaneously , the image for one frame developed earlier can be read out from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 are used for drawing processing of an image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds of completion, the MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating designations, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for an image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. Configured. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, a storage image data discrimination It has at least a flag 233j and a drawing target buffer flag 233k.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing control programs executed by the MPU 231 . When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. After storing all the control programs in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. After all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect, a round effect, etc. , an ending effect, and a display data table corresponding to the demo effect are prepared.

The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. In addition, when the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variable performance is started, if the stop type of the variable performance is off, the stop symbol indicating the failure is finally stopped and displayed, and the stop type of the variable performance is jackpots A to D. In either case, the stop symbols indicating the respective jackpots are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in this variable effect, and can easily determine the game value to be given according to the jackpot type.

A player can easily recognize the time period of normal symbols by informing the time period of normal symbols in the ending effect. The longer the time period of the normal pattern, the more chances the ball passes through the second ball entrance 67, so the chances of the lottery for the normal pattern increase, and the chances of winning the normal pattern also increase. Become. Therefore, there are more chances for the electric accessories to be released as a jackpot of normal symbols, so that the ball can easily enter the second ball entrance 640, and the lottery for the special symbols can be easily performed. Therefore, the longer the time period of the displayed normal symbols, the stronger the player's expectation that the special symbols will be a big hit, and the player can be made to have the desire to participate in the game. can. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

In addition, since the first ball entrance 64 is a prize winning opening in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball is entered, a jackpot of the normal symbol is produced and the electric accessory is released, and the ball enters the second ball. If it becomes easier to enter the ball opening 640, the number of prize balls increases. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state in which it is difficult to reduce the number of balls in hand, or in which the number of balls in hand does not decrease even if the game is played, so that the player is in a state in which the number of balls in hand is difficult to decrease or the number of balls in hand does not decrease. You can get a sense of the period that you can get a special symbol jackpot without it. Therefore, since the player's desire to participate in the game can be enhanced, the player can continue to have the desire to participate in the game.

In addition, in the ending effect, by notifying that any one of the pending special symbol lotteries will result in a special symbol jackpot, the player can receive special symbols in the reserved special symbol lottery. Since it is possible to recognize that a big win will occur, it is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation that the special symbol will surely win a big win. Therefore, since the player's desire to participate in the game can be enhanced, the player can continue to have the desire to participate in the game.

In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has passed since one variable effect stopped. The third pattern composed of the main patterns with no numerals '0' to '9' is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player and the people involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each corresponding to the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. In addition, if there are 32 variable performance patterns to be set, the variable display data table, which is a display data table for the variable performance, is prepared with one table for one variable performance pattern and a total of 32 tables.

Details of the display data table will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at that time in association with an address that represents the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) during which an image for one frame is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame.

The drawing contents specify the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Rendering information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to render sprites, such as values, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third pattern display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying known α-blending coefficients used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. Color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when rendering the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address are one rear image, nine third patterns (design 1, design 2, . Rendering information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. One or a plurality of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification, rotation angle, translucency, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information are changed over time. Since it is fixed, the variable display data table defines only the back face type, which is information for specifying the back face image type. The type of the back surface is to display one of the back surfaces A and B corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either "sand beach stage" or "deep sea stage"), or to display a back surface different from the back surfaces A and B. Information specifying whether to display an image is described. In addition, when specifying that a back image different from back faces A and B is to be displayed, the back face type also includes information specifying which back face image is to be displayed.

When the type of back surface specifies that one of the back surfaces A and B is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A and B as the object to be drawn. Also, the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified according to the lapse of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a rear image different from the rear faces A and B, the rear face image to be displayed is specified from the rear face type.

In the present embodiment, a description will be given of a case in which only the back surface type is specified as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table. may be defined as position information indicating whether the should be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started.

Furthermore, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed according to the back surface type, and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third pattern display device 81 display) may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display, or along with the back surface type and position information, the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. information indicating whether or not the background image is drawn) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. Alternatively, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of information indicating the elapsed time.

The third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, . . . ) describe symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop pattern, and in the pattern offset information from the start of the variation until the predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop pattern of the previous variation performance is described. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (stop type command for display) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 Include information. As a result, the variable effect can be stopped with a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. - 特許庁

In addition, since each third symbol is assigned a unique number, the variable symbol in the previous variable effect or the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110 can be selected as the third symbol. , and the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers attached to each third pattern, the third pattern to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information.

In addition, in the pattern offset information, the third pattern fluctuates at high speed during the predetermined time when the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third pattern is being variably displayed at high speed, the third pattern is invisible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third pattern is interrupted, the player is not made to recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"0000H", which is the top address of the display data table, describes "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 36) describes the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing contents corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table are displayed. is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display data table. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next A drawing list (see FIG. 38), which will be described later, is created by specifying the image contents to be drawn. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, as the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table, so the image specified in the display data table is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

Here, as in the conventional pachinko machine, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, the effect image becomes more diverse. Therefore, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a risk that the diversification of controllable effect images will be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various modes of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81. - 特許庁

In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance in the pachinko machine 10 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the mode of presentation. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized only when the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine the presentation mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize.

Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect. Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. As a result, an increase in capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

The transfer data table contains transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") to be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table in correspondence with the address. (corresponding to addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in FIG. 37). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transferring at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transferring corresponding to that address. (corresponding to address "0002H" in FIG. 37).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). is included.

It should be noted that, similarly to the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the top address of the transfer data table, and the end address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 37, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are identified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 38) to be described later is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 37, when the pointer 233f is "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information defined for the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added, and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237 . On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the display data. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is possible to reliably transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load on transfer.

The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and is associated with an address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the timing of starting transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, various effects images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c determines whether or not to display the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIGS. flag to indicate This simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on varying image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on varying image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , is set to ON in the main processing (see FIG. 70) executed by the MPU 231 (see S4005 in FIG. 70). Then, when all the resident object image data are stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer processing of the image transfer processing, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to OFF (see S4305 in FIG. 72(b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S4301 in FIG. 72(b)). If the image display flag 233c is ON, the simple command determination process (see S4308 in FIG. 72B) and the simple display setting process (see S4308 in FIG. 72(b) S4309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 73 to 81) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 82 to 84) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S6301 in FIG. 85(a)), and when the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident object image data not stored in resident video RAM 235, resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 85(b)) is executed to transfer the resident object image data from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86) is executed to transfer the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to commands and the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on commands and the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and stores the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It selects and stores the selected display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 A drawing list (see FIG. 38), which will be described later, is generated in which the content of the image drawing instruction for is described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 adds an image to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 38), which will be described later, is generated in which the content of the drawing instruction is described. As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

The transfer data table buffer 233e transfers a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. is a buffer for storing When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a later-described rendering list (see FIG. 38) describing the content of image rendering instructions to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data necessary for drawing the sprite can be obtained. Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The pointer 233f is an address at which transfer data information of corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data should be obtained from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. is for specifying The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, display setting processing for V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame of image is completed (see FIG. 72(b)). ), the pointer update process (see S6005 in FIG. 84) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

Every time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and stores the drawing content in the drawing list, which will be described later. (see FIG. 38), acquires the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and obtains the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. Therefore, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, various effects can be displayed.

In addition, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed based on the transfer data table before the corresponding display data table starts drawing a predetermined sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The drawing list area 233g is used by the image controller to draw an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list that instructs H.237.

Details of the drawing list will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. Design 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Retained ball pattern 1, Retained ball number pattern 2, ..., Error (symbol) describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite for each sprite. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 .

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and its type. The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. alpha blending information, compositing with other sprites, color tone correction according to color information, and filtering according to filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, the pending number of balls to be displayed). Image, warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.), generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw the image for one frame, and provides the detailed information for each sprite. Create a draw list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the RAM type and address for storing the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type defined in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can store the image data according to the sprite type. , the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 sets other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite as defined in the display data table. copy the information as is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged in the front side from the sprites to be arranged in the rearmost side in the image for one frame, and provides detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, followed by the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, . . . ), effect (effect 1, effect 2, . . . ). , character (character 1, character 2, . . . , reserved ball pattern 1, reserved ball pattern 2, .

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and overwrites the drawn sprite in the frame buffer to develop it. Therefore, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

In the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, transfers the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 draws an image from a predetermined area of the character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) based on the transfer data information. The data is read out and transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 .

The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. When one display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the performance time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third pattern display device 81 .

Then, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (see (b )) is executed, the timer counter 233h is decremented by one (see S6007 in FIG. 82). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 judges that the presentation displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the presentation at the end of the presentation. perform various operations to

The stored image data determination flag 233j is set to indicate whether the image data corresponding to all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

This stored image data determination flag 233j is generated by the initial setting process (see S4002 in FIG. 70) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The storage image data determination flag 233j generated here is set to "OFF" indicating that the storage status for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data determination flag 233j is updated when an instruction to transfer image data to be transferred corresponding to one sprite is set during normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 86) executed by the MPU 231. will be In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Also, image data of other sprites to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite will always be in a non-stored state when the image data of one sprite is stored. Therefore, set the containment state corresponding to the other sprites to "off".

Also, when transferring the image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233j and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S6513 in FIG. 86). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, an instruction to transfer the image data is set (see S6514 in FIG. 86). , causes the image controller 237 to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k selects a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as "drawing target buffer") for developing an image drawn by the image controller 237 from among two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). ), and when the drawing buffer flag 233k is 0, it designates the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing buffer, and when it is 1, it designates the second frame buffer 236c. Then, the information of the specified drawing target buffer is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S6602 in FIG. 87).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. In parallel with the drawing process, the image controller 237 reads the drawn image information previously developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, and transmits the image to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the buffer flag 233k to be drawn, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Also, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the rendering process of the process (see FIG. 72B) is executed (see S6602 in FIG. 87).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating designations, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for an image for one frame.

<Regarding control processing executed by main controller 110 in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 39 to 54. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in this embodiment). There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing that is activated by input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. and main processing.

FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . Timer interrupt processing is periodic processing that is executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, various winning switch reading processes are executed (S101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (999 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial random number counter CINI2 is cleared. is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203 .

Furthermore, the update of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second hit random number counter C4, and the small hit type counter C5 is executed (S103). Specifically, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second per random number counter C4 and the small per type counter C5 are each added by 1, and their counter values are maximum When the values (999, 99, 239 and 99 respectively in this embodiment) are reached, they are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. FIG.

Next, a special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). After that, a starting winning process associated with winning (starting winning) to the first ball entrance 64 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation processing and the start winning processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After executing the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is the process for performing display on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106), and the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is followed by the passage of the ball. A gate passage process is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 46 and 47. FIG. After executing the through gate passing process, the V entrance passing process accompanying the ball entering the V winning device 650 is executed (S108). After that, the V passing process accompanying the winning to the V winning switch 650e3 of the V winning device 650 is executed (S109). Details of the V entrance passage processing and the V passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. FIG.

Next, the firing control process is executed (S110), and further, other processes to be periodically executed are executed (S111), and the timer interrupt process ends. Note that the shooting control process is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping shooting is not operated. This is the process of deciding on/off of firing. Main controller 110 gives a ball launch instruction to launch controller 112 when ball launch is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39), and the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b and the third symbol This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third pattern performed in the display device 81 and the like.

In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in the midst of a big hit at the moment (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game). During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game of the symbol. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S201: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

If the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is fluctuating (S202), and the display of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is performed. If the mode is not changing (S202: No), it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the second ball entrance 640 (S203).

When it is determined that the game ball has entered the second ball entrance 640 (S203: Yes), the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the small per type counter C5 Each value is stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area (S204). Next, a special symbol variation start process for starting variation display in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is executed (S210), and this process is terminated. The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the processing of S203, when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the second ball entrance 640 (S203: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (S205). Then, it is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S206). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S206: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S206: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted (S207) and changed by calculation. Set a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (S208). After setting the special figure 1 reserved ball number command by the processing of S208, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S209). After that, the process of S210 described above is executed, and this process ends.

In the processing of S202, if the display modes of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are fluctuating (S202: Yes), whether the variation time of the variation display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b has elapsed It is determined whether or not (S211). The variation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command). If the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S211: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S211, if the variation time of the variable display being executed has passed (S211: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbols of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is set (S212). . The stop symbols are set in advance by the special symbol variation start process (S210), which will be described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. More specifically, according to the value of the first winning random number counter C1, it is determined whether the special symbol is a big win, a small win, or a loss. , The jackpot type (jackets A to D) is determined according to the value of the first hit type counter C2.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the jackpot is won, the blue LEDs are turned on in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b. In addition, when it is a small hit, the red LED is lit, and when it is a loss, the red LED and the green LED are lit. Furthermore, the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b are formed from a plurality of LEDs, and when the lottery result is a jackpot, the combinations of LEDs to be lit are changed to identify each jackpot type (jackets A to D). It is configured to display as possible. In addition, when the lottery result is other than the big hit (small hit or loss), the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b may be lit in the same display mode. Further, each LED display is turned off when the next variable display is started, but it may be turned on only for several seconds after the variable display is stopped.

After the process of S212 is completed, when the variation display being executed in the first design display devices 37a and 37b is started, the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start process (this lottery result). is a special symbol jackpot (S213). If the result of the lottery this time is a special symbol jackpot (S213: Yes), an opening scenario for a specific winning opening is set based on the jackpot type (S214), and then the start of the jackpot is set (S215). Next, the jackpot start flag 203d and the jackpot mid-jack flag 203e are set to ON (S216), the time-saving medium total counter 203c and the time-saving medium special 2 counter 203j are set to 0 (S217), and the process proceeds to S218. In the process of S218, a stop command is set (S218), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S213, when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a big win (S213: No), it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is a small win (S219).

In the process of S219, when it is determined that the current lottery result is a small hit (S219: Yes), a small hit start setting process is executed (S220), and then a time saving number update process is executed (S221 ), the process of S218 described above is executed, and the present process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S219, when it is determined that the lottery result of this time is not a small hit (S219: No), the small hit start setting process (S220) is skipped, and the time saving number update process is executed (S221). . Next, the process of S218 is executed, and this process ends.

In this way, when a small hit is won as a special symbol lottery result, the time saving number update process (S221) is executed after the small hit start setting process (S220) is executed, so the big hit game is played after the small hit game ends. is not executed, the time-saving state will end. Therefore, when a small win is won, the type of the won small win is identified, and in the case of the small win type that is disadvantageous to the player, when a game is played in which the ball is not allowed to enter the V winning device 650, Since the time saving state ends after the end of the small winning game, it is possible to prevent the illegal game from being played.

Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the special symbol variation start process (S210) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variation start process (S210). This special symbol variation start process (S210) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 41) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39), and the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is executed. Based on the values of the various counters stored in the area, a lottery (win/fail judgment) of "special symbol big win", "special symbol small win" or "special symbol loss" is performed, and the first symbol display device 37a. , 37b and the third symbol display device 81 to determine the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variable effect.

In the special symbol variation start process, first, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the small per type are stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Each value of the counter C5 is acquired (S301). Next, based on the special symbol jackpot random number table corresponding to the acquired special symbol type, the lottery result is acquired (S302). Specifically, in the case of lottery for the first special symbol based on the ball entering the first entrance 64, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 (see FIG. 22(b)) The random numbers stored in are compared to determine whether or not it is a big hit, and if the lottery for the second special symbol is based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640, the value of the first winning random number counter C1. And the random number value stored in the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 (see FIG. 22(c)) is compared to determine whether it is a big hit or a small hit.

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result is a big hit (S303). When the lottery result is a jackpot (S303: Yes), the jackpot type is acquired based on the jackpot type selection table corresponding to the type of the acquired special symbol (S304). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 and the random value stored in the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202b1 or the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202b2 are compared. , It is determined what the jackpot type is among the jackpots (jackpots A to D) of four types of special symbols (see FIG. 23(b) or (c)).

In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same judgment value for judging a big hit, but not limited to this, different random numbers may be used. By constructing in this way, a random number determined to be out of the first special symbol is determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, and bias in the jackpot can be suppressed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the number of jackpot random numbers is set to be the same for the first special pattern and the second special pattern. You may set the number of random values to be different. By constructing in this way, the probability of big win can be made different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when the lottery is executed with the special symbol with the higher probability of big win, the player can win. It is possible to have expectations for a big hit.

Then, the display mode at the time of the big win corresponding to the special symbol type and the big win type is set (S305). In the process of S305, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (lighting state of the LED 37a) is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpots A to D). Also, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to stop and display the stop symbols corresponding to the jackpot types, the jackpot types (jackpots A to D) are set as the stop types.

Thereafter, a big hit variation pattern is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 (S306), and the process proceeds to S313. When the variation pattern is set in the process of S306, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 until it stops with the jackpot symbol. A pattern variation time is determined. Specifically, the obtained special symbol type, the lottery result, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 are compared with the normal variation pattern table 202d1 or the time reduction variation pattern table 202d2. to determine the variation time of the pattern variation (FIG. 25(b) or FIG. 26).

In the processing of S313, a variation pattern command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the variation pattern determined in the processing of S306 is set (S313). Next, a stop type command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the stop type set in the process of S305 is set (S314). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S1401) of the main processing (see FIG. 52) described later, the sound lamp control device 113. The audio lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the processing of S314 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 40).

On the other hand, if the lottery result is not a big win (S303: No), it is determined whether or not the lottery result is a small win (S307). When the lottery result is a small hit (S307: Yes), a small hit type is acquired based on a small hit type selection table corresponding to the acquired special symbol type (S308). More specifically, the value of the small hit type counter C5 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the small hit type selection table 202e, and three types of special symbols (small hit A to C), it is determined what the small hit type is (see FIG. 24).

Next, the display mode at the time of the small hit corresponding to the special symbol type and the small hit type is set (S309). Thereafter, a small winning variation pattern is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 (S310). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at a small winning symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S306, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the acquired special symbol type, the lottery result and the counter buffer of the RAM 203, the normal variation pattern table 202d1 or the time saving variation pattern table 202d2 to determine the variation time of the symbol variation (FIG. 25(b) or FIG. 26). Next, the processing of S313 and S314 described above is executed, and the process returns to the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 40).

In addition, in the processing of S313 and S314 in this case, the command corresponding to the variation pattern (see S310) set when it is determined that the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit (see S309) and the stop type (see S309) is set.

If the result of the lottery is not a small hit (S307: No), the display mode at the time of loss corresponding to the special symbol is set (S311). After that, based on the number of held balls, the variation pattern at the time of loss is determined (S312). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the lost symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S306, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the acquired special symbol type, the lottery result and the counter buffer of the RAM 203, the normal variation pattern table 202d1 or the time saving variation pattern table 202d2 to determine the variation time of the symbol variation (FIG. 25(b) or FIG. 26). Next, the processing of S313 and S314 described above is executed, and the process returns to the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 40).

Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the small winning start setting process (S220) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing the small winning start setting process (S220). This small hit start setting process (S220) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 40) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39), small hit type (small hit A to C) Based on, it is a process for setting the start of the small winning game.

Here, when a small winning game is started, the pachinko machine 10 changes the V winning device 650 to an open state in which the ball can win (easy), and the winning ball of the V winning device 650 moves to a specific area (V By passing the winning switch 650e3), the big winning game is executed after the small winning game ends.

That is, the game state in which the small winning game is executed is an advantageous state in which the ball can enter the V winning device 650 (a prize ball can be obtained), and the big winning game is executed as compared with the normal game state. It is configured to be in an advantageous state with a high probability.

In the small winning start setting process (S220), first, an opening scenario corresponding to the small winning type is set (S401). After that, a big hit type corresponding to the small hit type is set in the V passage big hit type storage area 203h (S402). More specifically, based on the small hit type and the small hit type selection table 202e, the V passage big hit type (jackpot A to D) is determined. As described above, if the small hit type is A, it is determined to be a big hit A or D (15 rounds short time 1 time big hit), and if the small hit type is B, a big hit B (5 rounds short time 1 time big hit ), and if the small hit type is C, it is determined to be a big hit C (5 rounds with no short working hours) (see FIG. 24).

Next, based on the small hit type, the start of the small hit is set (S403), and the small hit start flag 203f and the small hit middle flag 203g are set to ON (S404). After that, this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the time reduction frequency update process (S221) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing the time saving frequency update process (S221). This time saving number update process (S221) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 40) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39), updates the time saving number, and changes the game state to the normal state. This is a process for setting to

In the time saving frequency update process (S221), first, it is determined whether or not (S501). If it is determined that it is not (S501: No), this process is terminated.

If it is determined (S501: Yes), then the value of the total counter 203c during time saving is subtracted by 1 (S502), and it is determined whether the current variation is special figure 2 (S503). If it is determined that the current variation is the special figure 2 (S503: Yes), the value of the time saving special 2 counter 203j is subtracted by 1 (S504), and the process proceeds to S505. On the other hand, in the process of S503, if it is determined that the current variation is not the special figure 2 (it is the special figure 1) (S503: No), the process of S504 is skipped and the process of S505 is performed.

In the processing of S505, the remaining time reduction command indicating the value of the counter during time reduction (sum counter 203c during time reduction and special 2 counter 203j during time reduction) is set (S505). The remaining time reduction command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S1401) of the main processing (see FIG. 52) described later, the voice lamp control device 113.

After that, it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium special 2 counter 203j is 0 (S506), and when it is determined that the value of the time saving medium special 2 counter 203j is not 0 (S506: No), It is determined whether the value of the sum counter 203c is 0 (S507). In the process of S507, when it is determined that the value of the total counter 203c during time saving is not 0 (S506: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S506, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving medium special 2 counter 203j is 0 (S506: Yes), or in the process of S507, it is determined that the value of the time-saving medium total counter 203c is 0 If so (S507: Yes), the game state is set to the normal state (S508), and this process is terminated.

Next, the starting winning prize information processing (S105) will be described. First, the starting winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 44 is a flow chart showing this starting winning process (S105). This starting winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39), determines whether or not there is a winning to the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning), and if there is a starting winning , is a process for acquiring various random number counters and executing a process of holding the values.

When the starting winning process (FIG. 44, S105) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning) (S601). Here, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S601: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b (number of times N1 of holding variable display in the special symbol) is obtained (S602). ). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S603).

Then, if there is no winning to the first ball entrance 64 (S601: No), or even if there is a winning to the first ball entrance 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is 4. If not less than (S603: No), the process proceeds to S607. On the other hand, if there is a winning to the first ball entrance 64 (S601: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is less than 4 (S603: Yes), special symbol 1 reserved 1 is added to the value (N1) of the ball number counter 203b (S604). Then, a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b changed by the calculation is set (S605).

The pending ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1401) of the main process (see FIG. 52), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the pending ball number command by the processing of S605, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the small hit type counter C5 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above Each value is stored in the first area among the vacant reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the special symbol 1 reservation ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S606). In addition, in the process of S606, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Then, in the processing of S607, prefetch processing is executed (S607). After that, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the look-ahead process (S607), which is one process in the starting winning process (see S105 in FIG. 44) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing this prefetching process (S607).

In this look-ahead process (FIG. 45, S607), first, it is determined whether or not there is a new winning at the first ball entrance 64 (S701). As a result of the determination, if there is no new winning at the first ball entrance 64 (S701: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if there is a new winning at the first entrance 64 (S701: Yes), the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1, the special symbol 1 jackpot type selection table 202b1, and the variation pattern table 202d (normal variation pattern table 202d1 or based on the fluctuation pattern table 202d2 for time saving), the lottery result, the jackpot type, and the fluctuation pattern are acquired in advance (S702).

Next, a winning information command including the jackpot determination result, jackpot type, and variation pattern acquired in the process of S702 is set (S703), and this process is finished.

Next, referring to FIG. 46, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39), and the variation display of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display device and the electric This is a process for controlling the opening time of the accessory.

In the normal symbol variation process (FIG. 46, S106), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (S801). During the winning of the normal symbol (second symbol), the second symbol display device is displaying the winning, and the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is performed. including while As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S801: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S801: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device is fluctuating (S802). If the display mode is not fluctuating (S802: No), it is determined whether or not the second winning random number counter is stored in the second symbol holding ball execution area (S803), and if not (S803: No). , the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the second winning random number counter is stored in the second symbol reserved ball execution area (S803: Yes), the value of the stored second winning random number counter C4 is acquired (S804).

Then, based on the value of the second winning random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S804 and the normal symbol (second) winning random number table 202c, the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is obtained (S805). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second winning random number table 202c. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a hit of the normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,205 to 239", It is determined that it is out of the normal pattern (see FIG. 22(d)).

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the process of S805 is the normal symbol hit (S806), and when it is determined that the normal symbol win is determined (S806: Yes), the hit The hour display mode is set (S807), and the process proceeds to S809. In the process of S807, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "o" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

In the process of S806, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal pattern (S806: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S808). In the process of S808, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). After the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S809.

When the processing of S807 or S808 ends, in the processing of S809, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state with normal symbols (S809), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state with normal symbols (S809: Yes) , the variable time of the variable display on the second symbol display device is set to 3 seconds (S810), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time-saving state of normal symbols (S809: No), the variation time of the variation display on the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S811), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S802, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S802: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation display executed in the second symbol display device has elapsed. (S812). It should be noted that the variable time here is the time set in advance by the process of S810 or the process of S811 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device.

In the process of S812, if the variation time has not elapsed (S812: No), the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S812, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has passed (S812: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S813). In the process of S813, if the normal symbol lottery is won, and the display mode is set by the process of S807, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is displayed stopped (lighted display) on the second symbol display device. ). On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the process of S808, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped (lighted up) on the second symbol display device. is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S813, when the second symbol display update process (see S1408) of the main process (see FIG. 52) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device ends. Then, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped (lighted up) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set in the process of S807 or S808.

Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device is started, the normal symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process (FIG. 46, S106) is the normal symbol. It is determined whether it is a hit (S814). If the lottery result of this time is out of the normal symbol (S814: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the result of the lottery this time is a hit of normal symbols (S814: Yes), it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a time-saving state of normal symbols (S815).

In the processing of S815, if the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time-saving state of normal symbols (S815: No), the opening period of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is set to 0.2 seconds, and The number of openings is set to 1 (S816), and the process proceeds to S817. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of normal symbols (S815: Yes), the opening period of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is set to 2 seconds, and the number of opening times is set to 2. (S817), and the process proceeds to S818. In this way, except during the special symbol jackpot, in the time-saving state of the normal symbols, the time of the fluctuation display is very short from "30 seconds to 3 seconds" compared to the normal state of the normal symbols. Since the release period of the second prize winning port 640 becomes very long as “0.2 seconds×1 time→2 seconds×2 times”, the ball easily enters the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加

In the process of S818, the start of opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is set (S818), and this process ends. When the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the processing of S818, when the electric accessory opening/closing processing (see S1406) of the main processing (see FIG. 52) is executed next, the opening and closing of the electric accessory is performed. The control is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S816 or S817 are completed.

Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through-gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39) to determine whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, the value indicated by the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired and stored in the execution area.

In the through-gate passing process (FIG. 47, S107), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 (S901). Here, the passage of the ball through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 (S901: Yes), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device is fluctuating (S902), If the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S902: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S902, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is not changing (S902: No), it is determined whether or not the special symbol jackpot is currently in progress (S903). As a result of the determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S903: Yes), this processing is finished as it is. If the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (S903: No), the value of the second winning random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process is stored in the second symbol reserved ball execution area (S904). After that, this process is terminated.

Next, the V entrance passage process (S108) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing the V entrance passing process (S108) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39).

In the V entrance passage process (S108), first, it is determined whether or not the ball passage sensor (ball detection switch) 650c1 is on (S1001). In the process of S1001, if it is determined that the ball passing sensor is not turned on (S1001: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S1001, if it is determined that the ball passage sensor is ON (S1001: Yes), it is determined whether or not the V winning opening 650a is open (S1002).

In the process of S1002, when it is determined that the V winning opening 650a is open (S1002: Yes), the V entrance passage command is set (S1003), and this process ends. The V entrance passage command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is processed by the MPU 201 during the external output processing (S1401) of the main processing (see FIG. 52). It is sent to the lamp control device 113 . Upon receiving the V entrance passage command, the sound lamp control device 113 counts the number of balls that have passed through the V entrance, and transmits a command to the display control device 114 to execute an effect based on the passage of the V entrance. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect during the small winning game based on the ball entering the V winning device 650 (see FIG. 28).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the V winning opening 650a is not open (S1003: No), it means that the ball has entered the V winning device 650 even though it is not a small winning game, so an error command is issued. Set (S1004). After that, the flow path solenoid 209a is set (S1004), and the process ends.

Next, the V passing process (S109) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing the V passage processing (S109). This V passing process (S109) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39).

In the V passage processing, first, it is determined whether or not the V passage flag 203k is ON (S1101). In the process of S1101, if it is determined that the V passage flag 203k is ON (S1101: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1101 that the V passage flag 203k is not ON (S1101: No), it is determined whether or not there is V passage (S1102). That is, it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the V winning switch 650e3 of the V winning device 650 or not. In the process of S1102, if it is determined that the vehicle does not pass through the V (S1102: No), the process ends.

In the process of S1102, if it is determined that there is V passage (S1102: Yes), it is determined whether or not it is during the V passage valid period (S1103). If it is determined that it is during the V-passing valid period (S1103: Yes), the V-passing jackpot type value stored in the V-passing jackpot type storage area 203h is acquired (S1104), and the acquired V-passing jackpot type is obtained. is set to ON (S1105). Then, a V passing command is set (S1106).

Next, the V passage flag 203k is set to ON (S1107). After that, the total counter 203c during the time saving and the special 2 counter 203j during the time saving are set to 0 (S1108), and this processing is finished.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1103, if it is determined that the V passage valid period is not in effect (S1103: No), an error command is set (S1109), and this processing ends. If the game ball passes through the V winning switch 650e3 when it is not during the V valid period, it is considered that the ball has entered the V winning switch 650e3 illegally. In this case, by setting an error command in the process of S1405, an error is output and fraud can be discovered.

FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information (S1201), and ends the NMI interruption processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout launch control device 111 in the same manner, and information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 213 by such NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 51, startup processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S1301). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a wait process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S1302). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1303).

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 8) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1304), and if it is turned on (S1304: Yes), the process proceeds to S1315. On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S1304: No), it is further determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1305), and if not stored (S1305: No). , there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally, so in this case as well, the process proceeds to S1315.

If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1305: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1306). If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved at the time of power shutdown, the backed-up data is destroyed. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S1415 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the processing of S1315, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1315). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing of RAM 203 (S1316, S1317).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S1316, S1317) is executed. Also, if power failure occurrence information is not set, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 203 initialization processing (S1316, S1317) is executed in the same way. . In the RAM initialization process (S1316, S1317), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1316), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1317). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S1310.

On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S1304: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S1305: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S1307: Yes), while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203, clear the power failure occurrence information (S1308). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state at the time of drive power interruption is transmitted (S1309), and the process proceeds to S1310. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the game ball payout control can be started while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .

In the processing of S1310, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the execution of various effects is permitted to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. FIG. Next, the value of the time-saving medium counter (time-saving medium summing counter 203c and time-saving medium 2 counter 203j) is read (S1311), and the state command based on the read value is set (S1312). Then, the channel solenoid 209a is turned off (S1313). After that, the interrupt is permitted (S1314), and the process proceeds to main processing, which will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the start-up processing described above will be described. FIG. 52 is a flow chart showing this main process. Main processing of the game is executed in this main processing. As an outline, each process of S1401 to S1408 is executed as a periodical process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter updating process of S1411 and S1412 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process (see FIG. 52), first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is sent to the sub side. External output processing for transmission to each control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1401). Specifically, it determines whether or not there is winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39). Send a prize ball command to In addition, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 the special figure 1 reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 40) and the start winning process (see FIG. 44). Furthermore, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . Also, the opening command, round number command, and ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 53) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . In addition, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch control device 112 when the ball is to be launched.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1402). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is finished, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1403), and then, in the case of the special symbol jackpot state, the execution of the jackpot production and the correspondence. A jackpot control process for opening or closing the winning opening (the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is executed (S1404). In the jackpot control process, the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and the corresponding winning opening (first variable The maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a of the winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) has elapsed, or the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or V winning device 650 It is determined whether or not a specified number of balls have entered the V winning port 650a). Then, when any of these conditions are established, the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is closed. The opening and closing of the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1404) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 52), but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39).

Next, in the case of a small winning state of a special symbol, execution of various effects according to the small winning, corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 65a of first variable winning device 65 or V winning opening of V winning device 650 650a) is executed (S1405). In the small winning control process, the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is opened based on the opening scenario, and the corresponding winning opening (first variable The maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a of the winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) has elapsed, or the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or V winning device 650 It is determined whether or not a specified number of balls have entered the V winning port 650a). Then, when any of these conditions are established, the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is closed. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the small winning control process (S1405) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 52), but may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39).

Next, an electric accessary product opening/closing process for controlling opening/closing of the electric accessary product 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is executed (S1406). In the electric accessary product opening/closing process, when the opening/closing control start of the electric accessary product is set by the processing of S817 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 46), the opening/closing control of the electric accessary product is started. The opening/closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S815 or S816 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is executed (S1407). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of S306, S310 or S312 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 41), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol display. Starting at the devices 37a, 37b. In this embodiment, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, from the start of the variation until the variation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off and the green LED is turned on. If the green LED is turned on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned on. is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

Note that the main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED change the lighting color of That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S306, S310 or S312 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 41) has ended, the first symbol display device 37a, 37b, the variable display being executed is terminated, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol in the display mode set by the processing of S305, S309 or S311 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 41). The symbol display devices 37a and 37b are stopped (lighted up).

Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1408). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S809 or the process of S810 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 46), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device. . As a result, in the second pattern display device, a variable display is performed in which the second pattern "O" pattern and the "X" pattern are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S812 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 46), the variation being executed in the second symbol display device The display is ended, and the stop design (second design) is stopped (lighted up) on the second design display device in the display mode set by the processing of S806 or S807 of the normal design variation processing (see FIG. 46). do.

After that, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1409). SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the main processing this time (S1410). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1410: Yes), the process proceeds to S1401, and the above-described processes after S1401 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the main processing this time (S1410: No), the second main processing is executed until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1411, S1412).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1411). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum values (299 and 239 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the change type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1402 (S1412).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1401 to S1408 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1, and the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

Further, in the process of S1409, if the RAM 203 stores power failure occurrence information (S1409: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 50 has been executed, so the power-off process after S1413 is executed. First, to prohibit the occurrence of each interrupt processing (S1413), to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as payout control device 111 and sound lamp control device 113) power off command indicating that the power has been cut off and transmit (S1414). Then, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1415), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1416), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area backed up in the RAM 203 .

It should be noted that the processing of S1409 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1401 to S1408, or at the timing of the end of one cycle of the processing of S1411 and S1412 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. It can start from the processing of S1401. In other words, the process can be started from the process of S1401 as in the case of initialization in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the processing when the power is turned off, the stack pointer is saved in the initialization processing (S1301). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the processing can be started from S1401. Therefore, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1404) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing this jackpot control process (S1404). This jackpot control processing (S1404) is executed in the main interrupt processing (see FIG. 52), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a special pattern jackpot state, execution of various effects according to the jackpot, This is a process for opening or closing a winning opening (the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650).

In the jackpot control process (FIG. 53, S1404), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1501). Specifically, if the jackpot start flag 203d is set to ON by the processing of S216 of the special pattern variation processing (see FIG. 40), it is determined that the jackpot of the special pattern is started. In the processing of S1501, when the special symbol jackpot is started (S1501: Yes), an opening command is set (S1502). Then, the jackpot start flag 203d is set to OFF (S1503), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1501, when the special symbol jackpot is not started (S1501: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S1504). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S1504, if the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (S1504: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1504, when it is determined that the special symbol is in the middle of winning (S1504: Yes), the processing of S1505 is executed. In the process of S1505, it is determined whether it is time to start a new round (S1505). In the process of S1505, when it is determined that it is time to start a new round (S1505: Yes), based on the open scenario table 202f, the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or V The V winning opening 650a) of the winning device 650 is opened (S1506), and a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1507). After setting the round number command, this process is terminated. The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S1401) of the main processing (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201, the sound lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113 . Upon receiving the round number command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display round number command corresponding to the round number to the display control device 114 . When the display round number command is received by the display control device 114, the third pattern display device 81 starts a new round effect.

Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, when a continuous jackpot is executed in the sound lamp control device 113, a display round number command corresponding to the cumulative number of rounds is transmitted. Therefore, the accumulated number of rounds in the continuous jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 . As a result, the player can be made to recognize that the big win continues for a long time, so that the player's interest can be improved.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1505, if it is not the start timing of a new round (S1505: No), the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) It is determined whether the closing condition is met (S1508). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after opening the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650), or , the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning device 650 wins a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 in total), it is determined that the closing condition is met.

In the process of S1508, when the closing condition of the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is met (S1508: Yes), the corresponding winning The opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is closed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is not satisfied (S1508: No), the ending effect is started. It is determined whether it is the timing (S1510). The start timing of the ending effect is when 15 rounds are completed, the opening/closing door 65f1 is closed, and the standby time (three seconds in this embodiment), which is the ball throwing time, elapses. Determined as

In the process of S1510, when it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect (S1510: Yes), an ending command is set (S1511), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output processing (S1401) of the main processing (see FIG. 52). It is sent towards device 113 . Upon receiving the ending command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the ending effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1510, if it is determined that it is not the timing to start the ending effect (S1510: No), it is determined in the process of S1510 whether it is time to end the ending effect (S1512). In the processing of S1512, if it is determined that the end timing of the ending effect is not reached (S1512: No), this processing is terminated.

In the processing of S1512, when it is determined that the end timing of the ending effect has come (S1512: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special game being executed was the jackpot C (S1513). In the process of S1513, if it is determined that it is not a jackpot C (5R time-saving no jackpot) (S1513: No), 100 is set to the time-saving medium total counter 203c, and 1 is set to the time-saving medium special 2 counter 203j (S1514), The process proceeds to S1515. On the other hand, in the process of S1513, if it is determined that it was a jackpot C (5R time-saving no jackpot) (S1513: Yes), the process of S1514 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1515.

In the processing of S1515, a state command corresponding to the state after the jackpot is set (S1515). Then, the end of the jackpot is set (S1516), the flag 203e during the jackpot is set to OFF (S1517), and the process is finished.

Next, the small hit control process (S1405) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 54 is a flow chart showing this small winning control process (S1405). This small winning control process (S1405) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 52), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol small winning state, execution of various effects according to the small winning , the processing for opening or closing the corresponding winning opening (V winning opening 650a of V winning device 650).

In the small hit control process (FIG. 54, S1405), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit of the special symbol is started (S1601). Specifically, if the small winning start flag 203f is set to ON by the processing of S404 of the small winning start setting process (see FIG. 42), it is determined that the small winning of the special symbol is started. In the processing of S1601, when the special symbol small winning is started (S1601: Yes), an opening command is set (S1602). Then, the small hit start flag 203f is set to OFF (S1603), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1601, when the small winning of special symbols is not started (S1601: No), it is determined whether or not the small winning of special symbols is in progress (S1604). During the special symbol small winning, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol small winning (including during the special symbol small winning game). During the predetermined time after the end of the small winning game of the special symbol is included. In the process of S1604, if it is not during the small hit of the special symbol (S1604: No), this process is finished as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1604, when it is determined that the special symbol is in the midst of a small hit (S1604: Yes), the process of S1605 is executed. In the process of S1605, it is determined whether or not it is time to open the V winning opening (S1605). In the process of S1605, if it is determined that it is time to open the V winning opening (S1605: Yes), the corresponding winning opening (V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is opened based on the opening scenario table 202f ( S1606), and it is determined whether this time is the fifth or tenth opening timing (S1607).

In the processing of S1607, if it is determined that this time is the fifth or tenth opening timing (S1607: Yes), then it is determined whether the V flag 203i is set to ON (S1608). When it is determined that there is no (off) (S1608: No), an instruction command for notifying the outside that V has not been won even though a predetermined period has passed since the small winning game was started. is set (S1609), and the process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1607 that this time is not the fifth or tenth opening timing (S1607: No), or if it is determined in the processing of S1608 that the V flag 203i is set to ON (S1608 : Yes), this processing ends as it is. The instruction command set in the process of S1609 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1401) of the main process executed by the MPU 201 (see FIG. 52), It is sent to the lamp control device 113 . Upon receiving the instruction command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display instruction command to the display control device 114 . When the display instruction command is received by the display control device 114, the guidance highlighting display for emphasizing the guidance display for the right-handed game is executed in the third symbol display device 81 until the V switch 650e3 detects the ball. .

On the other hand, in the process of S1605, if it is not the V winning opening opening timing (S1605: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the corresponding winning opening (V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is established (S1610). Specifically, when the open scenario set corresponding to the small winning game is completed, or when a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 in total) have won in the V winning device 650, the closing condition is met. and discriminate.

In the processing of S1610, if it is determined that the condition for closing the corresponding winning opening (V winning opening 650a of V winning device 650) is met (S1610: Yes), the corresponding winning opening (V winning opening of V winning device 650 The port 650a) is closed (S1611), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the condition for closing the corresponding winning opening (V winning opening 650a of V winning device 650) is not satisfied (S1610: No), it is determined whether it is time to start the ending effect (S1612). In the process of S1612, when it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect (S1612: Yes), the ending command is set (S1613), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output processing (S1401) of the main processing (see FIG. 52). It is sent towards device 113 . Upon receiving the ending command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the ending effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1612, when it is determined that it is not the timing to start the ending effect (S1612: No), in the process of S1614, it is determined whether it is the timing to end the ending effect (S1614). In the processing of S1614, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the ending effect (S1614: No), this processing ends.

In the processing of S1614, if it is determined that it is time to end the ending effect (S1614: Yes), it is determined whether the V flag 223i is set to ON (S1615), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S1615: Yes), sets an open scenario based on the jackpot type corresponding to the contents of the V flag 223i, sets the jackpot start flag 203d and the jackpot middle flag 203e to ON (S1617), and sets the V flag 223i to OFF Then (S1618), the V passage flag 203k is set to OFF (S1619), the small hitting medium flag 203g is set to OFF (S1620), and this process is terminated.

<Control Processing Executed by Audio Ramp Control Device 113 in First Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 69. FIG. The processing of the MPU 221 can be broadly classified into startup processing that is started upon power-on and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, referring to FIG. 55, start-up processing executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 55 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S2061). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing (S2118 in FIG. 56) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure"). (S2061). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 56, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main controller 110 (S2115 in FIG. 56: Yes), it executes power-off processing in S2118. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of S2062 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S2062: No), the startup process this time was started after the power was completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurred and the power was shut off in S2118. Either it was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started when only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise (without receiving a power off command from the main controller 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2063).

Destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1406. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed. If data destruction of RAM223 is confirmed (S1403: Yes), it will transfer to S1404 and will start initialization of RAM223. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1403: No), the process proceeds to S1408.

It should be noted that if the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cut). ), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1403: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1404. On the other hand, whether the current start-up processing was started after a momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off processing in S1516 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If the operation is started with the above, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1403: No), and the process proceeds to S1408.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S1402: Yes), the startup process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during execution of the power-off process in S1516, the sound lamp control device 113 It is started by resetting the MPU 221 of . In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is in progress. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S1404 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of S1404, the storage area of the entire range of RAM 223 is checked (S1404). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, read for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined as normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". All storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0 by this read/write check of the RAM 223 .

If it is determined that the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1405: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S1406). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1405: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1407), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. An abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34 . In addition, it is possible to output a sound by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or to transmit an error command to the display control device 114 and display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. can be

In the process of S1408, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1408). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1516 is executed (see S1515 in FIG. 80). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S1516 is executed. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1516 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1408: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1409), and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1410), an interrupt Permission is set (S1411), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110 .

On the other hand, the process of S1408 is reached with the power-off flag turned off because the current start-up process was started after, for example, the power supply was completely shut off. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1408: No), S1409, which is the work area clearing process of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1410, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1410), interrupt permission is set. Then (S1411), the process proceeds to the main process.

The reason why the clearing process of S1409 is skipped is that when the process of S1408 is reached from S1404 via the process of S1406, all storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1404, When only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the audio lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 56, main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after startup processing of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 56 is a flow chart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has passed since the main process was started or after the current process of S2101 was executed (S2101). If not (S2101: No), the process proceeds to S2113 without performing the processes of S2102 to S2112. In the process of S2101, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has elapsed because S2102 to S2112 are mainly processes related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). , S2113 and the variable display setting process of S2114 are preferably executed in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S2113 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed, and by executing the processing of S2114 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing Based on this, it is possible to make settings related to variable production without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S2101 (S2101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S2103 to S2112 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2102 ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S2108 described later (S2103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S2104). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, it is notified that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). will be Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S2105 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S2105, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the pending number display update process is executed (S2106). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player for a predetermined period of time, a setting such as switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to a title screen is performed, and the setting is used as a command for display control. It is sent to device 114 . In the reserved number display update process, a process of lighting a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is performed.

After that, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S2107). This frame button input monitoring/effect processing monitors whether or not the frame buttons 22 and 23 (hereinafter referred to as frame buttons 22) operated by the player in order to enhance the effect of the effect have been pressed. 22 is confirmed, the corresponding effect is set. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 is set in the display control device 114 . The details of this frame button input monitoring/effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing is finished, the lamp editing processing is executed (S2108), and then the sound editing/output processing is executed (S2109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 . In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing of S2109, liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S2110). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110, the time required for the variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 and the time synchronized therewith are set. The lamp editing process of S2108 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. It should be noted that the sound editing/output processing of S2109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Various counter update processes (S2111) are executed after the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S2110). This various counter update processing is processing for updating the values of a plurality of counters of the effect counter 223f provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. That is, in this embodiment, the value of each counter is updated every 1 millisecond in the main processing of the audio ramp control device 113 . Here, a method for updating a plurality of counters held in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described.

In this embodiment, when setting the effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the values of a plurality of counters are referred to. In such a configuration, for example, if the value of all counters is updated by 1 each time various counter updating processes (S2111) are executed, that is, if the updating method of each counter is unified, updating of each counter is In order to avoid the problem that the conditions are synchronized and randomness cannot be imparted to the set effect mode, the updated values of the counters are configured not to be synchronized.

When various counter update processes (S2111) are finished, effect update process (S2112) is next executed. This effect update processing (S2112) is for performing processing for varying the content of the effect currently being executed (already set variable display) during execution of the effect. The details of this rendering update process (S2112) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After effect update processing (S2112), command determination processing for performing processing according to the command received from main controller 110 is performed (S2113). The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the process proceeds to S2114. In the process of S2114, a variable display setting process is executed (S2114). In the variable display setting process, a variable pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to execute the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 . As a result, the command is sent to display controller 114 . The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Then, when the variable display setting process (S2114) is completed, it is determined whether information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the work RAM 233 (S2115). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S2115 (S2115: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S2117), and the power-off processing is executed (S2118). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned off (S2119), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the processing of S2115 (S2115: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S2116), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S2116: No), the process returns to S2101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2116: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes. Here, since the main processing is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change after that. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .

Next, the command determination process (S2113) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a flow chart showing this command determination process (S2113). This command determination process (S2113) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp controller 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main controller 110. . Also, in this process, when a winning information command is received from the main control device 110, the start of the score presentation by the third symbol display device 81 is also determined.

In the command determination process (FIG. 57, S2113), first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and It is determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received (S2201). When the variation pattern command is received (S2201: Yes), the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S2202), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S2203), Return to main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 62) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

On the other hand, if no variation pattern command has been received (S2201: No), then it is determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from main controller 110 (S2204). When the stop type command is received (S2204: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2205), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S2206), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 62) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S2204: No), then it is determined whether or not the pending ball number command has been received from main controller 110 (S2207). Then, when the pending ball number command is received (S2207: Yes), the value included in the received pending ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203b of the main controller 110 (special The holding frequency N1 of the variable display in the symbol is extracted and stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 (S2208). In addition, in the processing of S2208, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is set. After the process of S2208 ends, the process returns to the main process.

Here, the special figure 1 reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) or when a special symbol lottery is performed. Therefore, each time a start winning prize is detected or a special symbol lottery is performed, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed to the special symbol of the main controller 110 by the processing of S2208. It is possible to match the value of the symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, when the start winning is detected Or, when a special symbol is drawn, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b of the main controller 110.例文帳に追加Incidentally, when the process of S2208 is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is set. As a result, in the display control device 114 , the reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the reserved ball number is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In the process of S2207, if the command for the number of reserved balls has not been received (S2207: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2207). If it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S2209: Yes), the winning information based on the received winning information command is stored in the winning information storage area 223a (S2210), and the winning information related process is executed (S2211). ).

Here, the contents of the winning information related process (S2211) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a flow chart showing the details of the winning information related process (S2211). This winning information related process (S2211) is for determining whether or not to execute the scoring effect based on the winning information (variation type) included in the winning information command received this time and the current gaming situation. process is executed.

When the winning information related process (S2211) is executed, first, the information of the received winning information command is stored in the corresponding winning information storage area 223a (S2301), and the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is read ( S2302). Then, it is determined whether the value read in the process of S2302 is 2 or more (S2303), and if it is determined to be 2 or more (S2303: Yes), then the effect prohibition flag 223j is set to ON. (S2304). In the process of S2304, if it is determined that the effect prohibition flag 223j is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S2304: Yes), the process proceeds to S2305, and whether or not to execute the score effect judgment processing is performed.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2303 described above, if it is determined that the read counter value is less than 2 (S2303: No), or if it is determined that the effect prohibition flag 223j is set to ON in the processing of S2304 ( S2304: Yes) skips the process of determining whether or not to execute a score effect, and proceeds to the process of S2314, which will be described later.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the winning information related process (S2211), the score presentation can be executed only when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (two). Therefore, it is possible to reliably perform the score presentation across the predetermined number (two) or more of the variable displays, so that the presentation effect can be enhanced.

In addition, when the effect prohibition flag 223j is set to ON, that is, when the score effect is already being executed, since it is configured so that a new score effect is not set, the score effect being executed is finally executed. can be provided to the player.

Next, the processing (S2305 to S2313) for setting the score effects will be described. In the process of S2305, the first score effect selection table 222b is read (S2305). Next, the first score effect selection table 222b is referenced using the variation type included in the winning information command received this time, the current number of balls on hold, and the value of the acquired effect lottery counter 223f1 to determine the execution of the score effect. The presence/absence and the effect mode of the score effect to be executed are determined (S2306), and it is determined whether or not to execute the score effect (S2307).

In the process of S2307, if it is determined that the score effect is to be executed (S2307: Yes), the effect type flag 223n is updated according to the effect type (score effect A to C) selected in the process of S2306 (S2308), A total given score setting process for setting the score to be given in this score presentation is executed (S2309). Here, the contents of the total given score setting process (S2309) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is a flow chart showing the contents of the total given score setting process (S2309).

When the total given score setting process is executed, first, the total given score selection table 222d is read out (S2401), and the variation type, the current number of pending balls, and the effect type flag 223n included in the winning information command received this time are displayed. (score effects A to C) indicated by and the value of the obtained score allocation effect counter (not shown) is used to refer to the total given score selection table 222d and select the given score (S2402 ). Then, the selected assigned score is stored in the total assigned score storage area 223o (S2403), and this processing is terminated.

In this embodiment, as described above, when it is determined that the score effect is to be executed, the total number of points (upper limit) to be given in the current score effect is determined in advance, and each variable display performed during the score effect is displayed. When setting, the number of points to be displayed is determined such that the determined total number of points is the upper limit, and the content of the effect of each variable display is set. By configuring in this way, only the final display mode (final display score number) of the score presentation can be determined in advance, and the score number displayed in each variable display can be set for each variable display. It is possible to diversify the performance mode executed during the performance.

In addition, the method of setting the number of points displayed during the score effect is not limited to the contents described above. upper limit) and the number of points to be displayed in each variable display executed during the score presentation may be determined in advance. In addition, as in the above-described embodiment, only the total number of points (upper limit) to be given in the score effect this time is predetermined, and among the plurality of variable displays executed during the score effect, all but the last variable display are displayed. The variable display of determines the number of points to be given regardless of the total number of points (upper limit) set, and when setting the final variable display, the total number of points displayed is the predetermined total number of points ( It may be configured to increase or decrease the value so as to reach the upper limit value).

Returning to FIG. 58, the description continues. When the continuous notice given score setting process (S2309) is completed, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is read (S2310), the read counter value is set as the value of the effect variation counter 223m (S2311), and this time read The notification target information is set in the winning prize information storage area 223a corresponding to the winning prize information command (S2312), the effect prohibition flag 223j is set to ON (S2313), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2303, when it is determined that the read counter value (the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b) is less than 2 (S2303), the effect prohibition flag 223j is set to ON in the processing of S2304. (S2304: Yes), or if it is determined in the processing of S2307 that the score effect is not to be executed (S2307: No), the processing proceeds to S2314, and is included in the winning information command received this time. It is determined whether the variation type is super reach or higher (super reach or special reach) (S2314).

In the process of S2314, when it is determined that the super reach or more is reached (S2314: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S2310 described above, the processes of S2310 to S2313 are executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the super reach or more (S2314: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

Here, the processing of S2314 will be described. In the present embodiment, as described above, there is provided a restriction condition (the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the setting status of the effect prohibition flag 223j) that limits the setting of the score effect. Also, even if the limiting condition is not met, the result of referring to the first scoring effect selection table 222b may result in the selection of the determination result that the scoring effect is not executed. In such a case, if the variation type included in the received winning information command is longer than the predetermined period (80 seconds or longer), winning information corresponding to the long variation in which the score effect is not executed is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area. will be stored.

In such a state, when the next winning information command is received and a scoring effect is set based on the winning information included in the received winning information command, a predetermined score effect is executed while the set scoring effect is being executed. There is a problem that the variable display is executed for a period of time (80 seconds or more), and the score presentation is delayed. In addition, for example, if the winning information for which the score effect is not set includes the variation type of the super reach a, a big hit will occur while the score effect is being executed, and the effect of the score effect will be reduced. I had a problem letting it go.

To deal with such a problem, in the present embodiment, even if the winning information does not set the score effect, if the predetermined condition (variation type is super reach or higher) is established, the value of the effect change counter 223m is changed. while the prize information that satisfies a predetermined condition (variation type is super reach or higher) is stored in the prize information storage area 223a. is configured so that a new scoring effect is not set. As a result, it is possible to enhance the performance effect of the score performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the variation type is a normal reach hit, ie, a big hit with a short variation time, the setting of the score effect is not prohibited. By configuring in this way, a big hit can be generated while the score effect is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect.

Returning to FIG. 57, the description continues. In the processing of S2209, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S2209: No), then it is determined whether or not a win-related command has been received (S2212). When it is determined (S2212: Yes), hit-related processing is executed (S2213), and this processing ends. This winning-related process (S2213) is for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute the effect display corresponding to the big winning game or the small winning game which is executed when the big winning or the small winning is won as a result of the lottery of the special symbols. , and processing corresponding to various commands sent from the main controller 110 when a big win or a small win is won is executed.

Here, the contents of the win-related processing (S2213) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a flow chart showing the contents of the win-related processing. When this hit related process (S2213) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot start command is received (S2501). When it is determined that a jackpot start command has been received (S2501: Yes), a display jackpot start command is set (S2502), and this process ends. The display jackpot start command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and executed by the MPU 221 in the command output processing (S2102) of the main processing (see FIG. 56). It is transmitted toward the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display jackpot start command, the display control device 114 displays an effect suggesting the start of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81 .

On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S2501: No), then it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (S2503). In the process of S2503, if it is determined that the round number command has been received (S2503: Yes), the display round number command is set based on the round number (S2504), and this process ends. In this embodiment, information indicating the number of rounds is transmitted from the main controller 110 as the number-of-rounds command. In order to reduce the amount of command data to be transmitted from the control device 110, when information for indicating that a new round has started is transmitted from the main control device 110 as a round update command, an audio lamp control device The RAM 223 of 113 is provided with a round number accumulation counter for accumulating the number of received round update commands when a round update command is received. It may be configured to calculate the number and set the number-of-rounds command for display.

In the processing of S2503, if it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S2503: No), then it is determined whether or not the jackpot end command has been received (S2505). In the processing of S2505, when it is determined that the jackpot end command is received (S2505: Yes), the jackpot end command for display is set (S2506), and this processing ends.

In the process of S2505, when it is determined that the big hit end command is not received (S2505: No), it is determined whether or not the small hit start command is received (S2507).

In the process of S2507, when it is determined that the small winning start command is received (S2507: Yes), the small winning start command for display is set based on the small winning type (S2507), and this processing ends.

In the process of S2507, when it is determined that the small hit start command is not received (S2507: No), it is determined whether or not the small hit end command is received (S2509). In the process of S2509, when it is determined that the small hit end command is received (S2509: Yes), in order to execute the effect suggesting the end of the small hit game, set the small hit end command for display (S2510), End this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S2509, if it is determined that the small winning end command has not been received (S2509: No), it is determined whether or not the V entrance passage command has been received (S2511). In the processing of S2511, if it is determined that the V entrance passage command has been received (S2511: Yes), the display V entrance passage command is set (S2512), and this processing ends. If it is determined in the process of S2511 that the V entrance pass command has not been received (S2511: No), then it is determined whether or not the V pass command has been received (S2513).

In the process of S2513, if it is determined that the V passing command has been received (S2513: Yes), the display V effect command for indicating the effect based on the ball entering the V switch 650e3 of the V winning device 650 is set ( S2514), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2513 that the V passage command has not been received (S2513: No), then it is determined whether or not an instruction command has been received (S2515). If it is determined in the process of S2515 that an instruction command has been received (S2515; Yes), the display instruction command is set (S2516), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the instruction command has not been received (S2515: No), this processing ends.

In this embodiment, a small winning game is executed by opening the opening/closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 12 times during the small winning game. is configured to output an instruction command when the ball is not detected (see S1609 in FIG. 54). When it is determined that this instruction command has been received, the third symbol display device 81 displays an emphasized guidance display mode (see FIG. 19(a)) for emphasizing that the V winning device 650 will win the ball. Set the display instruction command for

Then, when the ball is detected by the V switch 650e3 in a state in which the highlight guidance display mode is displayed, as shown in FIG. Set command. That is, in the present embodiment, if the small winning game is executed and the opening operation of the V winning device 650 is executed, the ball is surely won by the V winning device 650 by performing the right-handed game. In addition, the ball that wins the V winning device 650 during the small winning game is configured to flow down to the special discharge channel 650e2 provided with the V switch 650e3. Despite this configuration, when it is determined that the V switch 650e3 has not detected the ball at the fifth opening timing of the open/close door 650f1, when the small winning game is started, the third symbol The player is playing a left-handed game without noticing the guidance display area Dm2 (see FIG. 10(b)) of the display device 81 for guiding the right-handed player. Alternatively, it is conceivable that the game has been stopped.

In such a case, it is possible to make the player more likely to play the right-handed game by changing the display that guides the right-handed hit displayed in the guidance display area Dm2 to a more emphasized display. Furthermore, as the timing for displaying the emphasized guidance display mode (see FIG. 19(a)), when the right-handed game is performed after the emphasized guidance display mode is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, in the right-handed game The timing is such that the shot ball reaches the V winning device 650 during the small winning game. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a player who has executed a right-handed game according to the display of the emphasis guide display mode cannot cause the ball to flow down to the special discharge channel 650e2 during the small winning game.

Returning to FIG. 57, the description continues. In the processing of S2212, if it is determined that the win-related command has not been received (S2212: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop command has been received (S2214). When it is determined that the stop command has been received (S2214: Yes), the stop command process is executed (S2215), the stop display of the third symbol is set (S2216), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop command has not been received (S2214: No), it executes processing according to other commands (S2217), and terminates this processing.

Here, the contents of the stop command processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the contents of stop command processing. This stop command processing, when receiving a stop command from the main control device 110, that is, to execute various processing at the timing of stopping the special symbol, in the present embodiment, the continuous management processing of the score effect being executed, , when ending the score presentation, a determination process is executed for newly executing the score presentation.

When the stop command process (S2215) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the effect prohibition release flag 223k is set to ON (S2601). If it is determined in the process of S2601 that it is not set to ON (is set to OFF) (S2601: No), that is, if the score effect is not being executed at the present time, or it is not the final change of the score effect. If so, this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the effect prohibition release flag 223k is set to ON (S2601: Yes), the effect prohibition flag 223j and the effect prohibition release flag 223k are set to OFF (S2602), and then the special symbol 1 is reserved. The value of the ball number counter 223b is read (S2603), and it is determined whether the read counter value is 2 or more (S2604). In the processing of S2604, when it is determined that the counter value is 2 or more (S2604: Yes), the winning prize information is read from the winning prize information storage area corresponding to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter of 2 or more (S2605). , reads out the second score effect selection table 222c (S2606), and determines whether or not the score effect corresponding to the target variation type can be executed (S2607).

Then, the determination result of S2607 is determined (S2608), and if it is determined to execute the score effect (S2608: Yes), the effect type flag 223n is updated according to the effect type (score effect A to C) to be executed ( S2609), the same total given score setting process (S2610 (S2309)) as the winning information related process (FIG. 58) described above is executed. It should be noted that detailed description of the total given score setting process (see FIG. 59) will be omitted here.

When the total given score setting process (S2610 (S2309)) is finished, the value of the target special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is read out (S2611), and the read counter value is set as the value of the production variation counter 223m. Then, the effect target information is set in the winning prize information storage area 223a corresponding to the target winning command (S2613), the effect prohibition flag 223j is set to ON, and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2604, if it is determined that the value of the read special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is less than 2 (S2604: No), in the processing of S2608, if it is determined that the score effect is not executed (S2608 : No), the process proceeds to S2615, and it is determined whether winning information including variation types of super reach or higher is stored (S2615). In the process of S2615, if it is determined that there is winning information including the variation type of super reach or higher (S2615), the processes of S2611 to S2614 described above are executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning information including the variation type of super reach or higher is not stored (S2615: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

Next, the variable display setting process (S2114) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a flow chart showing this variable display setting process (S2114). This variable display setting process (S2114) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. In order to execute the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, Based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set.

In the variable display setting process, first, it is determined whether the variable start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S2701). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S2701: No), it means that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process proceeds to S2707. do. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is ON (S2701: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is set to OFF (S2702). The variation pattern type in the variation performance extracted from the pattern command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2703).

Then, based on the obtained variation pattern type, the effect setting process for setting the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S2704), and then the display variation for notifying the display control device 114 The pattern command is generated based on the acquired variation pattern type and the score effect mode set in the effect setting process, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2705). In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third pattern display device 81 performs the variation display of the third pattern in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command, Display control of the variable effect is started. When the process of S2705 is completed, the data in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S2706), and the process proceeds to S2707.

Here, the contents of the effect setting process (S2704) executed in the process of S2704 will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64. FIG. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect setting process (S2704), and FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the contents of the score giving effect setting process (S2803) executed in the effect setting process (S2704). be. In this effect setting process (S2704), when the score effect is set in the winning information related process (see S2211 in FIG. 58) or the stop command process (see S2215 in FIG. 61), the current variable display setting process (see 62 S2114) is a process for setting the score effect (given score) of the variation pattern set.

When the effect setting process (S2704) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the effect change number counter 223m is greater than 0, ie, whether the score effect is being executed (S2801). If it is determined that the value of the effect variation counter 223m is greater than 0 (S2801: Yes), then it is determined whether the effect type flag 223n is set to the score effect (S2802). In the process of S2802, when it is determined that the effect type is set (S2802: Yes), the score giving effect setting process is executed (S2803), and this process ends. The content of the score giving effect setting process (S2803) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S2802, if it is determined that the effect type is not set in the effect type flag 223n (S2802: No), that is, in the winning information related process (S2211 in FIG. 58), a new point effect is set without setting the score effect. If a period for prohibiting the setting of the score effect is provided (S2314: Yes processing is executed), the process ends by skipping the score giving effect setting process (S2803).

On the other hand, in the process of S2801, if it is determined that the value of the effect variation counter 223m is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S2801: No), a variation pattern without score effect is determined (S2804 ), and then it is determined whether or not the effect prohibition flag 223j is set to ON (S2805). When it is determined that the effect prohibition flag 223j is set to ON in the process of S2805 (S2805: Yes), that is, when it is time to set the variable display after the point effect is completed, the effect prohibition release flag is displayed. 223k is set to ON (S2806), the value of the given score counter 223p is cleared (S2087), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the effect prohibition flag 223j is set to OFF (S2805: No), the processing of S2806 and S2807 is skipped and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 64, the content of the score giving effect setting process (S2803) executed in the effect setting process (S2704 in FIG. 63) will be described. FIG. 64 is a flow chart showing the contents of the score giving effect setting process. In this score giving effect setting process (S2803), the score given to each variable display during the score effect is set up to the total given score set when it is determined that the score effect is to be executed, and the score effect is executed. A process to be set according to the number of residual fluctuations to be performed is executed.

When this score giving effect setting process (S2803) is executed, first, the value of the given score counter 223p, that is, the number of points already given (displayed) in the current score effect is read out (S2901), and then the total given The value stored in the score storage area 223o, that is, the total number of points to be given in the current score presentation is read out (S2902). Then, the difference between the value of the total given score storage area 223o and the value of the given score counter 223p is calculated (S2903), and the remaining points that can be given in the current score presentation are calculated.

When the processing of S2903 is finished, it is next determined whether the value of the effect variation counter 223m is 1 (S2904), and if it is determined that it is not 1 (S2904: No), that is, the current variation is the score effect If it is determined that it is not the final variation, the calculated difference and the value of the production variation number counter 223m are used so as not to give (display) all the remaining scores in this variation display, and the given score selection table 222e , to select a score to be given in this variable display (S2905), and determine a variation pattern accompanied by a score effect corresponding to the selected score (given score) (S2906).

Then, the assigned score selected this time is added to the value of the assigned score counter 223p (S2907), the value of the performance variation counter 223m is subtracted by 1 (S2908), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S2904, if it is determined that the value of the effect variation counter 223m is 1 (S2904: Yes), that is, if it is determined that the current variation display is the final variation of the score effect, S2903 In order to display all the differences calculated in the process, a variation pattern with a score effect corresponding to the calculated difference is determined (S2909), and the value corresponding to the calculated difference is added to the value of the given score counter ( S2910).

Next, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern determined this time includes an operation score effect in which the player operates the frame button 22 to display the score (S2911), and it is determined that the operation score effect is included. If so (S2911: Yes), the operation score execution flag 223q is set to ON (S2912), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2911, if it is determined that the operation score effect is not included (S2911: No), the process of S2912 is skipped and the process ends.

By using the score giving effect setting process (S2803) configured in this way, when it is determined that the scoring effect is to be executed, only the total score to be given during the current scoring effect is used as the winning prize information to be the target of the score effect. Only by setting in advance based on the above, it is possible to execute various score presentations for each variable display executed during the period until the variable display corresponding to the prize winning information to be targeted is executed. In addition, even if various points are given (displayed) by each variable display executed during the period until the variable display corresponding to the target winning information is executed, the fluctuation corresponding to the target winning information In the display (variation display that is the final change in the score effect), it is possible to display the difference obtained by subtracting the already displayed (given) score from the total score given in the crying score effect, so it is subject The result of the score presentation can be displayed in a display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the winning information, and the presentation effect can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 65, the contents of the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S2107) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 56) of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 65 is a flow chart showing frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S2107). In this frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S2107), processing for displaying the effect corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 at each timing on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

Also, when the operation score effect is set in the score effect, the given score monitoring process is executed when the score given (displayed) changes based on the operation content of the frame button 22 . Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, when it is determined that the score effect is to be executed, the total number of points to be given in the current score effect is determined, and each time each variable display during the score effect is executed, It is configured to execute an effect (score effect) corresponding to each variable display while determining the score to be played. When the operation score effect is selected as the score effect, the score that can be given in the operation score effect, that is, the score that is given when the frame button 22 is appropriately operated when the operation score effect is executed. is set as the score to be displayed in this variable display, the number of remaining scores that can be displayed during the score presentation is managed.

Therefore, when the player participates in the operation score presentation and obtains the score, there is no contradiction between the content of management of the remaining score and the actually displayed score (acquired by the player). On the other hand, if the player does not participate in the operation score effect, there will be a contradiction between the content of management of the remaining score and the score actually displayed (acquired by the player). On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the player has appropriately operated the frame button 22 during the operation score presentation, and based on the determination result, the score to be displayed is determined, and the determination result is displayed. It is configured to execute a process of correcting the management content of the remaining score based on.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S2107) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not pressing of the frame button 22 is detected (S3001). End this process. If it is determined that the pressing of the frame button 22 has been detected (S3001: Yes), then it is determined whether the current time (the timing at which the frame button 22 was pressed) is during the scoring operation effect period (S3002). Here, determination is executed based on the variable time information that is always managed in the liquid crystal effect execution management process (see S2110 in FIG. 56).

In the processing of S3002, if it is determined that the current point manipulation presentation period is in effect, the operation complete flag 223r is set to ON (S3003), the display press command corresponding to the button press is set (S3004), and this End the process. Here, if the operation completion flag 223r is not set to ON, in the effect update process (S2112 in FIG. 56), the process of changing the effect content of the variable display being executed is executed.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3002, if it is determined that the current time is not the score manipulation effect period (S3002: No), based on the time information managed in the liquid crystal effect execution management process (see S2110 in FIG. It is determined whether the timing at which the button 22 is operated is within any operation effective period for validly determining the operation of the frame button 22 (S3005). A display press-down command is set according to the operation valid period (S3004), and if it is determined that the operation valid period is not reached (S3006: No), this processing ends.

Next, the contents of the rendering update process (S2112) executed in the main process (see FIG. 56) of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 is a flow chart showing the details of the rendering update process (S2112). In this effect update process (S2112), in the operation score effect executed during the score effect, the content of the already set variation pattern is changed based on whether or not the player has operated the frame button 22. Processing is performed.

When the effect update process (S2112) is executed, first. It is determined whether or not the operation score execution flag 223q is set to ON (S3101), and if it is determined that the operation score execution flag 223q is not set to ON (S3101: No), this processing is terminated. If it is determined that it is being executed (S3101: Yes), it is determined whether the present timing is the end timing of the operation score presentation (S3102). Here, based on the time information managed in the liquid crystal effect execution management process (see S2110 in FIG. 56), it is determined whether the current timing is the end timing of the operation score effect.

In the processing of S3102, if it is determined that it is not the end timing (S3102: No), this processing is terminated as it is. It is determined whether it is on (S3103), and if it is determined that it is not on (it is off) (S3103: No), this processing is terminated as it is, and if it is determined that it is on (S3103: Yes) That is, when it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been operated even though the end timing of the operation score presentation has arrived, the points to be given in the operation score presentation are extracted (S3104), and the extracted points are given. The score is subtracted from the value of the given score counter 223p (S3105), and it is determined whether the current value of the effect variation counter 223m is 0 (S3106).

If it is determined in the processing of S3106 that the value of the performance variation counter 223m is not 0 (S3106: No), that is, if it is determined that the final variation of the score rendering is not currently in progress, this processing is terminated. . In this case, when setting the next variable display, the score effect is set based on the value of the given score counter 223p subtracted in the process of S3105. The rest of the scoring effects can be executed in correspondence.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3106, if it is determined that the value of the effect variation counter 223m is 0 (S3106: Yes), that is, if it is determined that the current point effect is in the final variation, In order to correct the number of points to be given during the remaining period of the variable display, effect correction processing is executed (S3107), and this processing ends.

Here, the contents of the effect correction process (S3107) executed in the effect update process (S2112 in FIG. 66) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 is a flow chart showing the details of the effect correction process (S3107). In this effect correction process (S3107), when there is no operation to the frame button 22 for the operation score effect, the score not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (not given to the player) is executed later. A correction process is executed to finally give to the player by varying the effect mode to be performed.

In this embodiment, the score to be given in the rest of the score presentation is predetermined on the premise that the player operates the frame button 22 in the operation score presentation and the score is given. With this configuration, when the frame button 22 is appropriately operated during the operation score effect, the predetermined score effect is executed as it is. Therefore, it is not necessary to set or change the contents of the presentation while the score presentation is being executed, and the processing load can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, since the player tends to operate the frame button 22 during the operation score effect, it is possible to display (provide) the score during the operation score effect by changing the effect mode of the preset score effect. It is set on the premise that the chances of changing the production mode during the variable display are reduced, but without being limited to this, the score is displayed during the score production by operating the production mode of the score production that is set in advance ( It may be set on the premise that it will not be granted. In this case, for example, it is preferable to inform the player that the operation score presentation is being executed in such a manner that it is difficult for the player to notice it.

Alternatively, the performance mode may be set based on the performance result of the operation score presentation after the operation score presentation is completed without presetting the presentation mode after the operation score presentation, or during the operation score presentation. The operation result of whether or not the player has operated the frame button 22 is determined for a predetermined period (for example, the period from when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on until it is turned off, or when the same player is playing a game). A storage means is provided for storing the period during which identification information for specifying an individual is input), and the setting method of the presentation mode is varied based on the operation result stored in the storage means. may be configured.

When the effect correction process (S3107) is executed, first, the difference between the value of the given score counter 223p after subtraction and the value stored in the total given score storage area 223o is calculated (S3201), and the remaining effects are calculated. Calculate the score to be given in the period. Next, it is determined whether or not the period during which the operation score effect was executed is the first notice period (see FIG. 11) (S3202).

In the process of S3202, if it is determined that it is the first notice period (S3202: Yes), the effect corresponding to the calculated difference is set as the rewrite effect for the second notice period (S3203), and the set rewrite effect corresponds. A display rewrite effect command is set (S3204), other execution management processing is executed (S3205), and this processing ends. By configuring in this way, when a score giving effect is set in which the operation score effect is executed during the first notice period, it is executed during the second notice period set after the first notice period. By varying the effect mode of the effect executed in the score giving effect, the score not displayed (given) during the operation score effect can be added.

As a result, it is possible to display the same number of points during the notice period as the number of points set in advance during the notice period (the number of points displayed in the first notice period and the second notice period). Thus, the ready-to-win performance can be executed while making the players expect that if the frame button 22 is operated in the operation score performance, more points can be obtained, and the expectation for the game can be heightened.

Here, as the rewriting effect during the second notice period, there is a effect in which only the number of points given using the same effect mode is changed, and a effect in which the effect mode to be executed is changed. It may be appropriately set according to the score not displayed in the effect (difference score calculated in the process of S3201) and the length of the second notice period.

On the other hand, in the process of S3202, if it is determined that the current time is not the second notice period (S3202: No), the effect mode during the reach period during which the reach effect is executed is varied instead of the notice period in the variable display. reach state correction processing (S3206), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the content of the reach state correction process (S3206) will be described. FIG. 67 is a flow chart showing the contents of the reach mode correction process (S3206). In this reach state correction processing (S3206), processing for setting the reach state to be executed based on the lottery result of the variable display and the current gauge amount is performed.

When the reach state correction process (S3206) is executed, first, the current gauge amount is calculated based on the value of the total given score storage area 223o (S3301), (S3302). If it is determined to be a hit variation (S3302: Yes), then it is determined whether the current gauge amount is less than 3 (S3303), and if it is determined to be less than 3 (S3303: Yes), As the mode of the first ready-to-reach period, set the rewriting first ready-to-reach effect of the mode with the scoring effect where the gauge amount is 5 (S3304), and then set the mission ready-to-win as the rewriting ready-to-reach mode of the second ready-to-reach period (S3305). ), then various display rewrite effect commands are set (S3306), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S3303, if it is determined that the current gauge amount is not less than 3 (3 or more) (S3303: No), it is determined whether the current gauge amount is 1 or more (S3307), If it is determined to be 1 or more (S3307: Yes), as the aspect of the first reach period, a rewriting first reach effect with a score effect in which the gauge amount is 6 is set (S3308), and the process of S3306 is performed. Move to In the process of S3307, if it is determined that it is not 1 or more (is 0) (S3307: No), a special reach effect corresponding to the reach period that is the sum of the first reach period and the second reach period is set ( S3309), the process proceeds to S3306, and this process ends.

Also, in the processing of S3302, if it is determined that the current variation is not a win variation (a loss variation), a loss correction process (S3310) is executed, and this processing ends. This loss correction process (S3310) is a process for setting a ready-to-win effect in order to prevent the player from unnecessarily expecting a big win when the winning result is a loss. A process for correcting the gauge amount to be played and the effect mode of the ready-to-win effect is executed.

Here, the content of the deviation correction process (S3310) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 69 is a flow chart showing the details of the deviation correction process (S3310). When the deviation correction process (S3310) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current gauge amount is less than 3 (S3401). exit. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number is 3 or more, a rewrite first ready-to-win effect is set as a mode of the first ready-to-reach period with a score giving effect in which the gauge amount is in the range of 0 to 2 (S3402), and then, Mission reach is set as the rewrite reach mode of the second reach period (S3403), various display rewrite effect commands are set (S3404), and this processing ends.

<Regarding control processing executed by the display control device in the first control processing example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 70 to 87. FIG. The processing of the MPU 231 can be broadly classified into main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and processing for one frame from the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 and execute the V interrupt process.

First, with reference to FIG. 70, main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 70 is a flow chart showing this main process. The main processing is to execute initialization processing when the power is turned on.

Activation of this main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" and , the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. FIG. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 . Then, the MPU 231 fetches the received instruction code from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

Here, if all the boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND type flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the NOR ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Since it is a memory from which data can be read, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S4001), and the display control device 114 is operated so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. to start.

Here, the boot processing (S4001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing boot processing (S4001) executed in the main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. FIG.

As described above, in this embodiment, the control program and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional game machines. The character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed is stored. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND-type flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, especially when performing random access. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM and the data table. A process of transferring and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is canceled is executed. Of the control programs stored in the 2-program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S4101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the top address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S4102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the rest of the boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S4101.

By setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S4102, the MPU 231 can execute various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processing. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

After the command pointer 231a is set by the process of S4102, the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set command pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. Of the control programs stored, the remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b (S4103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S4104), the command pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot process (see S4001 in FIG. 70) is completed. By setting the top address of the program corresponding to the initializing process (see S4002 in FIG. 70) (S4105), the execution of the boot program is finished, and the boot process ends.

By executing the boot process (S4001) in this way, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the work RAM 233, which is composed entirely of DRAM. It is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processing is executed using

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a whose read speed is slow, the control program and fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect part.

On the other hand, without storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the rest of the boot program is stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a. , the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 71, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S4101 includes all remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. may be part of As for the boot program transferred here, a predetermined amount of the control program including all remaining boot programs is transferred to the program storage area 233a. 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S4103 to S4105 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S4101 transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the beginning of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing is further transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount of part of the remaining boot program, and subsequently stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a, and then the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set in the command pointer 231a in step S4101. and the processing of S4102 may be repeated a plurality of times, and then the processing of S4103 to S4105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the rest of the boot program not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at once, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. Using the boot program, a predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first program storage area 234d1 has been described as having a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released. It may be stored in the 1-program storage area 234d1. In this case, the MPU 231 may perform the processes of S4103 to S4105 without performing the processes of S4101 and S4102 after starting the boot process. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, more quickly.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S4002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the registers in the MPU 231 and the I/O device. In addition, processing for clearing the memory of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the image controller 237 is initialized, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. and instruct execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be a different color according to the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, it is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to easily and immediately judge whether or not the activation can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S4003). This transfer instruction contains the leading and trailing addresses of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating transfer end to the MPU 231 . By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or in a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. The MPU 231 reads information from this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby ascertaining that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S4003, then the power-on variation image is transferred. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to . This transfer instruction contains the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, the data size of the image data, and information on the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235). , and the head address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination. It is transferred to the change image area 235b when the power is turned on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S4004, then the simple image display flag 233c is set. is turned on (S4005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 85(a)), which will be described later. Resident image transfer setting processing is executed to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image (see S6302 in FIG. 85A).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. Remains on until terminated. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 72(b)) during that time, the power-on main image and the power-on variation image (not shown), which are the images when the power is turned on, are drawn in a simple manner. Command determination processing (see S4308 in FIG. 72B) and simple display setting processing (see S4309 in FIG. 72B) are executed.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234. Due to its slow read speed, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Therefore, as in this main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is transferred to the third image. By displaying it on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player and the people involved in the hall can see the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 114 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed, so that the rest of the resident video RAM 235 can be resident. It is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped while the image data to be processed is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 .

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to prevent deterioration of the operation check efficiency by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234. FIG.

In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the power-on main image is the third symbol. When the player starts the game while the display is displayed on the display device 81, a ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), and an instruction to start the variable effect is given by the main controller 110 under voice lamp control. When it is received via the device 113, that is, when a display variation pattern command is received, a power-on variation image (not shown) is immediately displayed during the variation performance period, and a simple variation performance is performed. be able to. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the third symbol display device 81 continues to display the main image when the power is turned on. is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, it takes a long time to transfer the data. However, in this pachinko machine 10, since it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after the power is restored, Immediately after the power is turned on, even while the main image is being displayed, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the processing of S4005, interrupt permission is set (S4006), and thereafter the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S4006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 72(a). FIG. 72(a) is a flow chart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes command interrupt processing.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S4201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing or simple command determination processing of V interrupt processing to be described later, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 72(b). FIG. 72(b) is a flow chart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 38) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

As described above, this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 237 and sent to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 72(b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4301). If it is off (S4301: No), it means that the transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, command determination processing (S4302) is executed, and then display setting processing (S4303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S4302), the content of the command from the sound lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demonstration display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processed. This is because command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when V interrupt processing is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when main controller 110 decides to start a variable effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly comprehend the mode and stop type of the variable performance selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113, and generate a performance image corresponding to the mode. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . The details of this command interrupt processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 73 to 81. FIG.

In the display setting process (S4303), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S4302), etc., the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 is displayed. specifically identify the content of In addition, depending on the status of processing, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After the display setting process is executed, task processing is executed (S4304). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S4303) or the simple display setting processing (S4309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters required for drawing such as the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S4305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 is caused to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236 a of the video RAM 236 , even when a continuous notice command or a back image change command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 , the image controller 237 receives a score. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview images used in the effect and the image data of the rear image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. FIG. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86. FIG.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S4306). In this drawing process, based on the types of sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S4304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S4305), , generates the drawing list shown in FIG. 38, and transmits the drawing list to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the rendering process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S4307). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S4307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when reception of the stop type command for display is detected, the stop type indicated by the stop type command for display (jackpot A to D, front and back reach, reach other than front and back, complete loss, chance eye ) is compared with the stop type counter, and the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the process of S4301, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S4301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image (see FIG. 34) on the third pattern display device 81, a simple command determination process (S4308) is executed, then a simple display setting process (S4309) is executed, and S4304 is executed. Go to processing.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 73 to 81, the details of the command determination process (S4302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 73 is a flow chart showing this command determination processing.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 73, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S4401). After completing the command determination process, the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S4401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S4303) that the new command has been processed is set to ON (S4402). All unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed for their command types (S4403).

Then, among the unprocessed commands, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command (S4404), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S4404: Yes), the variation pattern command process is executed. (S4405) and returns to the processing of S4401.

Details of the variation pattern command process (S4405) will now be described with reference to FIG. 74(a). FIG. 74(a) is a flow chart showing variation pattern command processing. In this variation pattern command processing, processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 114 is executed.

In the variation pattern command process, first, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set in the buffer 233d (S4501).

Here, since the main controller 110 always determines the start of variation at a time interval of several seconds or more, it does not receive two or more display variation pattern commands within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly used for display. There is a possibility that it will be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S4501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is displayed. is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main control device will actually produce a variation effect with a shorter variation time than the set display data table. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation performance according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, the variation display data table actually has a longer variation than the set display data table. Even if the variable effect with time is instructed by main controller 110, after the variable effect according to display data table buffer 233d is completed, main controller 110 will send the next display for display, as will be described later. Since the display of the third pattern display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the third pattern display on the third pattern display device 81 without any discomfort. 3 You can continue to see the variation of the pattern.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S4501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4502). Then, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S4501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S4503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4504). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S4505), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S4504, the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S4501 , extracts the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and specifies the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81. At the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e The transfer data information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set to 1, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is stored in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. image storage area 236a.

Further, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h to which the time data is set by the process of S4503 is used to measure the time of the variable presentation specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable presentation in the variable display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type command for display from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the processing of S4404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S4404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command in the unprocessed commands (S4406), If there is a display variation type command (S4406: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S4407), and the process returns to S4401.

Details of the stop type command process (S4407) will now be described with reference to FIG. 74(b). FIG. 74(b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 114 .

In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information indicated by the stop type command for display (jackpot A, jackpot B, front-rear loss reach, reach other than front-rear loss, complete loss, or chance number) is determined (S4601), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 72(b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device Finally, the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed in 81 is set (S4602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S4602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is turned off. (S4603), the stop type command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has passed since the variation based on the data table is started. , offset information (design offset information) from the stop design set by the processing of S4602. In the above-described task processing (S4304), after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variation, the stop design set by the processing of S4602 is specified from the stop design determination flag set by S4603, and the specified stop By adding the design offset information acquired by the display setting process to the design, the third design to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third pattern is stored is specified. Image data corresponding to the third design is stored in the third design area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

As described above, in this embodiment, the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed. Image data required for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236 . Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness of drawing in the third pattern display device 81 can be kept high.

It should be noted that since the main controller 110 always determines the start of fluctuation at a time interval of several seconds or more, two or more stop type commands for display are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore command determination processing is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the processing of S4601, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more stop type commands for display are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out, and the stop type Decide on a table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss is set by the processing of S4602.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 displays the "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is out". A stop pattern corresponding to the "big win" is displayed, and the player is misled into thinking that the pachinko machine 10 has "a special pattern big win", and there is a risk of degrading the reliability of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss, in fact, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the third symbol display device 81 stops the complete loss. Even if the symbols are displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "jackpot of special symbols", so that the player can be pleased.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S4406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S4406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S4408). If there is an image change command (S4408: Yes), back image change command processing is executed (S4409), and the process returns to S4401.

Details of the rear image change command process (S4409) will be described with reference to FIG. 75(a). FIG. 75(a) is a flow chart showing back image change command processing. The back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the sound lamp control device 114 .

In the back image change command processing, first, a back image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S6303) of the change in the back image accompanying the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S4701). . Then, among the back image determination flags provided for each back image type (back surface A, B), the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and the other back image is turned on. The back image determination flag corresponding to the type is set to OFF (S4702), the back image change command processing is terminated, and the command determination processing is returned to.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set by the process of S4701 is turned on, the back image type after change is specified from the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S4702. . Then, when the identified back image type is back B or C, part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, as described above. Therefore, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the rear image in a predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

Further, in the task processing, if it is specified that one of the back faces A and B is to be displayed according to the back face type of the back face image defined in the display data table, the back face image discrimination flag set in S4702 is used to determine the back face image. The type of the background image to be displayed at the time is specified, the range of the background image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 for normal use or video RAM 236 for normal use) and the address of that RAM.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for 20 milliseconds or less, two or more back image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should be no cases where two or more background image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. It could be interpreted as a command. In the process of S4702, if it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set it according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S4408, if it is determined that there is no back image change command (S4408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S4410). Otherwise (S4410: Yes), error command processing is executed (S4411), and the process returns to S4401.

Details of the error command processing (S4411) will now be described with reference to FIG. 75(b). FIG. 75(b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the audio lamp controller 114 .

In the error command process, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S4801). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S4802). End the processing and return to the command determination processing.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S4801, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S4802, and the error type is handled. A process is executed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image to be displayed.

If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process of S4802, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the people involved in the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence of the error.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S4410, if it is determined that there is no error command (S4410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a win-related command among the unprocessed commands (S4412), and if there is a win-related command If (S4412: Yes), hit-related command processing is executed (S4413), and the process returns to S4401.

Details of the win-related command process (S4413) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing win-related command processing. The hit-related command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display opening command, the display round number command, and the display ending command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the hit related command process (FIG. 76, S4413), first, it is determined whether or not there is a display jackpot start command (S4901). When it is determined that there is a hit start command for display in the process of S4901 (S4901: Yes), the big hit start command process is executed (S4902), and the process proceeds to S4903.

Here, details of the jackpot start command process (S4902) will be described with reference to FIG. 77(a). FIG. 77(a) is a flow chart showing the jackpot start command process (S4902). This jackpot start command process (S4902) is a process that is executed when it is determined that there is a jackpot start command for display in the hit-related command process (FIG. 76). This is processing for displaying on the pattern display device 81 .

In the jackpot start command process (S4902), first, a jackpot start display data table corresponding to the command (for example, corresponding to the jackpot type) is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5001). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the jackpot start display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5002). After that, based on the jackpot start display data table, time data is set in the clock counter 233h (S5003), the pointer 233f is initialized (S5004), the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set off (S5005), End this process.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description is continued. In the process of S4901, when it is determined that there is no display jackpot start command (S4901: No), the process proceeds to S4903. After completing the processing of S4901 or S4902, it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command (S4903). If it is determined in the process of S4903 that there is a display round number command, the round number command process is executed (S4904), and the process proceeds to S4905.

Details of the round number command processing (S4904) will now be described with reference to FIG. 77(b). FIG. 77(b) is a flow chart showing the round number command processing (S4904). This round number command process (S4904) is a process executed when it is determined that a display round number command has been received in the winning related command process (FIG. 76), and the number of rounds during the jackpot game is updated. This is a process for displaying the effect when the third symbol display device 81 is pressed.

In the round number command processing (S4904), first, the round number display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5101). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5102), and time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the round number display data table (S5103). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5104), the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S5105), and this processing ends.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description is continued. In the process of S4903, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S4903: No), the process proceeds to S4905. After completing the processing of S4903 or S4904, it is determined whether or not a display jackpot end command has been received (S4905). In the process of S4905, when it is determined that there is a display jackpot end command (S4905: Yes), the jackpot end command process is executed (S4906), and the process proceeds to S4907.

Details of the jackpot end command process (S4906) will now be described with reference to FIG. 78(a). FIG. 78(a) is a flow chart showing the jackpot end command process (S4906). This jackpot end command process (S4906) is a process executed when it is determined that a jackpot end command has been received in the hit-related command determination process (FIG. 76). This is processing for displaying on the pattern display device 81 .

In the jackpot end command process (S4906), first, the jackpot end display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5201). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5202), and time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the jackpot end display data table (S5203). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5204), the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S5205), and this processing ends.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description is continued. In the process of S4905, when it is determined that there is no display jackpot end command (S4905: No), the process proceeds to S4907. After completing the processing of S4905 or S4906, it is determined whether or not there is a display small hit start command (S4907). In the process of S4907, when it is determined that there is a small hit start command for display (S4907: Yes), the small hit start command process is executed (S4908), and the process proceeds to S4909.

Here, with reference to FIG. 78(b), details of the small winning start command process (S4908) will be described. This small hit start command process (S4908) is a process executed when it is determined that the small hit start command is received in the hit related command determination process (see FIG. 76), suggesting the start of the small hit game. This is a process for displaying an effect on the third symbol display device 81 .

In the small hit start command process (S4908), first, the small hit start display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5301). Next, the transfer data table buffer corresponding to the small hit start display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5302). Thereafter, time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the small winning start display data table (S5303), the pointer 233f is initialized (S5304), and the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S5305). , the process ends.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description is continued. In the process of S4907, when it is determined that there is no small winning start command for display (S4907: No), the process proceeds to S4909. After completing the processing of S4907 or S4908, it is determined whether or not there is a display small hit end command (S4909). In the process of S4909, when it is determined that there is a small hit end command (S4909: Yes), the small hit end command process is executed (S4910), and the process proceeds to S4911.

Here, with reference to FIG. 79(a), details of the small winning end command process (S4910) will be described. This small hit end command process (S4910) is a process executed when it is determined that the small hit end command is received in the hit related command determination process (see FIG. 76), suggesting the end of the small hit game This is a process for displaying an effect to be performed on the third symbol display device 81 .

In the small hit end command process (S4910), first, the small hit end display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5401). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5402), and time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the small hit end display data table (S5403). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5404), the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S5405), and this processing ends.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description is continued. In the process of S4909, when it is determined that there is no small winning end command for display (S4909: No), the process proceeds to S4911. After completing the processing of S4909 or S4910, it is determined whether or not there is a display V entrance passage command (S4911). In the process of S4911, if it is determined that there is a V entrance pass command (S4911: Yes), the V entrance pass command process is executed (S4912), and the process proceeds to S4913.

Details of the V entrance passage command processing (S4912) will now be described with reference to FIG. 79(b). This V entrance pass command process (S4912) is a process executed when it is determined that a V entrance pass command has been received in the win-related command determination process (see FIG. 76). This is a process for displaying on the third symbol display device 81 an effect suggesting that the game ball has passed through the switch 650e3.

In the V entrance passage command processing (S4912), first, the V entrance passage display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5501). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5502), and time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the V entrance passage display data table (S5503). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5504), the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S5505), and this processing ends.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description is continued. In the process of S4911, if it is determined that there is no display V entrance passing command (S4911: No), the process proceeds to S4913. After completing the processing of S4911 or S4912, it is determined whether or not there is a display V effect command (S4913). In the processing of S4913, if it is determined that there is a V effect command (S4913: Yes), V effect command processing is executed (S4914), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S4913, if it is determined that there is no V effect command for display (S4913: No), this processing ends.

Details of the V effect command process (S4914) will now be described with reference to FIG. This V effect command process (S4914) is a process executed when it is determined that the V effect command is received in the hit related command determination process (see FIG. 76), and the probability that a jackpot game is given is high. This is a process for displaying on the third symbol display device 81 an effect suggesting that.

In the V effect command processing (S4914), first, the V effect display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5601). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5602), and time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the V effect display data table (S5603). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5604), the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S5605), and this processing ends.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S4412, if it is determined that there is no hit-related command (S4412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a pressing command corresponding to pressing the frame button 22 among the unprocessed commands ( S4414), if there is a press command (S4414: Yes), the press command process is executed (S4415), and the process returns to S4401.

Details of the press command process (S4415) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81(a) is a flow chart showing the press command process. This press command process is for executing a process corresponding to the press command received from the sound lamp control device 114 .

In the press command process (S4415), first, the press display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5701). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5702), and time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the push display data table (S5703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5704), the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S5705), and this processing ends.

Returning to FIG. 73, the description is continued. In the processing of S4414, if it is determined that there is no press command (S4414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a rewrite effect related command among the unprocessed commands (S4416), and the rewrite effect related command is determined. If there is (S4416: Yes), rewrite effect related command processing is executed (S4417), and the process returns to S4401.

Here, with reference to FIG. 81(b), the details of the rewrite effect related command process (S4417) will be described. FIG. 81(a) is a flow chart showing a rewriting effect-related command process. In this rewrite effect related command processing, a process corresponding to the rewrite effect related command received from the sound lamp control device 114 is executed.

In the rewrite effect related command process (S4415), first, the rewrite effect related display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5701). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5702), and time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the push display data table (S5703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5704), the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S5705), and this processing ends.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S4416, if it is determined that there is no rewrite effect related command (S4416: No), then the process corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S4418), and the process returns to S4401.

In the process of S4401, which is executed again after each command has been processed, it is again determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S4401: Yes ), and the processing of S4402 to S4418 is executed again. Then, the processing of S4401 to S4418 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S4309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 72(b)) is also performed in the same manner as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, the command required to display the power-on image (see FIG. 34), that is, the display variation pattern command and the display Only the stop type commands are extracted, and the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 74(a)) and the stop type command processing (see FIG. 74(b)), which are the processing corresponding to each command, are executed, and other command is discarded without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 74A) executed in this case, in the processing of S4501, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on varying image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on varying moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S4502, the process of writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, details of the display setting process (S4303), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84. FIG. FIG. 82 is a flow chart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 82, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S6001). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination processing to be executed first, the processing of S6002 to S6004 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S6005. On the other hand, if the new flag is ON (S6001: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination processing, and after setting the new command flag to OFF (S6002), S6003-S6004 , the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

In the process of S6003, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (S6003). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S6003: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S6004).

Details of the warning image setting process will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third pattern display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to, and all error determination flags set to ON are displayed. Warning image data for displaying an error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third pattern display device 81 is developed (S6101).

Based on this expanded warning image data, task processing identifies the type of sprites (display objects) that make up the warning image, and for each sprite, the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle necessary for drawing. determine various parameters.

In the warning image setting process, after the process of S6101, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S6102), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the warning image setting process (S6004), or if it is determined in the process of S6003 that the error occurrence flag is not ON, that is, it is OFF (S6003: No), then the process proceeds to S6005.

In S6005, pointer update processing is executed (S6005). Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. This pointer updating process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is the process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address to which it should be applied.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S6201). That is, the pointer 233f is basically updated so that it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after the address "0001H". When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the process of S6201, it is then checked whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is End information. is determined (S6202). As a result, if it is End information (S6202: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the substance data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S6203). The time data corresponding to the performance time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S6204), the pointer 233f is initialized by setting it to 1 (S6205), and this processing is terminated. and return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effects.

On the other hand, in the process of S6203, if it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S6203: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S6206), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is displayed. is always expanded, the third pattern display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S6202, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the End information (S6202: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, returning to FIG. 82, the description is continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are developed from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6006). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is specified based on the rendering content developed in the processing of S6006 together with the previously developed warning image, etc., and the display coordinate position is determined for each sprite. , enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and other parameters required for drawing.

Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S6007), and it is determined whether or not the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S6008). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S6008: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S6008: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is time to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the fixed display flag is on. (S6009).

As a result, if the confirmed display flag is off (S6009: No), the confirmed display effect has not yet been performed, and it is time to perform the confirmed display effect. setting (S6010), and then, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S6011). Then, the time data corresponding to the performance time of the fixed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S6012), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6013). Then, after the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is in progress is set to ON in the ON state (S6014), the content of the stop symbol discrimination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S6015), returning to V interrupt processing.

Thus, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. You can set the drawing contents like this. Further, the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed to the fixed display effect only by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the fixed display data table. In addition, compared to the conventional case of changing the display contents by activating another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore the MPU 231 is not overloaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various modes of effect images can be displayed on the third pattern display 81. - 特許庁

Incidentally, the last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S6015 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before, and in the variable display data table, the variation based on the data table Until a predetermined time elapses after the start, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before is described. In the task processing (S4304), from the start of the variation until a predetermined time elapses, from the last stop design determination flag set by S6015, the stop design of the fluctuation production performed one before is specified, and the The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the process of S6009, if the fixed display flag is ON (S6009: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is ON (S6016). If the demonstration display flag is off (S6016: No), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the fixed display effect, so the demonstration display data table is changed to the display data table. The transfer data table buffer 233d is set in the buffer 233d (S6017), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6018). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S6019). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6020), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S6021), the process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the fixed display effect is completed, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加, you can set its drawing contents.

In the process of S6016, if the demonstration display flag is ON (S6016: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the fixed display effect is completed, and that demonstration effect is completed, so the display setting process is terminated as it is. and return to V interrupt processing. In this case, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

The simple display setting process (S4309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 72(b)) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the power-on fluctuation image by the power-on fluctuation image is over, for a predetermined time, the power-on fluctuation image (Fig. not shown) is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86, the details of the transfer setting process (S4305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 85(a) is a flow chart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S6301). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. Processing is executed (S6302), the transfer setting processing is terminated, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not turned on as a result of the processing of S6301, that is, if it is turned off (S6301: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video data. It has been transferred to the RAM 235 . In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S6303), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 . Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, resident image transfer setting processing (S6302), which is part of the transfer setting processing (S4305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 85(b). FIG. 85(b) is a flow chart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S6302).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a transfer instruction for untransferred image data has been issued to the image controller 237 (S6401). ), and further determines whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S6402). In the process of S6402, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the process of S6402 that the transfer process has not ended (S6402: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting process is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S6402: Yes), the process proceeds to S6403. Also, as a result of the process of S6401, even if the transfer instruction for the image data that has not been transferred has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S6401: No), the process proceeds to S6403.

In the processing of S6403, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S6403). A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so as to transfer the resident image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S6404), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the transfer data information about the untransferred resident target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (where the data is transferred). The first address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores it in the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 236 is not in use. , it is transferred to the specified address of the resident video RAM 236 . Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

As a result of the process of S6403, if all the resident target image data have been transferred (S6403: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S6405), and the resident image transfer setting process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 72B), the command is executed instead of the simple command determination process (see S4308 in FIG. Since determination processing (see FIGS. 73 to 81) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 82 to 84) are executed, normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 displays A normal image is displayed. Further, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is carried out to the normal video RAM 236 by normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 86) (see S6301: No in FIG. 85(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 transfers all resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without overwriting while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 , the image drawing process can be performed. As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a whose read speed is slow when drawing the image. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as rear images, third designs, character designs, and error messages, as well as main controller 110, sound lamp controller 113, and display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is immediately resident after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be prevented. , high responsiveness can be maintained until the third pattern display device 81 displays some kind of image.

Next, normal image transfer setting processing (S6303), which is a part of the transfer setting processing (S4305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 95 is a flow chart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S6303).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S6005) of the previously executed display setting process (S4303) is used. Information described in the indicated address is acquired (S6501). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S6502). , and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S6503), furthermore, a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data whose transfer is to be started in the ON state is set to ON (S6504), and the process proceeds to S6505.

Also, in the processing of S6502, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but Null data (S6502: No), the processing of S6503 and S6504 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S6505. In the process of S6505, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S6505), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S6505: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S6506).

In the process of S6506, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the process of S6506 that the transfer process has not ended (S6506: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S6506: Yes), the process proceeds to S6507. Also, as a result of the process of S6505, even if no image data transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (S6505: No), the process proceeds to S6507.

In the process of S6507, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S6507). is turned off (S6508), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S6503 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the processing proceeds to S6513. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on, but off (S6507: No), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag is on (S6509). If the back image change flag is not on but off (S6509: No), there is no image data to start transferring, so the normal image transfer setting process ends.

On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S6509: Yes), it means that the back image has been changed. Of the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S6511). Furthermore, the head address (storage source head address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination (usually (S6512), and the process proceeds to S6513.

When the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is for the back A, all the corresponding image data are resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 is Data does not exist. Therefore, in the process of S6511, if the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is for the back A, the normal image transfer process ends.

In the process of S6513, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S6513). The determination in the process of S6513 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233j. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is read from the stored image data determination flag 233j, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is normal video If it is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is "OFF", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

If the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S6513 (S6513: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can be planned.

On the other hand, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S6513 (S6513: No), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S6514). As a result, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 receives the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (in this case, the transfer destination). The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is to be stored. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). forward to the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

After the processing of S6514, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated (S6515), and this normal transfer setting processing ends. The stored image data determination flag 233j is updated by, as described above, setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the image data to be transferred to "ON", and by substituting the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, by executing the normal image transfer processing, if the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the previously executed command determination processing, the rear image is changed. Of the image data used in , image data not stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. , a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. By executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sends data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. can be done.

Here, the transfer data table stores the image data to be transferred so that the image data corresponding to the given sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the given sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, whereby the predetermined address is obtained according to the display data table. image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load on transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 87, details of the drawing process (S4306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 87 is a flow chart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of sprites that make up one frame determined in task processing (S4304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information , color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S4305), the drawing list shown in FIG. 38 is generated (S6601). That is, in the processing of S6601, the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites forming one frame determined in the task processing (S4304). , parameters necessary for the sprite determined by task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in order from the sprite that should be placed on the backmost side to the sprite that should be placed on the front side in the image for one frame. As drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which sprite image data is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. In addition, when a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S4305), the top address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored as the transfer data information is displayed at the end of the drawing list. , the final address (storage source final address), and the top address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 , according to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S6602). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1, including information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws the image in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list, and develops it by overwriting in the frame buffer indicated by the drawing object buffer information. As a result, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the first-drawn sprite can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the last-drawn sprite can be arranged on the frontmost side.

When transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. ), and the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the head address of the storage source to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a are sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 after that, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing object buffer information, and sends the image information along with the drive signal to the third pattern display device 81. Send to As a result, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . In addition, while developing the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be processed simultaneously in parallel. can be done.

In the rendering process, after the process of S6602, the rendering target buffer flag 233k is updated (S6603). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The rendering target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting "1" if the value was "0" and "0" if it was "1". done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of one frame of image are completed. This is performed each time the rendering process of the loading process (see FIG. 72(b)) is performed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. is executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for the first half is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By specifying these alternately, it is possible to perform display processing of an image for one frame continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing processing for an image for one frame is being performed.

<Second embodiment>
Next, a second embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 100. FIG. In the second embodiment, the contents to be set in advance when it is determined that the score effect is to be executed are changed from the first embodiment. In the above-described first embodiment, when it is determined that the score effect is to be executed, the total number of points to be given during the score effect (total number of points to be given) is preset, and in each variable display executed during the score effect When setting the score effect, the score to be given is determined with the total number of points to be given as the upper limit, and the score effect corresponding to the determined score is executed, but in the second embodiment, the score effect is executed. The difference is that the number of charge effects to be executed in the current score effect is set when it is determined that this is the case.

Further, in the above-described first embodiment, when it is determined in the winning information related process that the score effect is to be executed, the score effect is executed from the next variable display. In the form, if the timing determined to execute the score presentation in the winning information related processing satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, if the fluctuation display during fluctuation is fluctuating at high speed), the score presentation is also performed for the fluctuation. The difference is that it is configurable (see FIG. 88). Since other configurations are the same, descriptions of other configurations are omitted.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
The second embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the contents of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are changed. Since other points are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 89(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 89(a), in the second embodiment, a score effect scenario selection table 222aa, a specific effect execution selection table 222ab, and an execution timing selection table 222ac are added. It differs from the embodiment.

The score effect scenario selection table 222aa is a data table referred to when determining a score effect scenario that defines the number of times a specific effect is executed in the score effect, and is used in the winning information related process 2 (S2211 in FIG. 93). (see S2351 in FIG. 94), which is referred to in the score effect scenario setting process (see S2351 in FIG. 94). In this score effect scenario selection table 222aa, the variation type included in the winning information command transmitted from the main controller 110, the number of variations of the special symbols (the number of consecutive effects) that can execute the score effect, and the effect counter 223f. A plurality of scoring effect scenarios (scenarios A to C) are defined in correspondence with the values of the first effect counters.

Specifically, when the variation type is special reach hit or super reach hit, and the number of consecutive effects is two, the value of the first effect counter is defined in the range of "0 to 9" in scenario A. No scoring scenario is specified for the range other than the range. Scenario A defined here is a scenario corresponding to a score effect in which a specific effect is executed twice. Further, when the obtained value of the first effect counter is within a range in which the score effect scenario is not specified, the score effect is not set.

In this score performance scenario selection table 222aa, scenarios are defined such that more specific performances are more likely to be executed for a variation type with a high degree of expectation for a big win of a special symbol than for a variation type with a low degree of expectation for a big win. As a result, the degree of expectation for a big win can be increased as more specific performances are executed during the score performance. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the content of the effect executed during the score effect.

Further, the scoring effect is more likely to be executed as the number of continuous effects in which the scoring effect can be executed increases. As a result, it is possible to suppress the end of the score presentation in a short period (for example, the period of special symbol variation 2 rotations), and to execute the score presentation for a long period (for example, the period of special symbol 4 rotations). Therefore, it is possible to enhance the production effect of the score production. In addition, in the present second embodiment, if the predetermined condition is satisfied, the special symbol variation that is currently being varied can be included in the execution range of the score presentation, so the period in which the score presentation is performed can be extended. can be set long.

The specific effect execution selection table 222ab is a data table for selecting whether or not to execute the specific effect in the variable display (excluding the final variable display) executed during the score effect and the number of executions of the specific effect. , is referred to when a new variable display is started during the period in which the score effect is being executed. In this specific effect execution selection table 222ab, the variation type included in the winning information command transmitted from the main controller 110, the remaining variation count of the special symbol variation count (continuous effect count) that can execute the score effect, The number of specific effects to be executed in the current variation (executed once, executed twice) is defined in correspondence with the remaining number of specific effects to be executed during the current score effect and the value of the second effect counter. It is

Specifically, when the fluctuation type is normal reach, the number of remaining fluctuations of the special symbol fluctuation that is set continuously with the score production is 1, and the number of remaining specific productions is 2, the value of the second production counter In the range of "0 to 49", the number of executions of the specific effect "1 time" is defined, and in other ranges it is defined that the specific effect is not executed. In addition, when the fluctuation type is normal reach, the number of remaining fluctuations of the special symbol fluctuation that is continuously set with the score production is 1, and the number of remaining specific productions is 3, the value of the second production counter is "0". The number of executions of the specific effect "1 time" is defined in the range of "~69", and the number of times of execution of the specific effect "2 times" is defined in the range of "70 to 79".

The execution timing selection table 222ac is a data table for selecting the timing for executing the specific effect in the variable display determined to execute the specific effect, among the variable displays executed during the score effect. Here, the contents defined in the execution timing selection table 222ac will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 92 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the execution timing selection table 222ac.

As shown in FIG. 92, this execution timing selection table 222ac is associated with the variation type included in the winning information command transmitted from the main controller 110 and the value (0 to 99) of the third effect counter. , execution timing of a specific effect is defined. Specifically, when the variation type is normal reach, the value of the third effect counter is in the range of "0 to 19", and the execution timing of the specific effect "after the first notice period" is in the range of "20 to 49". "After the second notice period" is defined for "50 to 89", "during reach" is defined for the range, and the range other than that ("90 to 99") is defined as "no specific effect ” is stipulated.

In the case where the variation type is false, the value of the third effect counter is set to the range of "0 to 19" and "after the first notice period" is specified as the execution timing of the specific effect, and the other range ("20 to 99 ”) defines “do not execute the specific effect”. In addition, when the fluctuation type is short or out, it is defined that "the specific effect is not executed" regardless of the value of the third effect counter.

That is, as described with reference to FIG. 91, when the variation type corresponding to the current variation display is short or off, the specific effect is not executed. It is configured so that the execution timing is not provided. Although detailed description is omitted, for example, as shown in FIG. 91, in the present embodiment, a specific effect may be executed a plurality of times (twice) in one variable display. In this case, the execution timing of one specific effect is selected by referring to the execution timing selection table 222ac, and the execution timing of another specific effect that comes next to the execution timing of the specific effect of 1 is selected. It is configured as follows. As a result, it is possible to reliably vary the execution timings of the specific effects that are executed multiple times. Further, when the execution timing of one specific effect selected with reference to the execution timing selection table 222ac is in reach, that is, when there is no next execution timing in the variable display, the variable display is started. It is configured so that the execution timing that comes first after that is selected.

Note that the method of selecting the execution timing of a specific effect that is executed multiple times is not limited to the above-described method. It may be configured to select the execution timing, or to execute a specific performance in a performance mode different from usual as two specific performances at one execution timing. Furthermore, when execution timing is selected so that a plurality of specific effects are executed at the same execution timing, during a dedicated special period (a period during which selection cannot be made by referring to the execution timing selection table 222ac) You may comprise so that a specific production may be performed.

FIG. 89(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 89(b), the second embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in that an effect variable flag 223ab and a specific effect counter 223ac are added.

The effect variable flag 223ab is a flag for indicating whether or not a part of the variable display being executed is to be changed to the effect mode of the score effect. It is set to ON when it is determined to be variable. By setting this effect variable flag 223ab to ON, the effect variable process (S3152 in FIG. 100) is executed in the effect update process 2 (S2112 in FIG. 99), and part of the variable display being executed is changed to the score effect. A display rewriting effect command for rewriting is set.

The specific effect count counter 223ac is a data area for storing the value of the specific effect count executed in the score effect to be executed, and is a score effect scenario executed in the winning information related process 2 (S2211 in FIG. 93). The value of the number of specific effects set in the setting process (S2351 of FIG. 94) is stored (S2360 of FIG. 94). The value stored in the specific effect counter 223ac is subtracted by 1 every time the specific effect is executed during the score effect (S3411 in FIG. 96).

<Regarding control processing in the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 93 to 100, control processing contents of the audio ramp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. In the second embodiment, the winning information related process (see FIG. 58) is replaced with the winning information related process 2 (see FIG. 93), and the effect setting process (see FIG. 63) is different from the first embodiment described above. is changed to effect setting process 2 (see FIG. 95) and effect update process (see FIG. 66) is changed to effect update process 2 (see FIG. 99). are identical. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, the contents of the winning information related process 2 (S2211) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93 is a flow chart showing the details of the winning information related process 2 (S2211). This winning information related process 2 differs from the winning information related process (see FIG. 58) of the first embodiment in that the process for setting the score effect is different. When this winning information related process 2 (S2211) is executed, the processes of S2301 to S2304 are executed in the same manner as the winning information related process (see FIG. 58), and then the score presentation scenario setting process (S2351) is executed, End this process.

Next, the score effect scenario setting process (S2351) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 94 is a flow chart showing the contents of the score effect scenario setting process (S2351). In this score effect scenario setting process (S2351), the determination process of whether or not to execute the score effect for the winning information command received this time, and the range of special symbol variation in which the score effect is continuously executed, that is, the current Determination processing of whether or not to execute the score presentation from the special symbol variation being executed is executed.

When the score effect scenario setting process (S2351) is executed, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter (special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter) 223b is set to the value of the effect variation counter 223m (S2352). Then, it is determined whether the variation type of the special symbol variation currently being executed is short out (S2353), and when it is determined that it is not short out (S2353: No), the variation currently being executed is in high speed variation. It is determined whether there is (S2354). When it is determined in the process of S2354 that the high-speed fluctuation is in progress (S2354: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the production fluctuation counter 223m (S2355), and the production variable flag 223ab is set to ON (S2356).

In other words, it is determined whether the rewrite condition that allows the change display corresponding to the special symbol change currently being executed to be rewritten to the content of the score effect is satisfied, and if the rewrite condition is satisfied (the fluctuation during execution is short If the variation type is other than the loss and the high-speed variation is in progress), a process is executed to determine that the variation display corresponding to the special symbol variation currently being executed can be rewritten to the contents of the score presentation. In this way, by configuring the currently executed variable display to be used for the score presentation only when the above-described rewrite condition is satisfied, it is possible to set a longer period for executing the score presentation. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player is puzzled by sudden switching of the effect contents of the variable display being executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S2353, if it is determined that the variation type of the special symbol variation being executed is short out (S2353: Yes), or if it is determined that the variation being executed is other than during high speed variation (S2354: No), the process of S2355 and S2356 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2357. In this way, when it is determined that the above-described rewriting conditions are not established in the processing of S2353 and S2354, since the variation display of the special symbol variation currently being executed cannot be used for the score effect, the effect variation counter The process of adding the value of 223m is skipped.

In the process of S2357, the score effect scenario selection table 222aa is read (S2357), the score effect scenario corresponding to the winning information of this time is determined using the score effect scenario selection table 222aa (S2358), and then the determination result of S2358 is performed. (S2359). That is, it is determined whether or not a range in which scenario A to scenario C, which are score effect scenarios, is not defined when referring to the score effect scenario selection table 222aa in the processing of S2358. When it is determined in the process of S2359 that the score effect is to be executed (S2359: Yes), the value of the specific effect times corresponding to the determined score effect scenario is set in the specific effect frequency counter 223ac (S2360), and the winning prize read this time is set. The effect target information is set in the prize winning information storage area 223a corresponding to the command (S2361), the effect prohibition flag 223j is set to ON (S2362), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2359, if it is determined that the score effect is not executed (S2359: No), the effect variable flag 223ab is set to OFF (S2363), and the current variation type is super reach or higher (super reach, or Special Reach) is determined (S2364).

In the process of S2364, when it is determined that the super reach or more is reached (S2364: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S2361 described above, the processes of S2361 to S2362 are executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not more than Super Reach (S2364: No), the value of the effect variation counter 223m is cleared (S2365), and this process ends.

Here, the processing executed in S2364 has the same contents as the processing in S2314 executed in the winning information related processing (see FIG. 58) of the first embodiment described above. give an explanation. In the present embodiment, as described above, there is provided a limiting condition (the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the setting state of the production prohibition flag 223j) for limiting the setting of the score production. Further, even when the limiting condition is not satisfied, there is a case where the score effect scenario selection table 222aa is referred to and the determination result that the score effect is not executed is selected. In such a case, if the variation type included in the received winning information command is longer than a predetermined period (e.g., 80 seconds or longer), the winning information corresponding to the long variation in which the score effect is not executed is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball. area will be stored.

In such a state, when the next winning information command is received and a scoring effect is set based on the winning information included in the received winning information command, a predetermined score effect is executed while the set scoring effect is being executed. There is a problem that the variable display is executed for more than the period (80 seconds or more), and the score effect is delayed. In addition, for example, if the winning information for which the score effect is not set includes the variation type of super reach a, a big win occurs while the score effect is being executed, and the effect of the score effect is reduced. I had a problem letting it go.

To deal with such a problem, in the present embodiment, even if the winning information does not set the score effect, if the predetermined condition (variation type is super reach or higher) is established, the value of the effect change counter 223m is changed. while the prize information that satisfies a predetermined condition (variation type is super reach or higher) is stored in the prize information storage area 223a. is configured so that a new scoring effect is not set. As a result, it is possible to enhance the performance effect of the score performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the variation type is a normal reach hit, that is, when the variation time is short, the setting of the score effect is not prohibited. By configuring in this way, a big win can be generated while the score effect is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 95, the content of the effect setting process 2 (S2704) will be described. FIG. 95 is a flow chart showing the contents of the effect setting process 2 (S2704). In this effect setting process 2 (S2704), in addition to the effect setting process (see FIG. 63) of the first embodiment described above, there is a process for setting the final score effect to be executed in response to the final change in the score effect. The difference is that they are added.

When the effect setting process 2 (S2704) is started, first, the process of S2851 is executed in the same manner as S2801 of the effect setting process (see FIG. 63) of the first embodiment described above, and the value of the effect change counter is set to 0. If it is determined that it is not greater than (0) (S2851: No), the processing of S2855 to S2858, which is the same as the processing of S2804 to S2807 of the effect setting processing of the first embodiment (see FIG. 63), is performed. Execute and terminate this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S2851, if it is determined that the value of the production variation counter is greater than 0 (S2851: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the production variation counter 223m is 1 (S2852), If it is not 1, that is, if it is determined that this change is not the final change of the score effect (S2852: No), the pre-score effect setting process (S2853) is executed, and this process ends. Also, when it is determined in the process of S2852 that the value of the effect variation counter 223m is 1 (S2852: Yes), the final score effect setting process (S2854) is executed, and this process ends.

Thus, in the second embodiment, the effect executed during the score effect is set for the pre-score effect that is set for changes other than the final change of the score effect, and the final change for the score effect. Each performance mode is set separately from the final score performance. This makes it possible to unify the final result of the scoring effect in the final scoring effect even if the degree of freedom of the effecting mode for the pre-scoring effect is increased. You can increase the effect.

Next, the contents of the pre-score effect setting process (S2853) executed in the effect setting process 2 (S2704 in FIG. 95) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 96 is a flow chart showing the contents of the pre-score effect setting process (S2853). In this pre-score effect setting process (S2853), a process of determining the effect mode of the pre-score effect set for variations other than the final effect in the score effect is executed.

When the pre-score effect setting process (S2853) is executed, first, using the specific effect execution selection table 222ab, the number of specific effect executions in the current variation (the variation) is determined (S3401), and then a given score counter. 223p value is read (S3402). Then, the current assigned score is subtracted from the gauge upper limit score (6 points) to calculate the differential score (S3403).

Next, it is determined based on the determination result of S3401 described above whether or not to execute the specific effect with this change (S3404), and if it is determined that the specific effect is not executed (S3404: No), The score to be given by variation is set from a range less than the difference score (S3405). In other words, the score to be given is set in a state in which a limit is applied so that the score that reaches the gauge upper limit score is not given even though the specific effect is not executed. Here, processing is executed to select a score based on an obtained value of a not-shown production counter (production counter for limit score) within a score range obtained by subtracting 1 from the differential score from 0 points.

Next, a variation pattern with a score giving effect in a mode corresponding to the set score is determined (S3406), a value corresponding to the set score is added to the value of the given score counter 223p (S3407), and the effect variation count counter 1 is subtracted from the value of 223m (S3408), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S3404, if it is determined that the specific effect is executed in this variation (S3404: Yes), the specific effect execution timing is set based on the execution timing selection table 222ac (S3409), and the specific effect execution timing As the score giving effect to be executed until then, the variation pattern with the score giving effect in the mode corresponding to the calculated difference score is determined (S3410), and the value of the specific effect frequency counter 223ac is updated (S3411).

Then, the value corresponding to the set score is added to the value of the given score counter 223p (S3412), which is the same as the processing of S2911 and S2912 of the score giving effect setting processing (see FIG. 64) of the first embodiment described above. The processing of S3413 and S3414 is executed, and this processing ends.

Next, the contents of the final score effect setting process (S2854) executed in the effect setting process 2 (S2704 in FIG. 95) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 97 is a flow chart showing the contents of the final score effect setting process (S2854). In this final score effect setting process (S2854), the process of determining the effect mode of the final score effect set for the final variation among the score effects is executed.

When the final score effect setting process (S2854) is executed, first, the final specific effect timing corresponding to the current variation type is set (S3501). Here, in the second embodiment, each variation type (normal reach, super reach, special reach (see FIG. 90)) that can be the final variation of the specific effect is predetermined to execute the specific effect (final specific effect). Timing (for example, the timing of reach, the timing just before the final symbol stops, the timing of switching to a different reach effect, etc.) A process for setting the timing of the final specific effect set for each variation type is executed. The timing of the final specific effect may be changed for each variation type, and only a plurality of timings at which the final specific effect can be executed are provided in the variation type included in the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, The sound lamp control device 113 may be configured to execute a process of selecting and determining the timing for executing the final specific effect from the plurality of timings described above.

Next, the value of the specific effect count counter 223ac is read out to calculate the number of remaining specific effects (S3502), and it is determined whether the calculated number of remaining specific effects is 1 (S3503). If it is determined that the number of times is not 1 (2 or 3) (S3503: No), then the value of the given score counter 223p is read (S3504), and based on the read value of the given score counter 223p, A score (sufficient score) required to execute the remaining specified number of effects is calculated (S3505). For example, if the current value of the given score counter is 4 and the number of remaining specific effects is 3, one of them will be used as the final specific effect, so that it corresponds to 2, which is the remaining number of specific effects. Then, one score is calculated from the range of 8 to 13 as the given score. In other words, if the score given in this final score effect is less than 8 points, the gauge upper limit amount cannot be reached twice, and if it is more than 13 points, the gauge upper limit amount will be reached 3 times. Therefore, there is no score given corresponding to the number of remaining specific effects. Therefore, as a sufficient score, one score is calculated from the range of "8 to 13" (acceptable range). In addition, when calculating one score as a sufficient score from the above-mentioned allowable range, Selection may be made using a data table defined in association with the lottery result of the special symbol variation (determination of success or failure, type of variation) and the obtained value of the dedicated counter of the effect counter 223f. By configuring in this way, for example, it is possible to specify that a higher score is selected from within the allowable range as the degree of expectation of a big win is higher or the effect of the score presentation is higher.

Next, the execution timing of the specific effect is set based on the execution timing selection table 222ac (S3506), the value of the given score counter 223p is updated in correspondence with the value of the sufficient score calculated in the processing of S3505 (S3507), The value of the specific effect number counter 223ac is updated (S3508), and the process proceeds to the final specific effect setting process (S3509).

On the other hand, if it is determined to be 1 in the process of S3503 (S3503: Yes), it means that only the final specific effect described above is executed in the final score effect, so the processes of S3504 to S3508 are skipped and the process of S3509 is performed. Move to Here, the contents of the final specific effect setting process (S3509) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 98 is a flow chart showing the contents of the final specific effect setting process (S3509). In this final specific effect setting process (S3509), a score giving effect for giving a score is set in accordance with the execution timing of the final specific effect preset in the variation pattern corresponding to each variation type.

When the final specific effect setting process (S3509) is executed, first, the value of the given score counter 223p is read (S3601), and the score to be given by the final specific effect execution timing is calculated (S3602). Next, a point giving effect corresponding to the calculated score is set as a point giving effect corresponding to the final specific effect execution timing (S3603).

Then, the value of the given score counter 223p is updated in correspondence with the calculated score value (S3604), the value of the specific effect number counter 223ac is updated (S3605), and this processing is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 97, the description continues. When the processing of S3509 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the variation pattern determined this time includes an operation score effect (S3510), and if it is included (S3510: Yes), the operation score execution flag is set to ON. Then (S3511), the value of the effect variation counter 223m is decremented by 1 (S3512), and this process is terminated. The detailed contents of the processing of S3510 and S3511 described above are the same as the processing of S2911 and S2912 of the score giving effect setting processing (S2803 in FIG. 64) of the first embodiment described above, so the description thereof will be omitted. .

Next, the contents of the rendering update process 2 (S2112) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 99 is a flow chart showing the contents of effect update process 2 (S2112). Effect update processing 2 (S2112) in the present second embodiment adds processing when the effect variable flag 223ab is set to ON to the effect update processing (see FIG. 66) in the first embodiment described above. are the same except that The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the effect update process 2 (S2112) is executed, first, the same processes of S3101 to S3107 as the effect update process (see FIG. 66) in the first embodiment described above are executed. When the processing of S3107 is finished, it is next determined whether or not the effect variable flag 223ab is on (S3151). The effect variable flag 223ab is set to OFF (S3153), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the effect variable flag 223ab is off in the processing of S3151, the processing of S3152 and S3153 is skipped and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 100, the contents of the effect change process (S3152) executed in the effect update process 2 (S2112 in FIG. 99) will be described. FIG. 100 is a flow chart showing the details of the effect variable processing (S3152). In this effect change process, a process of rewriting a part of the effect mode of the variable display during fluctuation to the score effect is executed.

When the effect variable processing (S3152) is executed, first, 1 point is set as the score to be given in the changing effect (S3161). is updated (S3162). Then, the value of the effect variation counter 223m is decremented by 1, a rewrite effect command for display is set (S3164), and this process is terminated.

As described above, when the variable display that is currently being executed is added to the range of the score effect, the effect that 1 point is given in the variable display that is being executed is executed. As a result, it is possible to immediately inform the player that the score presentation has been executed. In addition, since the score to be given is set to be small (1 point), it is possible to reduce the influence on the processing for each variation of the specific effect to be executed later.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the variable display being executed is added to the range of the score effect, the score giving effect in which one point is given in the variable display being executed is executed. The score to be given is not limited to this, and may be set randomly from a range (1 to 5 points) in which the specific effect is not executed, for example. However, if the score to be given is set to a range in which 0 points can be selected, it becomes impossible to quickly notify the player that the score effect has been executed. good. Also, it may be configured such that the score to be given is variable based on the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the winning information to be the target of the present score presentation. As a result, the player can continue to have a sense of expectation for winning during the period in which the score presentation is executed. Furthermore, when the variable display being executed is added to the range of the score effect, instead of giving points in the variable display being executed, a rewrite effect is executed that only informs that the score effect will be executed. can be configured to As a result, it is not necessary to change the processing of the score giving performance during the subsequent scoring performance depending on whether or not the variable display being executed is added to the range of the scoring performance, so that the processing during the scoring performance is simplified. can be done.

<Regarding the first operation effect example of the operation score effect in each embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 101 to 107, another example of the operation score effect in each embodiment will be described. In each of the above-described embodiments, the score to be given is varied according to the operation mode (whether or not there is an operation) of the frame button 22 for the operation score effect executed during the score effect. On the other hand, in the present example of the first operation effect, as the advance notice effects, the first notice effect for setting the display mode according to the operation mode (whether or not the operation is performed) of the frame button 22, and the first notice effect which is executed for a predetermined period of time. The difference is that a second notice effect is provided.

A conventional type game machine is configured so that a plurality of advance notice performances suggesting the degree of expectation of winning a jackpot are independently displayed during one variable display in order to improve the amusement of the game. In such a gaming machine, since various advance notice effects can be provided to the player, it is possible to enhance the effect of the production and improve the interest of the game. Depending on the timing of execution, useless advance notice effects may be displayed or notice effects that confuse the player may be displayed.

Further, among the advance notice effects, there is one in which the player operates the operation means (for example, the frame button 22) to notify the player of the display contents of the notice effect (hereinafter referred to as operation notice effect). In a gaming machine using such a notice effect, depending on the operation timing of the operation means (the frame button 22), the execution timing (the timing of displaying the display contents of the notice effect) is switched with another notice effect. On the other hand, there is a risk that the advance notice effect will become useless. In addition, if a period is provided in which only the operation notice effect is executed so that the execution timing of the operation notice effect is not replaced with the execution timing of the other notice effect, a large amount of data can be displayed within the limited effect period (variable display period). There is a problem that it becomes difficult to execute the advance notice effect, and the effect of the effect is lowered.

On the other hand, in this first operation effect example, the operation mode (whether or not the operation is performed) of the frame button 22 for the first notice effect, and the effect mode of the first notice effect and the second notice effect according to the operation timing. (display contents) is configured to be variable. By configuring in this way, even if the operation means is operated at any timing for the operation notice effect (first notice effect), the notice effect is executed in the effect mode corresponding to the operation timing. can increase

<Regarding the effect content in the first operation effect example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 101 to 105, the effect content in this modified example will be described. FIG. 101(a) is a timing chart showing display timings of the first notice effect and the second notice effect, and FIG. 101(b) shows the notice display of each notice effect at the operation timing of the first notice effect. It is a figure showing the contents.

As shown in FIG. 101(a), in this example of the operation effect, it is configured to be able to execute a compound notice effect in which the first notice effect and the second notice effect are displayed in an overlapping manner. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 102(a), the first notice effect is executed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and the second notice effect is executed in the small display area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds. A preview effect is executed. FIG. 102(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen immediately after the composite advance notice effect is started.

In the first advance notice performance, the frame button operable range is set for 10 seconds from 2 seconds after the operation guidance display Db1 for guiding the operation of the frame button 22 is displayed, and the remaining period of the frame button operable period is set. is continuously displayed in the main display area Dm. This frame button operable period is set so that the first two seconds are the first period, the next five seconds are the second period, and the last three seconds are the third period. It is determined which period (first period to third period) the timing of operating 22 corresponds to, and based on the determination result, the contents of the advance notice display of the compound advance notice effect can be varied.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 101(b), when it is determined that the operation timing of the frame button 22 is in the first period, the degree of expectation for giving points is notified (suggested) as the content of the notice display of the first notice effect. ) is displayed, and the score to be obtained is notified as the content of the notice display of the second notice effect. In other words, when the frame button 22 is operated in the first period, the first notice effect is displayed first, so the player is allowed to perform the score giving effect step by step in the order of the first notice effect and the second notice effect. is configured to notify

Next, when it is determined that the operation timing of the frame button 22 is in the second period, the score to be obtained is notified as the content of the notice display of the first notice effect, and the degree of expectation for giving the score is notified as the content of the notice display of the second notice effect. The content to be notified (suggested) is displayed (see FIG. 102(b)). In other words, when the frame button 22 is operated during the second period, the second notice effect executes the notice display before the first notice effect. It is configured to notify the player step by step.

When it is determined that the operation timing of the frame button 22 is in the third period, the notice display content of the second notice effect is emphasized as the notice display content of the first notice effect (see FIG. 105(b)). ). That is, the third period is the timing when the performance period of the second advance notice effect has passed and the second notice effect is not displayed in the small area Ds2, so the player is notified of the effect result of this duplicate notice effect. Therefore, the highlight display (De5) that combines the preview display content (character "P") of the second preview effect is displayed.

In addition, when it is determined that the operation timing of the frame button 22 is in the third period, it is configured to execute a notification other than the display content related to scoring, for example, a notification directly suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol. Also good.

On the other hand, if the frame button 22 is not operated during the first notice effect (within the frame button operable range), only the notice display corresponding to the second notice effect is executed, and the notice display corresponding to the first notice effect is executed. is configured not to run. In this case, the score is configured not to be displayed on the display screen.

In addition, in this modification, an example in which the above-described composite notice effect is executed is described, but the above-described first notice effect and second notice effect are executed at different timings. is also configured. In addition, the standby state of the second notice effect (the state in which the treasure box is closed in FIG. 102(a)) is continued for a long period of time (for example, 30 seconds), and during that time the plurality of operation effects and the third notice effect are executed. The notice display timing of the second notice effect may be changed according to the result.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 102 to 105, the display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the duplication flag is executed will be described. FIG. 102(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display screen that is displayed immediately after the duplication notice effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 102(a), when the double notice effect is executed. As the first advance notice effect, an operation guide display Db1 for guiding operation of the frame button 22 and a time gauge Db2 indicating the remaining period of the frame button operable period are continuously displayed in the main display area Dm. Then, as the second notice effect, a treasure box Dc1 is displayed in the small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds as an advance notice display for notifying the player that the notice display of the second notice effect will be executed.

If the frame button 22 is not operated after the first period (2 seconds) set at the beginning of the frame button operable period has elapsed, the display screen shown in FIG. 102(b) is displayed. FIG. 102(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display screen that is displayed during the second period when the frame button 22 is not operated during the first period in the overlapping advance notice effect. . As shown in FIG. 102(b). Since the frame button 22 is not operated, the operation guide display Db1 and the time gauge Db2 are continuously displayed in the main display area Dm. The time gauge Db2 is displayed in a manner indicating that the remaining period is short compared to the above-described FIG. 101(a). Then, a score is given to the second advance notice display De1 as a P grant expectation level notification suggesting that a score is given as the advance notice display of the second notice effect executed in the small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds. The letter "P" is displayed.

Here, in addition to the letter "P" shown in the figure, the P award expectation level notification displayed in the second advance notice display De1 may be a letter "P?" , it is determined that a score will be given, and the characters "super P" are displayed to indicate that the given score is large. As a result, even in a state where only the P grant expectation degree information is displayed, it is possible to make the player predict the performance result of the overlapping advance notice performance, and the performance effect can be enhanced. In this operation effect example, various notification modes are shown using different characters as the notification mode of the P grant expectation level notification. Other configurations may be used, for example, it may be configured to change the color and size of the letter "P" to perform P grant expectation level notification with different meanings.

FIG. 103(a) is a schematic diagram showing a display example when the frame button 22 is operated during the first period of the double notice effect (see FIG. 102(a)). As shown in FIG. 103(a), a score is given to the first notice display De2 as the P grant expectation level notification suggesting that the score is given as the notice display of the first notice effect in the main display area Dm. The letter "P" is displayed to indicate that Then, the characters "What is the contents of the treasure box?" are displayed, suggesting that the second foretelling effect will be executed next.

FIG. 103(b) is a schematic diagram showing another example of a display when the frame button 22 is operated during the first period of the double notice effect (see FIG. 102(a)). As shown in FIG. 103(b), a large score is given to the first notice display De2 as the P grant expectation level notification suggesting that a score is given as the notice display of the first notice effect in the main display area Dm. The character "Super P" is displayed to indicate that Then, the text "Expect the contents of the treasure box" is displayed, suggesting that the effect result of the second notice effect is the effect result (a large amount of points) that is advantageous to the player.

FIG. 104(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen when the second period is reached in a state where the frame button 22 is operated during the first period of the double notice effect (see FIG. 103(b)). be. As shown in FIG. 104(a), in a state where the characters "super P" are displayed in the first announcement display De2 of the first announcement effect in the main display area Dm, in the small area Ds2 of the sub display area Ds A character "7" indicating a score of 7 points is displayed on the second advance notice display De3. Then, when the characters of 7 points are displayed, the display of the storage status display area DK is updated corresponding to the assigned (displayed) score.

Note that instead of the second advance notice display De3 of the second advance notice effect shown in FIG. 104(a), the second advance notice display De3 shown in FIG. 104(b) may be displayed. FIG. 104(b) is a schematic diagram showing another example of the display screen when the second period is reached in a state where the frame button 22 is operated during the first period of the overlapping notice effect (see FIG. 103(b)). is. In another example shown in FIG. 104(b), the character "V" indicating that the jackpot is won is displayed as the second notice display De3 of the second notice effect, and the characters "congratulations" are displayed in the main display area Dm. is displayed. In this way, in the duplicate notice effect executed during the score effect, in addition to the notice effect that gives the score, by using the notice display that directly informs the result of the lottery of the target special symbol, the effect with unexpectedness is achieved. It can be executed, and even in a state where the score imparted during the score performance is small, the expectation for the big win can be given.

FIG. 105(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen when the frame button 22 is operated during the second period of the double notice effect. When the frame button 22 is operated in the state of FIG. 102(b), as shown in FIG. 105(a), the character "P" is displayed in the second announcement display De1 in the small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds. In this state, a character "3" indicating 3 points is displayed in the main display area Dm in the first announcement display De4. Then, when the characters of three points are displayed, the display of the storage status display area DK is updated corresponding to the assigned (displayed) score.

FIG. 105(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen when the frame button 22 is operated during the third period of the double notice effect. When the frame button 22 is operated during the third period, as shown in FIG. 105(b), the second advance notice display has ended in the small area Ds2 of the sub display area Ds, and the first notice display is displayed in the main display area Dm. The letter "P" indicating that the score is given to the first notice display De5 of the notice effect (contents displayed in the second notice effect in this duplicate notice effect), and "3" indicating 3 points. A character composed of characters is displayed. Then, when the characters of three points are displayed, the display of the storage status display area DK is updated corresponding to the assigned (displayed) score.

As described above, in the first operation effect example, by varying the content (effect mode) displayed in each advance notice effect to be displayed in the duplicate notice effect in accordance with the display timing of each advance notice display, The player can be interested in the notice performance until the last notice performance is executed.

In this first operation effect example, the time gauge Db indicating the frame button operable period is configured to allow the player to visually recognize the remaining period. In order to inform the player whether it is the period (first period to third period), the display mode of the time gauge Db2 may be changed. It is preferable to configure so that it changes to "yellow" during the second period and "blue" during the third period. As a result, the player can be made to play a game that intentionally aims at a specific period, and the player's willingness to participate in the performance can be increased.

<Regarding control processing in this first example of operation effect>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 106 and 107, the contents of control in this first operation presentation example will be described. In this first operation effect example, the content of frame button input monitoring/effect processing (see FIG. 65) is changed to frame button input monitoring/effect processing 3 (see FIG. 106) in contrast to each of the above-described embodiments. is different.

Now, with reference to FIG. 106, the content of the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 3 (S2107) will be described. FIG. 106 is a flow chart showing the contents of frame button input monitoring/effect processing 3 (S2107). In this frame button input monitoring/effect processing 3 (S2107), in contrast to the above-described frame button input monitoring/effect processing (see FIG. 65), when the frame button 22 is pressed during the score operation effect period, each notice effect is executed. The difference is that the advance notice mode setting process (see S3051) for setting the mode is executed, and otherwise the same process is executed. The same reference numerals are given to the same elements, and the description thereof is omitted.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 3 (S2107) is executed, the same processing of S3001 to S3003 as the above-described frame button input monitoring/effect processing (see FIG. 65) is executed, and then the notice mode setting processing is performed. (S3051) is executed. When this advance notice mode setting process (S3051) is completed, the process of S3004, which is the same as the above-described frame button input monitoring/effect process (see FIG. 65), is executed, and this process ends. Also, when it is determined in the processing of S3002 that the score manipulation effect period is not in effect (S3002: No), the processing of S3005, which is the same as the above-described frame button input monitoring and effect processing (see FIG. 65), is executed, and this processing is executed. exit.

Next, with reference to FIG. 107, the content of the advance notice mode setting process (S3051) executed in the frame button input monitoring/effect process 3 (S2107) will be described. FIG. 107 is a flow chart showing the contents of the advance notice mode setting process (S3051). In this advance notice mode setting process (S3051), the process of setting the effect mode of the first notice effect and the effect mode of the second notice effect according to the timing at which the frame button 22 is pressed is executed.

When the advance notice mode setting process (S3051) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the pressing timing of the frame button 22 is the first period (see FIG. 101) (S3052). Here, when the scoring operation presentation period (frame button operable period) for validly determining the depression of the frame button 22 is set, the elapsed time is counted by a clock counter (not shown). Based on the value of the clock counter at the timing when it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed, it is determined whether the timing is the first period, the second period, or the third period.

In the process of S3052, if it is determined that the pressing timing is in the first period (S3052: Yes), next, the score grant expectation notification mode is set as the first notice display mode (S3053), and the second notice display is performed. A given score notification mode is set as a mode (S3054). Then, a display notice command corresponding to the set mode is set (S3055), and this processing is terminated. That is, as described above with reference to FIG. 101(b), when the operation timing of the frame button 22 is in the first period, points are given in the first notice effect that is executed (displayed) first. is displayed (see FIG. 103(a)), and then a display mode showing the number of points to be given at the timing when the second notice effect is executed is displayed (see FIG. 104(b)). . In this way, a plurality of advance notice effects can be executed for one effect to which points are given, and the effect result of the target effect is gradually suggested and notified according to the execution timing of each advance notice effect. , the player can play the game while predicting the performance result or expecting the performance result to be advantageous to the player.

In addition, in this first operation effect example, a display mode indicating that points are given to the previous notice effect to be executed is displayed, and the number of points to be given to the notice effect to be executed later is displayed. However, without being limited to this, for example, a display mode showing the number of points that can be given to the advance notice effect to be executed first is displayed, and the display mode to be executed later is displayed. It may be configured to display a display mode indicating whether or not points are awarded for the advance notice effect. By constructing in this way, the player can predict the progress of the performance when the score is actually awarded by grasping the number of points that can be awarded displayed in the advance notice performance to be executed first. It is possible to execute the notice performance while giving the player a sense of expectation.

Returning to FIG. 107, the description continues. In the process of S3052, if it is determined that the pressing timing is not in the first period (S3052: No), then it is determined whether the pressing timing is in the second period (S3056). (S3056: Yes), the given score notification mode is set as the first notice display mode (S3057), the process of S3055 described above is executed, and this process ends.

That is, when the pressing timing is in the second period, the second notice effect has already been notified in the preset score addition expectation degree notification mode (see FIG. 102(b)). As the display mode of the first notice effect, a given score notification mode indicating the number of points to be given is set and displayed (see FIG. 105(a)).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3056 that the pressing timing is not in the second period (S3056; No), the pressing timing is in the third period, so that the content of the second announcement display is selected as the first announcement display mode. The effect mode (see FIG. 105(b)) is set, the process of S3055 described above is executed, and this process ends. In other words, when the pressing timing is in the third period, that is, when it is the timing after the end of the second notice effect, even if the given score notification mode (display mode showing only the number of points to be given) is displayed, Since the display mode of the second notice effect (the display mode indicating that points are awarded (see FIG. 102(b))) has already disappeared, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the object of the value.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 105(b), by configuring to display a display mode combining a display mode indicating that a score is given and a display mode indicating the number of points to be given, a game It is possible to execute a production that is easy for a person to understand. Note that if the frame button 22 is not pressed within the frame button operable period, the advance notice mode setting process (S3051 in FIG. 107) is not executed. A half-baked production will be executed. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to operate the frame button 22, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 to 118. FIG. In the above-described first and second embodiments, when the given score reaches a predetermined amount (for example, 6) during any variable display of the score effect, the specific effect is executed. rice field. On the other hand, in the third embodiment, the specific effect is executed only during the final variation of the score effect, that is, during the variable display corresponding to the winning information command that caused the decision to execute the score effect. The difference is that in the variable display in which the score effects up to that point are executed, the stock effects are executed to ensure the number of times the specific effects are executed.

By constructing in this way, the score performance can be enjoyed to the end, and since there is no need to set to execute the specific performance in the variable display other than the final variation, setting processing of the variable display is easily executed. be able to.

<Regarding Scoring Effects in the Third Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 108 and 109, the scoring effects executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 108(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display screen during the score effect (before the final change). According to FIG. 108(a), an effect similar to the score effect of each embodiment described above is executed, and a stock display area Db2 for stock-displaying the acquired charge amount is formed in the main display area.

This stock display area Db2 has an acquired charge amount display area Db2a for showing the currently acquired charge amount, and a maximum charge amount display area D2b2 that can be acquired in the current score presentation. In a), "3" is displayed in the maximum charge amount display area D2b2, and "0" is displayed in the obtained charge amount display area Db2a.

In addition, only the numerical value indicating the value of the gauge is displayed in the accumulation status display area DK, and "charge zone" is displayed above the main display area Dm as the score effect display mode Db1 indicating that the score effect is currently being performed. comment is displayed. In this FIG. 108(a), in order to notify the player of the reserved design corresponding to the final variation of the score effect, the display mode of the second reserved design Dsc is displayed in a display mode distinguishable from the other reserved designs. there is

Then, when the score given in the score effect reaches a predetermined amount (6), as shown in FIG. 108(b), "1" is displayed in the acquired charge amount display area Db2a of the stock display area Db2. . When the change before the final change of the score effect stops, as shown in FIG. 109, the comment "End of charge zone" is displayed in the main display area Dm, and the specific effect is executed in the next change in the small area Ds2. A pre-command is displayed to suggest that

Although detailed description is omitted, the final variation of the score presentation in this embodiment is configured to be able to execute the score award presentation in the same manner as in each of the above-described embodiments. Then, the charge amount acquired before the final variation (until the state shown in FIG. 109 is reached) and the charge amount acquired in the final variation are added together, and the specific effect is executed in the final variation. Configure.

By configuring in this way, even if the charge amount (stock number) acquired before reaching the final change of the score effect is small, it is expected that a large charge amount will be acquired in the final change. can be done. In addition, depending on the jackpot lottery result corresponding to the final variation and the charge amount (stock number) acquired until the final variation of the score presentation is reached, the reach performance performed in the final variation is different. Since it is configured, even when the acquired charge amount is small, the degree of expectation for a big hit can be increased depending on the reach performance of the final variation. Therefore, it is possible to enjoy the scoring effect to the end.

In addition, in the case of using the above-described configuration, the ready-to-win effect to be executed in the final variation may be notified (suggested) to the player in advance. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected game property such that the player does not want to acquire an excessive amount of charge during the score presentation.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 110, the electrical configuration of the third embodiment will be described. The third embodiment differs from the second embodiment in that the contents of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the MPU 201 of the sound lamp control device 113 are changed. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 110 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 201 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, for the ROM 222 (see FIG. 30(a)) in the second embodiment, a normal fluctuation pattern selection table 222ba, a specific fluctuation pattern selection table 222bb, a frequency selection table 222bc, an execution timing selection table 222bd, A winning display score selection table 222be and a losing display score selection table 222bf are added. Since other configurations are the same as those of the second embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The normal variation pattern selection table 222ba is a data table for selecting variation patterns other than the final variation of the score effect, and its contents are the same as the variation pattern table 222a of the first embodiment described above. detailed description is omitted.

The specific variation pattern selection table 222bb is a data table for selecting the variation pattern in the final variation of the score effect, and includes the variation type included in the winning information command transmitted from the main controller 110 and the score effect of this time Various variation patterns are defined corresponding to the set number of specific effects (specific number of times) and the already acquired charge amount.

Here, the specific variation pattern selection table 222bb will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 111 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the specific variation pattern selection table 222bb. In this specific variation pattern selection table 222b, as the variation pattern of the final variation of the score presentation, the effect mode that can execute the set specific effect number of times and the charge amount that must be acquired in the final variation, that is, the specific effect number is defined to select a variation pattern capable of setting a score imparting effect mode for obtaining a value obtained by subtracting the value of the notified number counter 223bb from the above.

With reference to FIG. 111, the selection of the variation pattern of the final variation of the score effect will be described. In the specific variation pattern selection table 222bb (FIG. 111), the variation pattern type (variation type notified by the variation pattern command) determined by the main controller 110 is determined based on the number of times selection table 222bc described later. Each specific variation pattern (variation pattern of the final variation of the continuous advance notice effect) corresponding to the value of the current notified number counter 223bb by the specific effect count (number of times information (number of times data) stored in the count storage area 223ba) are set respectively.

In addition, when the score effect is executed, the variation patterns set in the specific variation pattern selection table 222bb (normal reach hit, super reach a to c (hit and miss), special reach (set only to hit It is limited to the case where only the variation pattern)) is selected, and in the other variation patterns, the score effect is not executed, so the specific variation pattern selection table 222bb includes other variation patterns (normal reach out, etc.) is not set.

Next, a specific variation pattern selection method will be described. The value (corresponding to the specific number of effects) stored in the number storage area 223ba by S3553 in the final score effect setting process 2 (S2854: see FIG. 118) executed by the MPU 222 of the audio lamp control device 113, which will be described later, A specific variation pattern is selected from the specific variation pattern selection table 222bb (FIG. 111) based on the variation pattern type notified by the counter 223bb and the variation pattern command.

As shown in FIG. 111, when the variation pattern type notified by the variation pattern command is per normal reach, normal configured in the same variation mode as per normal reach set in the variation pattern selection table 222a A specific variation pattern (selected when the notified number counter 223bb is 0) and a variation mode per normal reach (third symbol of As for the variation mode, a specific variation pattern of Normal A, which is the same as the variation mode per normal reach set in the variation pattern selection table 222a, is set.

In addition, in the case of the variation pattern type of super reach a, specific variation patterns of SPA1 in which the stock effect is not executed, SPA2 in which the stock effect is executed once, and SPA3 in which the stock effect is executed twice are set. there is The specific variation patterns of SPA1 to SPA3 differ only in the number of times the stock effect is executed (including 0 times), and the main variation mode is the variation pattern of super reach a that is normally selected ( A variation pattern similar to the variation pattern selected by the normal variation pattern selection table 222ba is set.

Here, as shown in FIG. 111, in the case of super reach a, the specific variation pattern of SPA1 is the number of specific effects (value of number storage area 223ba) and each value of notified number counter 223bb (number of times storage It is set to be selected when the value of the area 223ba and the value of the notified number counter 223bb) is one of (0, 0), (1, 1), and (2, 2). Similarly, the specific variation pattern of SPA2 is selected if it is either (1, 0) or (2, 1), and the variation pattern of SPA3 is selected if it is (2, 0) is set to

In the case of the variation pattern type of super reach b, SPB1 in which the stock effect is not executed, SPB2 in which the stock effect is executed once, SPB3 in which the stock effect is executed twice, and the stock effect is executed three times. A specific variation pattern of SPB4 is set. The specific variation patterns of SPB1 to SPB4 differ only in the number of times the stock effect is executed (including 0 times), and the main variation mode is the variation pattern of super reach b that is normally selected ( A variation pattern similar to the variation pattern selected by the normal variation pattern selection table 222ba is set.

Here, as shown in FIG. 111, in the case of super reach b, the specific variation pattern of SPB1 is the number of specific effects (value of number storage area 223ba) and each value of notified number counter 223bb (number of times storage It is set to be selected when the value of the area 223ba and the value of the notified number counter 223bb) are any of (0, 0), (1, 1), (2, 2), and (3, 3). ing. Similarly, the specific variation pattern of SPB2 is selected when it is either (1, 0), (2, 1), (3, 2), and the variation pattern of SPB3 is (2, 0), ( 3, 1), and the variation pattern of SPB4 is set to be selected when (3, 0).

In the case of the variation pattern type of super reach c, SPC1 in which the stock effect is not executed, SPC2 in which the stock effect is executed once, SPC3 in which the stock effect is executed twice, and the stock effect is executed three times. A specific variation pattern of SPC4 is set. The specific variation patterns of SPB1 to SPB4 differ only in the number of times the stock effect is executed (including 0 times), and the main variation mode is the variation pattern of super reach c that is normally selected ( A variation pattern similar to the variation pattern selected by the normal variation pattern selection table 222ba is set. Note that the values of the set number of specific effects (the value of the number storage area 223ba) and the notified number counter 223bb are the same as in the case of super ready-to-win b, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the case of the special reach variation pattern type, SSP1 in which the stock effect is not executed, SSP2 in which the stock effect is executed once, SSP3 in which the stock effect is executed twice, and SSP4 in which the stock effect is executed three times. specific fluctuation pattern is set. The specific variation patterns of SSP1 to SSP4 differ only in the number of times the stock effect is executed (including 0 times), and the main variation mode is the variation pattern of the special reach that is normally selected (usually A variation pattern similar to the variation pattern selected by the variation pattern selection table 222ba is set. Note that the values of the set number of specific effects (the value of the number storage area 223ba) and the notified number counter 223bb are the same as in the case of super reach B, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As is clear from FIG. 111, the upper limit of the number of times the specific effect is executed differs depending on the type of super ready-to-win, and the type of super ready-to-win to be executed is determined by the upper limit number of times of the displayed stock effect. Predictability can be easily made, and the interest in the game can be improved by increasing the player's taste for the stock presentation.

The number selection table 222bc is a data table for selecting the number of times of the specific effect to be executed in the final variation of the current score effect when it is determined to execute the score effect, and is transmitted from the main controller 110. The value of the number of times of specific effects is defined within a range of 0 to 3 in correspondence with the variable type, the number of currently held balls, and the value of the variable lottery counter 223bc included in the winning information command.

Here, the contents of the frequency selection table 222bc will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 112 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the frequency selection table 222bc. The number of times selection table 222bc is referred to in the process of S2371 in the score effect scenario setting process 2 (S2351: see FIG. 116) executed by the MPU 222 of the audio ramp control device 113, which will be described later, and selects the specific number of times of effect (stock effect is executed). The number of times (that is, the number of specific effects executed in the final variation) is determined. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 117, in the frequency selection table 222bc, for each variation pattern type (per normal reach, super reach A to C (hit and miss, special reach (only hit))), the held ball , the determination value of the variable lottery counter 223bc is set correspondingly.

If the variation pattern type per normal reach is notified by the variation pattern command, if the number of pending balls is 2, if the determination value of the variation lottery counter 223bc is "0 to 9", The number of times of specific performance of 0 times is selected. When the number of pending balls is 3 or 4, the determination value of the variable lottery counter 223bc is 0 specific effects for "0 to 4" and 1 specific effect for "5 to 9". is set. In addition, when a value other than the set determination value is the value of the variable lottery counter 223bc, the specific effect (score effect) is not executed.

When the variation pattern type of super reach a is notified by the variation pattern command, if the number of pending balls is 2, 0 for "0 to 9" as the determination value of the variation lottery counter 223bc The number of times of specific effects is set, the number of times of specific effects is set once for "10 to 29", and the number of times of specific effects is set to 2 times for "30 to 39". When the number of pending balls is 3, the determination value of the variable lottery counter 223bc is set to 0 specific effects for "0 to 29" and 2 specific effects for "30 to 39". ing. When the number of pending balls is 4, the determination value of the variable lottery counter 223bc is 0 specific effects for "0 to 19", 1 specific effect for "20 to 29", and "30". 49”, the specific effect is set twice. In this way, in the case of super reach a, the maximum number of times of specific effects can be selected, which is set to be smaller than super reach bc and special reach, which will be described later. Also, the higher the number of reserved balls, the higher the probability that a value with a large number of specific effects will be selected. As a result, as the number of reserved balls increases, the number of specific effects tends to increase. In addition, when a value other than the set determination value is the value of the variable lottery counter 223bc, the specific effect (score effect) is not executed.

When the variation pattern type of super reach b is notified by the variation pattern command, when the number of pending balls is 2, 0 times for "0 to 9" as the determination value of the variation lottery counter 223bc specific number of effects, 1 specific number of effects for "10 to 35", 2 specific numbers of effects for "36 to 39", 3 specific numbers for "40 to 49" are set respectively. When the number of pending balls is 3, the determination value of the variable lottery counter 223bc is 0 specific effects for "0 to 5", 1 specific effect for "6 to 24", and "25". 2 specific effects are set for "~39", and 3 specific effects are set for "40 to 59". When the number of pending balls is 4, the determination value of the variable lottery counter 223bc is 0 specific effects for "0 to 19", 1 specific effect for "20 to 29", and "30". 2 specific effects are set for "-39", and 3 specific effects are set for "40-69". In this way, in the case of super reach b, the higher the number of reserved balls, the higher the probability that a value with a large number of specific effects will be selected. As a result, as the number of reserved balls increases, the number of specific effects tends to increase. In addition, when a value other than the set determination value is the value of the variable lottery counter 223bc, the specific effect (score effect) is not executed.

When the variation pattern type of super reach c is notified by the variation pattern command, if the number of pending balls is 2, 0 times for "0 to 9" as the determination value of the variation lottery counter 223bc specific number of effects, 1 specific number of effects for "10 to 35", 2 specific numbers of effects for "36 to 39", 3 specific numbers for "40 to 49" are set respectively. When the number of pending balls is 3, the determination value of the variable lottery counter 223bc is 0 specific effects for "0 to 5", 1 specific effect for "6 to 24", and "25". 2 specific effects are set for "~39", and 3 specific effects are set for "40 to 49". When the number of pending balls is 4, the determination value of the variable lottery counter 223bc is 0 specific effects for "0 to 19", 1 specific effect for "20 to 29", and "30". 2 specific effects are set for "-39", and 3 specific effects are set for "40-69". In this way, in the case of super reach b, the higher the number of reserved balls, the higher the probability that a value with a large number of specific effects will be selected. As a result, as the number of reserved balls increases, the number of specific effects tends to increase. In addition, when a value other than the set determination value is the value of the variable lottery counter 223bc, the specific effect (score effect) is not executed.

When the variation pattern type of the special reach is notified by the variation pattern command, when the number of pending balls is 2, the determination value of the variation lottery counter 223bc is "0 to 14" three times. A specific number of performances is set. When the number of pending balls is 3, the determination value of the variable lottery counter 223bc is set to 0 specific effects for "0 to 39" and 1 specific effect for "40 to 49". ing. When the number of pending balls is 4, the determination value of the variable lottery counter 223bc is set to 0 specific effects for "0 to 39" and 3 specific effects for "40 to 49". ing. In this way, in the case of the special reach, when the number of held balls is two than in other variation patterns, only the maximum three times of the specific effect count can be selected, so the specific effect count can be selected. By notifying three times as , it can be expected that special reach, which has a high probability of being selected in the case of a big win, will be executed in the final variation.

The execution timing selection table 222bd is a data table for selecting various effect data (notice data) for executing a specific effect in the final variation, and includes the variation pattern type selected by the specific variation pattern selection table 222bb, It is for selecting the timing for executing the specific effect based on the specific number of times set for the variation pattern type (see FIG. 113). In this embodiment, the variation pattern set by the audio ramp control device 113 is formed by a plurality of blocks. Specifically, if the variation type is super reach a (variation time is 80 seconds), the first notice period (20 seconds), the second notice period (20 seconds), the first reach period (20 seconds) , and the second reach period (20 seconds).

Effect data is set so that the specific effect can be executed at the boundary of each block, and the specific effect is executed in the period selected by the execution timing selection table 222bd among the plurality of specific effect executable periods. Effect data corresponding to the variation pattern selected to be set is set. Note that the timing for executing the specific effect is not limited to the configuration described above, and may be set as appropriate. Alternatively, the number and timing of execution of the specific effect may be determined first, and the variation pattern corresponding to the determined content may be selected.

Here, the contents of the specific effect set in each variation pattern will be explained. For example, in the specific effect executed after the end of the first notice period, an operation guidance display for operating the frame button 23 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the frame button 23 is operated within a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). As a result, a specific effect is executed in which the screen is switched to the notice effect executed during the second notice period. When this specific effect is executed, a suggestive comment suggesting the effect mode of the advance notice effect to be executed during the second notice period is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 . This suggestive comment is configured such that a different display mode is set according to the propriety determination result of the special symbol of the variation.

As a result, it is possible to predict the suitability determination result of the variation by executing the specific effect, so that the player can be motivated to operate the frame button 22 . Note that the effect mode of the specific effect in the relevant period is not limited to this, and for example, the specific effect in the relevant period may be used as the stock effect.

Further, as a specific effect executed after the end of the second notice period, an operation guide display for operating the frame button 23 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the frame button 23 is operated within a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). By doing so, a specific effect indicating that the second advance notice period will be repeatedly executed and a specific effect indicating that the ready-to-win effect will be executed are executed. As the specific effect executed during the ready-to-win period, similarly to each specific effect described above, a display for operating the frame button 23 is executed. Suggestive comment display is performed.

In addition, the effect data that can be executed in each block is configured to be set according to the number of points to be given in the variation, and the stock effect is always performed during the period before the timing when the specific effect is executed. configured to run. As a result, the specific effect can be appropriately executed according to the number of times the game has been charged, and the player does not feel uncomfortable.

The win display score selection table 222be is a data table for selecting a score to be given in each variation display during the score presentation, and is referred to when the final variation of the score presentation wins a big win. (See Figure 114).

The processing of S2374 in the score effect scenario setting process 2 (S2351: see FIG. 116) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113, which will be described later, determines the total given score (the number of specific effects) determined by the number of times selection table 222bc. 6) is calculated, and the calculated value is stored in the total given score storage area 223o. The remaining score that can be obtained is calculated (determined) from the value stored in the total given score storage area 223o and the value of the given score counter 223p that stores the value of the currently obtained score. and the number of remaining variations including the final variation, a score is selected from the win display score selection table 222be. Note that in FIG. 114, score values that can be obtained are set for the remaining score (the value indicated by the displayable remaining score) and the number of remaining fluctuations. Specifically, when the remaining score is "18" and the number of remaining fluctuations is 2, a value in the range of "0 to 1" is set, and the value in the range is the obtained production counter. 223f value. In this manner, the score range shown in FIG. 114 is selected by the remaining score and the number of remaining fluctuations, and the value of 1 is selected from the selected value range by the value of the effect counter 223f. It is By configuring in this way, the score can be selected more randomly, and a freshness can be given to the score presentation.

The failure display score selection table 222bf is a data table for selecting a score to be given in each variation display during the score presentation, and is referred to when the final variation of the score presentation is a failure ( See Figure 115). Note that the score selection method is the same as that of the win display score selection table 222be already described above, and the only difference is the set score ranges, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted. As shown in FIGS. 114 and 115, when the lottery result is a big win, the probability of selecting a high score is set higher. It is configured to set a high degree of expectation for a big hit in the final variation.

In this way, by varying the score given during the score presentation based on the lottery result of the special pattern corresponding to the final variation of the score presentation, the period from the start of the score presentation to the execution of the final variation. Also in this case, it is possible to make the player interested in the progress of the production.

Next, referring to FIG. 110(b), the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this embodiment will be described. In the third embodiment, a frequency storage area 223ba and a notified frequency counter 223bb are added to the above-described second embodiment. Since other configurations are the same as those of the second embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The number-of-times storage area 223ba is an area for storing the number of score effects selected in the number-of-times selection table 222bc. The values stored here are referred to when setting a variation pattern corresponding to each variation display of the score effect. It is also referred to when displaying the maximum charge amount display area Db2b value of the stock display area Db2 displayed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 . The value displayed in the maximum charge amount display area D2b2 may be the value stored in the count storage area 223ba or the maximum value that can be stored in the count storage area 223ba.

For example, if the value stored in the number of times storage area 223ba is used, the degree of expectation for a big hit may be varied according to which variation of the score effect is used to acquire the charge amount. As a result, the degree of expectation for a big win can be expressed in a complicated manner, and the performance effect can be enhanced. In addition, if the maximum value (3 in the present embodiment) that can be stored in the count storage area 223ba is used, the maximum value that is unknown whether or not it can be obtained in the current score presentation is displayed. , it is possible to relatively discriminate the degree of expectation for the big win of the current score performance, and to provide the player with the enjoyment of prediction. Note that the two values described above may be configured to be displayed together in the stock display area Db2.

The notified number counter 223bb is a counter for storing the stock number already notified during the score presentation, and is displayed in the acquired charge amount display area Db2a of the stock display area Db2 of the third symbol display device 81. The same value as the value is measured. The value of this counter is referred to when setting the effect of the variation display with respect to the remaining variation of the score effect.

The variable lottery counter 223bc is a loop counter whose value is periodically updated in the same manner as the effect counter 223f described above, and the value is acquired when the specific effect count is selected using the frequency selection table 222bc. .

<Regarding control processing in the third embodiment>
Next, control processing in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 to 118. FIG. The third embodiment differs from each of the above-described embodiments in that when it is determined that the score effect is to be executed, the number of executions of the specific effect to be executed in the final change of the score effect is set ( See Figure 116). Then, in the variable display setting process during the score effect, the score to be displayed is determined, and when the accumulated value of the determined score reaches a predetermined amount (exceeds the lap value), the charge amount is stocked. They are different in terms of setting (see FIG. 117). Also, in the score effect, the difference is that the specific effect is not set for changes other than the final change (see FIG. 117). Finally, for the variation pattern set in the final variation of the score presentation, a process of setting a variation pattern based on the number of times the charge amount is acquired and the number of times the specific presentation is executed, and the specific presentation is executed. The difference is that there is a process for setting timing (see FIG. 118).

First, the contents of the score effect scenario setting process 2 (S2351) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 116 is a flow chart showing the contents of the score effect scenario setting process 2 (S2351). When the score effect scenario setting process 2 (S2351) is executed, the same processes of S2352 to S2356 as the above-described score effect scenario setting process (see FIG. 94) are executed. is read out (S2371), and the number of specific effects corresponding to the winning information of this time is determined using the number of times selection table 222bc (S2372). The frequency selection table 222bc referred to here includes, as described with reference to FIG. The value of the number of times of specific effects is defined within a range of 0 to 3 in correspondence with the value of the counter.

Here, when the variation type is per normal reach and the number of reserved balls is 3 or 4, a score effect is selected in which the specific effect is executed 0 times or 1 time. Alternatively, a pattern in which no score effect is executed is selected. For example, if the value of the variable lottery counter 223bc is in the range of "0 to 4", a score effect with a specific effect count of 0 is selected. The score effect in which the number of specific effects is 0 is a score effect in which the score given during the score effect does not reach a predetermined number (6 points) and the specific effect is not executed. In this way, by configuring the scoring effect in which the specific effect is not executed even once, the degree of expectation for the specific effect to be executed during the scoring effect is lowered while increasing the chances of executing the scoring effect. You can prevent it from happening.

Further, when the variation type is normal reach hit, the maximum number of selectable specific effects is defined to be one. This is because the effect period of the final score effect in which the specific effect is executed is 30 seconds, which is shorter than other variation types (super reach, special reach). In this way, by prescribing the number of specific effects to be executed in advance corresponding to the effect period of the final score effect in which the specific effect is executed, it is possible to suppress the execution of effects that make the player feel uncomfortable. can.

Further, the frequency selection table 222bc of the present embodiment defines that the larger the number of pending balls (the longer the target period of the scoring effect), the easier it is to execute more specific effects. As a result, it is possible to make the player think to increase the number of points given in the score giving effect according to the length of the period during which the pre-scoring effect is executed. A game can be played positively in order to continue the state in which the number is large.

Further, in the frequency selection table 222bc of the present embodiment, it is defined that the specific effect frequency is selected regardless of the success/failure determination result for variation types other than normal reach. As a result, depending on the number of points given during the scoring effect (the number of stocks acquired during the pre-scoring effect), the result of the final scoring effect (lottery result of the special pattern corresponding to the final scoring effect) will be given to the player in advance. It is possible to prevent being detected.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as described above, it is specified that the specific number of effects is selected regardless of the result of the success/failure determination. may be stipulated. In this case, for example, when the number of reserved balls is a predetermined number (for example, 3), it is preferable to configure the number of times of specific effects to be selected to be different depending on the success/failure determination result. Specifically, when the variation type is Super Reach B and there are 3 reserved balls, if the result of the hit/fail judgment is hit, it is possible to set 3 times as the number of specific effects, and if the result of the hit/fail judgment is off , it is preferable to configure such that 3 times cannot be set as the number of specific effects.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to predict the performance result of the current score performance by grasping the number of balls held when the score performance is executed and the number of times the specific performance is executed. Therefore, the production effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, the number of times selection table 222bc of the present embodiment is a special reach, which is a variation type with the highest degree of expectation for a big hit, and when the number of pending balls is 2, the number of specific effects is 3 times. It is configured to be executable only. Then, when the number of reserved balls is 2, the ratio of the number of specific effects to 3 is configured so that the variation type of special reach is the highest. As a result, the degree of expectation for a big win can be increased when a score presentation that surprises the player is executed, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the special reach, which is the variation type with the highest expectation for a big hit, when the number of pending balls is 3 or 4, the score effect in which the number of specific effects is 0 times is more likely to be selected than other variation types. It consists of As a result, even if the number of times of the specific performance is 0, the content of the final score performance can make the player expect a big hit, so that the player can watch the score performance until the end without getting bored. can be done.

Returning to FIG. 116, the description continues. When the processing of S2372 is finished, it is then determined whether or not to execute the score effect (S2359), and if it is determined to be executed (S2359: Yes), that is, in the process of S2372, the number of specific effects in the number of times selection table 222bc is 0. When the value of the variable lottery counter 223bc, which is defined to be ~3 times, is obtained, the value of the determined number of times of specific effects is set in the number storage area 223ba (S2373), and the value corresponding to the value of the determined number of times of specific effects is set. Within the range, the total given score is determined and stored in the total given score storage area 223o (S2374).

Here, the range corresponding to the value of the determined number of specific effects is, for example, when the value of the determined number of point effects is 0, the range of total given points is "0 to 5", and when it is 1, "6 to 11", "12 to 17" in the case of two times, and "18" in the case of three times are defined as the range of total awarded points. Then, a predetermined lottery counter value of a performance counter 223f is obtained from the range of the total given points corresponding to the determined number of specific performances, and one score is determined as the total given score of the current score performance. . When the processing of S2374 is finished, the processing of S2361 to S2363, which is the same as the specific effect scenario setting processing (see FIG. 94) described above, is executed, and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 117, the contents of the pre-score effect setting process 2 executed in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 117 is a flow chart schematically showing the contents of the pre-score effect setting process 2. FIG. This pre-score effect setting process 2 (S2853) is different from the above-described pre-score effect setting process (see FIG. 96) in that the content for determining the score to be given in this variation is changed, and The difference is that the content of processing executed according to the score is changed.

When the pre-score effect setting process 2 (S2853) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the score effect of this time is a score effect in which the success/failure determination result is a hit (S3451). Then, when it is determined that it is a win score effect (S3451: Yes), the display score for the change is determined using the win display score selection table 222be (S3452), and the process proceeds to S3454. On the other hand, in the process of S3451, if it is determined that the score effect is not a hit (no) (S3451: No), the display score for the change is determined using the display score selection table 222bf for failure (S3453 ), the process proceeds to S3454.

Here, referring to FIGS. 114 and 115, the content defined in the hit score selection table 222be and the loss display score selection table 222bf will be described. , and the number of points that can be given in the current score effect, the range of points that can be given in the current variation is defined, respectively, and is obtained from a dedicated counter (not shown) of the effect counter 223f. One value (score) is selected from the range of points that can be given according to the calculated value (a loop counter that is periodically updated like the effect counter 223f).

In addition, a part of the range of points that can be given overlaps between the hit score selection table 222be and the loss display score selection table 222bf. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether or not the score presentation of this time is the score presentation corresponding to winning, based on the number of points given in one variation display. On the other hand, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, for example, when the number of remaining fluctuations is 3 and the remaining score that can be displayed is 13 points, the score presentation of this time is displayed only when the score presentation corresponds to winning. Seven points can be selected as points. In addition, it is configured so that the number of points that can be displayed (total given points) and remaining points that can be displayed in this score presentation cannot be grasped by the player.

By constructing in this way, only a player who has a detailed understanding of the rules of awarding points can grasp whether or not the current score presentation is a score presentation corresponding to winning. , it is possible to provide a sense of satisfaction to the player who has played the game continuously for a long period of time.

In the process of S3454, the value of the given score counter 223p is read (S3454), the current display score and the value of the given score counter 223p are added (S3455), and the added value is the upper limit value (lap value (6 points) ) is exceeded (S3456). In the process of S3456, if it is determined that the cycle value has been exceeded (S3456: Yes), the number of times the cycle value has been exceeded is set in the reported number counter 223bb (S3457), and the process proceeds to S3458.

As for the number of times set in the processing of S3457, for example, if the number of points currently given is 4 points and the score displayed this time is 5 points, the number of added points is 9 points, and the lap value is changed. Since it will be in a state of exceeding once (charge 1: gauge 3), the value of 1 is added to the value of the notified number counter 223bb as the number of times the lap value has been exceeded. In addition, in the process of S3457, a maximum value of 3 is added to the value of the notified number counter 223bb.

In the process of S3458, a variation pattern accompanied by a score giving effect in a mode corresponding to the determined score is determined (S3458), and the value stored in the number storage area 223ba is made to correspond to the value added to the notified number counter 223bb. is updated (S3459). As a result, the number of times of the specific effect that has not yet been reported to the number of times storage area 223ba can be grasped. Next, the processing of S3461 to S3463, which is the same as the processing of S3412 to S3414 of the preliminary score effect setting processing (see FIG. 96) of the second embodiment described above, is executed, and this processing ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 118, the contents of the final score effect setting process 2 (S2854) will be described. FIG. 118 is a flow chart showing the contents of the final score effect setting process 2 (S2854). This final score effect setting process 2 (S2854) is different from the final score effect setting process (see FIG. 97) of the second embodiment described above in that the process of selecting a variation pattern is different.

When the final score effect setting process 2 (S2854) is executed, first, the value stored in the number of times storage area 223ba (specific number of times of effect performed in the current score effect) is read out (S3551), and then notified The value of the number counter 223bb is read (S3552). Then, a variation pattern is selected using the specific variation pattern selection table 222bb based on the value of the number of times storage area 223ba and the value of the notified number counter 223bb (S3553).

Specific fluctuation pattern selection table 222bb, as described above with reference to FIG. Different variation patterns are selected corresponding to the number of effects (the number displayed in the acquired charge amount display area Db2a).

Specifically, for each variation type, the variation pattern 1 is set to an effect mode in which the charge amount is not acquired in the final score effect, and the change pattern 2 is an effect mode in which the charge amount is acquired once in the final score effect. However, the variation pattern 3 defines a performance mode in which the charge amount is obtained twice in the final score performance, and the variation pattern 4 defines a performance mode in which the charge amount is obtained three times in the final score performance.

In this way, by varying the variation pattern selected in accordance with the number of times to be charged in the final score presentation, the performance mode to be executed in the final score presentation can be set without discomfort to the player. Since the plurality of variation patterns 1 to 4 defined here are of the same variation type, the variation period to be executed is the same. Therefore, in this embodiment, the effect mode of the score giving effect to be executed during the final score effect is set corresponding to each variation pattern.

After the processing of S3553 is finished, next, the execution timing selection table 222bd is used to set the timing for executing the specific effect for the variation pattern selected in the process of S3552 (S3554), and the above-described final score effect setting is performed. The processes of S3555 and S3556, which are the same as the processes of S3510 and S3511 of the process (see FIG. 97), are executed, and this process ends.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to limit the variation that executes the specific effect to the final variation (final score effect), so when executing the score effect, fluctuation display other than the final variation (during pre-scoring effect) There is no need to prepare a plurality of variation patterns for . Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load when setting the score effect.

In addition, it is possible to set a variety of variation patterns for the variation display of the final variation (final score presentation), thereby enhancing the presentation effect. Specifically, since the variation pattern can be set according to the number of times the specific effect is executed, the specific effect can be executed without discomfort, and the specific effect is set at the timing when the variation pattern develops significantly. Therefore, the performance effect can be further enhanced.

Furthermore, by notifying in advance the number of times the specific effect is executed, the player can predict the degree of expectation for the big win based on the variation pattern executed in the final variation and the number of times the specific effect is executed. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, control processing in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 119 to 125. FIG. In the fourth embodiment, in contrast to the above-described third embodiment, when it is determined that the score effect is to be executed, the score effect is executed from the pre-variation period of the score effect (the special symbol variation in which the score effect is started) 1 award scenario from a plurality of award scenarios having different award patterns as a score award pattern during the period until the start of the special symbol variation (final variation) corresponding to the winning information determined to be is set, and the timing of awarding points is managed using the set scenario.

Then, the production mode of the production display (final score production) executed during the final fluctuation period of the score production (the period during which the special symbol fluctuation corresponding to the winning information determined to be executed as the score production is executed) is The difference is that they are selected based on a set grant scenario.

In addition, the difference is that the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot indicated by the performance mode selected as the final score performance is configured to vary according to the set granting scenario.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the fourth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 119, the electrical configuration of the fourth embodiment will be described. The fourth embodiment differs from the above-described second embodiment in that the contents of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the MPU 201 of the sound lamp control device 113 are changed. Since other configurations are the same as those of the second embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 119(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 201 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment. In the fourth embodiment, a scoring scenario selection table 222ca, a scenario variation pattern 1 selection table 222cb, and a scenario variation pattern 2 selection table 222cc are added to the ROM 222 (see FIG. 89(a)) in the second embodiment. are doing. Since other configurations are the same as those of the second embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The score giving scenario selection table 222ca is a data table for selecting whether or not to execute a scoring effect and a pattern for giving points other than the final variation of the scoring effect (preliminary score effect period), and is transmitted from the main controller 110. Various grant patterns (grant scenario) is specified.

Here, the score giving scenario selection table 222ca will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 120 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the scoring scenario selection table 222ca. In this score giving scenario selection table 222ca, three types of giving patterns (giving scenarios) are defined as the patterns of giving points to be given in the pre-score effect period of the score effect.

Specifically, when granting scenario 1 is selected, during the pre-score rendering period, it becomes easier to set a score rendering for evenly granting the total number of points granted during the current scoring rendering. , when granting scenario 2 is selected, the score granting effect tends to be set biasedly in the first half of the pre-scoring effect period, and when granting scenario 3 is selected, it is likely to be set in the second half of the pre-scoring effect period. , the score effect is set so that the score giving effect is likely to be set biasedly.

In S7007 of the score effect scenario setting process 3 (S2351) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, which will be described later, the score effect scenario selection table 222ca (see FIG. 120) is read, and the selected score effect scenario (scenario A to C: see FIG. 90), the corresponding score giving scenario (giving scenario 1 to giving scenario 3) is selected according to the value of the number of specific effects and the value of the second effect counter.

Specifically, when the variation pattern type (notified by the winning information command) selected in the final variation is special reach (hit) and super reach A to C (hit), the number of specific effects is one score When the effect scenario (scenario A) is selected, the value of the second effect counter is given scenario 1 for "0 to 39", given scenario 1 for "40 to 89", and given scenario 1 for "90 to 99". ”, and a score effect scenario (scenario B) with a specific effect count of 2 is selected, the value of the second effect counter is set to “0 to 39”. Given scenario 2 is set for “40 to 89”, given scenario 1 is set for “90 to 99”, and given scenario 3 is set, and the score production scenario (scenario C) with a specific number of times of 3 times is selected. If the value of the second effect counter is "0 to 39", grant scenario 2 is given, "40 to 89" is given scenario 1, and "90 to 99" is given scenario 3. 120, and, similarly, a given scenario type is assigned to each variation type as shown in FIG.

In this way, by setting the timing of giving the points given during the score presentation based on a predetermined giving scenario, the performance mode of the score giving presentation executed during the score giving presentation can be intentionally changed. can be different. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the total number of points to be given in the current score presentation at an early stage, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

The scenario variation pattern 1 selection table 222cb is a table for selecting a variation pattern to be executed during the pre-score presentation period from among the score presentations, and is a variation included in the winning information command transmitted from main controller 110. Various variation patterns are defined corresponding to the type, the number of remaining variations of the score effect, and the type of grant scenarios (grant scenarios 1 to 3) set in the current score effect.

Here, the scenario variation pattern 1 selection table 222cb will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 121 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the scenario variation pattern 1 selection table 222cb. In this scenario variation pattern 1 selection table 222cb, variation patterns 1 to 3 with different scoring frequencies are defined for each variation pattern that can be executed during the pre-score presentation period of the specific presentation.

Variation pattern types corresponding to variation patterns 1 to 3 are set for various variation patterns. Specifically, if it is a short out variation type, short out 1 (corresponding to variation pattern 1), short out 2 (corresponding to variation pattern 2), short out 3 (corresponding to variation pattern 3) are set respectively ing. Similarly, in FIG. 121, the number attached to the end of the name of each variation type corresponds to the number of the type of variation patterns 1 to 3, respectively.

Of the variation patterns 1 to 3 defined corresponding to each variation type, variation pattern 1 is a variation pattern in which a score giving effect that can give the most points is executed, and variation pattern 3 is the most given. This is a variation pattern in which the number of points to be obtained is reduced, and a variation pattern in which a point giving effect is executed in which the number of points that can be given in the variation pattern 2 is between the above-described variation pattern 1 and variation pattern 3.

Specifically, when the variation type is short deviation (7 seconds) and provision scenario 1 is set, "short deviation 2" is selected regardless of the number of remaining variations of the score effect. Similarly, as shown in the scenario variation pattern 1 selection table 222cb of FIG. is configured to select a variation pattern dedicated to the continuous advance notice effect.

The scenario variation pattern 2 selection table 222cc (see FIG. 122) is a table for selecting a variation pattern to be executed during the final score presentation period (final variation in the continuous advance notice presentation) among the score presentations. Various variation patterns are defined corresponding to the variation type included in the winning information command transmitted from the device 110, the winning/failure determination result, and the type of the awarding scenario set in the current score presentation.

Here, the scenario variation pattern 2 selection table 222cc will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 122 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the scenario variation pattern 2 selection table 222cc. In this scenario variation pattern 2 selection table 222cc, variation patterns 1 to 3 are defined for each variation type executed as the final score effect of the specific effect. Note that, in the same way as described in the scenario variation pattern 1 selection table 222cb (see FIG. 121) described above, variation pattern 1 is a variation pattern in which a point giving effect that can give the most points is executed. Variation pattern 3 is a variation pattern in which the number of points that can be given is the lowest, and the number of points that can be given in variation pattern 2 is between the above-described variation pattern 1 and variation pattern 3. A variation pattern in which a score giving effect is executed. is.

Specifically, when the variation pattern command of the normal reach to be hit is notified, if the set grant scenario is grant scenario 1, the value of the counter for variable effect is not limited to normal 1 A variation pattern (variation pattern corresponding to variation pattern 1 of the winning normal reach) is selected. When grant scenario 2 is set, normal 2 (variation pattern corresponding to variation pattern 2 of normal reach to be hit) for variable effect counter value "0 to 79", variable effect counter Normal 1 (variation pattern corresponding to variation pattern 1 out of the winning normal reaches) is configured to be selected for each value of "80 to 99". When grant scenario 3 is set, normal 3 (variation pattern corresponding to variation pattern 3 of normal reach to be hit) for variable effect counter value "0 to 79", variable effect counter Normal 1 (variation pattern corresponding to variation pattern 1 out of the winning normal reaches) is configured to be selected for each value of "80 to 99".

Even if the normal reach variation type is notified by the variation pattern command, the variation type to be executed is based on the given scenario set as shown in FIG. 122 and the value of the acquired variation effect counter selected. Also, "Super" indicates the variation type of super reach, and "Super 1" indicates that the variation type corresponding to variation pattern 1 in the variation pattern of super reach is selected. Similarly, the number shown at the end of the type name indicates the number of the variation pattern type. Moreover, the special indicates that it is a special reach, and the end of the type name indicates the number of the variation pattern type.

Next, referring to FIG. 110(b), the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this embodiment will be described. In the fourth embodiment, an additional scenario storage area 223ca is added to the above-described second embodiment. Since other configurations are the same as those of the second embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The given scenario storage area 223ca is an area for temporarily storing the given scenario selected using the score given scenario selection table 222ca. The provision scenario stored here is referred to when setting a variation pattern corresponding to each variation display of the score effect.

In the given scenario storage area 223ca, when it is determined in the score effect scenario setting process 3 (see FIG. 123) to be described later that the score effect is to be executed (S7005 in FIG. 123), the selected given scenario is stored ( S7008 in FIG. 123). Then, the stored provision scenario is referred to when selecting a variation pattern using the scenario variation pattern 1 selection table 222cb in the preliminary score effect setting process 3 (S2853 in FIG. 124) (see S7103 in FIG. 124). Also, in the final score effect setting process 3 (S2854 in FIG. 125), it is referred to when selecting a variation pattern using the scenario variation pattern 2 selection table 222cc (see S7206 in FIG. 125).

<Regarding control processing in the fourth embodiment>
Next, control processing in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 123 to 125. FIG. In the fourth embodiment, in contrast to each of the above-described embodiments, when it is determined that a score effect is to be executed, a pattern of giving points (giving scenario) that is given during the score effect is selected (see FIG. 123) and selected. Based on the provided scenario, select the variation pattern of each variation display during the preliminary score presentation period of the score presentation (see FIG. 124), and select the variation pattern of the variation display in the final score presentation of the score presentation (FIG. 125) See).

First, the contents of the score effect scenario setting process 3 (S2351) executed in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. This score effect scenario setting process 3 (S2351) is different from the above-described score effect scenario setting process (see FIG. 94) of the second embodiment, and is a process for executing a score effect on the variable display that is currently fluctuating. The difference is that it is deleted, and that processing for setting a grant scenario is added when it is determined that the score effect is to be executed. Other contents are the same, and detailed descriptions of the same elements are omitted.

When the score effect scenario setting process 3 (S2351) is executed, first, the process of S7001, which is the same as S2352 of the second embodiment described above, is executed. The processing of S7002 and S7003 is executed. When the processing of S7003 is finished, next, the value of the number of specific effects corresponding to the selected score effect scenario is stored in the number of times storage area 223ba (S7004).

After the processing of S7004 is completed, it is next determined whether or not to execute the scoring effect (S7005), and if it is determined not to execute the scoring effect (S7005: No), the scoring effect scenario of the second embodiment described above is executed. The processes of S7011 and S7012 which are the same as the processes of S2364 and S2365 of the setting process (see FIG. 94) are executed to turn on the effect prohibition flag 223j (S7010), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S7005, if it is determined that the scoring effect is to be executed (S7005; Yes), the score giving scenario selection table 222ca is read out (S7006), and the scoring scenario corresponding to the winning information of this time is selected from the score giving scenario selection table. 222ca is used for selection (S7007). Next, the selected grant scenarios (grant scenarios 1 to 3) are stored in the grant scenario storage area 223ca (S7008), and S7009, which is the same as S2361 of the score effect scenario setting process of the second embodiment (see FIG. 94), is executed. , the above-described processing of S7010 is executed, and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 124, the content of the pre-score effect setting process 3 (S2853) will be described. FIG. 124 is a flow chart showing the contents of the pre-score effect setting process 3 (S2853). This pre-score effect setting process 3 (S2853) executes a process for setting the variation pattern of each variation display during the pre-score effect in this embodiment. For the setting process 2 (see FIG. 117), the process of setting the variation pattern during the pre-score effect is set based on the given scenario set in the score effect scenario setting process 3 (see FIG. 123). The difference is that the process is changed to

When the pre-score effect setting process 3 (S2853) is executed, first, the given scenario stored in the given scenario storage area 223ca is read (S7101), and then the value of the effect change number counter 223m is read (S7102). . Then, the scenario variation pattern 1 selection table 222cb is used to select the current variation pattern (S7103), and the given score corresponding to the selected variation pattern is determined (S7104).

After the processing of S7104 is finished, next, the value corresponding to the determined score is added to the value of the given score counter 223p (S7105), which is the same as S3456 to S3458 of the pre-score effect setting processing 2 (see FIG. 117) described above. The processing from S7106 to S7108 is executed, the value of the effect variation counter 223m is subtracted by 1 (S7109), and this processing ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 125, the contents of the final score effect setting process 3 (S2854) will be described. FIG. 125 is a flow chart showing the details of the final score effect setting process 3 (S2854). This final score effect setting process 3 (S2854) executes the process for setting the variation pattern of the final score effect in this embodiment. When the final score effect setting process 3 (S2854) is executed, first, the value of the notified number counter 223bb is read (S7201), and the value stored in the number storage area 223ba is read (S7202). Then, the value read in S7201 is subtracted from the value read in S7202 to determine whether there is a difference (S7203).

If it is determined in the processing of S7203 that there is a difference (the number of times that has not yet been reported among the set number of times of specific effects) (S7203: Yes), the value of the given score counter 223p is read out (S7204) and corresponds to the difference value. Then, the difference given score is calculated (S7205). In other words, the number of points to be given required to notify all of the preset number of specific effects is calculated with respect to the points that are currently given.

After completing the process of S7205, next, the scenario variation pattern 2 selection table 222cc is used to select the current variation pattern (S7206). Next, it is determined whether the current variation is a hit variation (S7207), and if it is determined to be a hit variation, the effect mode corresponding to the given score calculated in the processing of S7205 is set (S7208), and this End the process.

On the other hand, in the process of S7207, if it is determined that the current variation is not a winning variation (S7207: No), the effect given score is calculated within a range that does not reach the next round value (upper limit) (S7209), and the difference The given score and the effect given score are added up (S7210), the processing of S7208 described above is executed, and this processing ends. In other words, in the present embodiment, as the final score effect, if the current variation is not a hit variation, the processing (S7209 and S7210) for positively giving points within a range that does not increase the number of specific effects is executed. It is configured so that By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player expect that the number of specific effects executed during the final score effect will increase.

<Regarding the first effect example showing the effect mode of the variable display in each embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 126 to 130, a detailed description will be given of the mode of presentation set in the variable display in each of the above-described embodiments. Each variable display executed when the score effect is being executed as described above is configured so that a plurality of score giving effects can be executed during the variable display. Various score giving effects are set based on scores, scenarios, and the like.

Here, with reference to FIG. 126(a), the period configuration of each variation pattern corresponding to the variation type of the special symbol will be described. FIG. 126(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the period structure of each variation pattern corresponding to the variation type of the special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 126 (a), each variation pattern is a notice period (first notice period, second notice period) before the reach state is displayed, and a reach period during which the reach state is displayed (first reach period , second reach period, and special reach period).

Next, with reference to FIG. 126(b), an effect mode that can be executed during the notice period (pre-reach period) in each variation pattern will be described. FIG. 126(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents stipulated in the presentation mode that can be executed during the advance notice period (pre-reach period).

As shown in FIG. 126(b), it is stipulated that four types of presentation modes (notice A to notice D) can be executed during the notice period, and points are given for each presentation mode. The number of times of directing to suggest whether or not (number of times of suggesting P), the number of times that points can be given (number of times of P display), the range of points that can be obtained for one display of P (number of acquired P / display), and whether or not it is an effect for operating the frame button 22 (whether or not there is an operation) is defined.

Specifically, the notice A is an effect in which the number of P grant suggestions is 2, the number of P display times is 0 to 2, the acquired P number/display is 1 to 2, and the operation of the frame button 22 is unnecessary. is an effect in which the number of P grant suggestions is 5, the number of P displays is 1 to 5, the acquired P number/display is 1, and operation of the frame button 22 is unnecessary, and the advance notice C is the P grant suggestion number of times. , P display count is 1 time, acquired P count/display is 1 to 8, and operation of the frame button 22 is not required. The P number/display is 0 to 18, and the operation of the frame button 22 is required.

Next, with reference to FIG. 127, an effect mode that can be executed during the reach period in each variation pattern will be described. FIG. 127 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the performance mode that can be executed during the ready-to-win period.

As shown in FIG. 127, it is stipulated that 5 types of production mode (reach A to reach E) can be executed during the ready-to-win period, and it is suggested whether or not points are given for each of the production modes. The number of times of performance (number of suggestions to give P), the number of times that points can be given (number of times of P display), the range of points that can be obtained for one display of P (number of acquired P/display), Whether or not it is an effect to operate the frame button 22 (whether or not there is an operation), the expectation of winning, and the period during which it can be executed are defined.

Specifically, when the effect mode is reach A, the number of P (point) provision suggestions is "2", the number of P display is "0 to 2", and the acquired P number/display is "1 to 6". , and NO (no operation notice effect is set) is selected as the operation notice effect (whether or not there is an operation). In addition, as an explanation of reach A, it is possible to acquire a high score (points) as the degree of expectation of P grant, but it is a production mode in which there is a possibility of 0 points. The degree of expectation for the jackpot is set to be “low” and low. The executable period during which the effect mode of reach A is executed is set to the first reach period (see FIG. 126(a)). As for the ready-to-win game B, as shown in FIG. 127, similar to the effect mode of the ready-to-win game A, each score giving effect content is selected. As shown in FIG. 127, the production mode of reach B is a production mode in which at least one point can be acquired, but it is set to be more difficult than the production mode of reach A to obtain a high score. there is

The ready-to-win effect C has a medium-ranked win expectation, and can be executed during the first ready-to-win period and the second ready-to-win period (see FIG. 126(a)). The ready-to-win effect D has a high-ranked win expectation. , can be executed in the first reach period and the second reach period (see FIG. 126 (a)), the reach performance E has a very high winning expectation, and the special reach period (see FIG. 126 (a)) is set to executable.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the first production example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 128, the electrical configuration in the first example of effect will be described. FIG. 128(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 201 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the first example of effect. In the first effect example, in the variation pattern selection table 222a of the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 201 of the audio ramp control device 113, the final variation pattern corresponding to the final score effect executed in the final variation of the score effect is selected. The difference is that a variation pattern selection table 222da is added. Other configurations are the same as those of the above-described fourth embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 129, the contents defined in the final variation pattern selection table 222da in the first example of effect will be described. FIG. 129 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the final variation pattern selection table 222da. In this final variation pattern selection table 222da, as the variation pattern of the final variation in the score effect (variation pattern in which the final score effect is executed), the variation type included in the winning information command transmitted from the main controller 110 and the winning/failure determination An effect mode (score giving effect) set for each period of the variation pattern is defined in correspondence with the result and the remaining number of points (difference) to be given in the current score effect.

Specifically, when the variation type is normal reach and the win/fail determination result is hit, and the difference value is 1, the selected variation pattern is the announcement effect (score giving effect) in the first notice period ) is not set, "notice B (given score 1 (1P))" is set as the score giving effect in the second notice period, the effect mode of "reach B" is defined in the first reach period, and the second reach In the period, a variation pattern is selected in which the performance mode is not selected.

Similarly, when the difference is 2 to 5, no notice effect (score giving effect) is set during the first notice period, and "notice A" is set as the score giving effect during the second notice period. In the ready-to-win period, the effect mode of "ready-to-win C" is defined, and in the second ready-to-win period, a variation pattern in which no effect mode is selected is selected. When the difference is 6, "notice D" is set as the score giving effect during the first notice period, "notice A" is set as the score giving effect during the second notice period, and "reach D" effect mode is defined, and a variation pattern is selected in which the effect mode is not selected in the second ready-to-win period. Similarly, when the result of the win/loss determination is NO, the advance notice type or effect mode is selected corresponding to each period as shown in FIG. 129 . In addition, super indicates the variation pattern of super reach, and corresponds to each period corresponding to each of the success/failure determination results (hit, miss) in the same way as normal reach. It is set in the final variation pattern selection table 222da so that the notice type or effect mode is selected.

In addition, the special indicates the variation pattern of the special reach, and the special reach (a performance mode that is not set for other variation patterns) is set over the first reach period and the second reach period.

<Regarding control processing of the sound lamp control device 113 in the first example of effect>
In this first effect example, in place of the final score effect setting process 3 (see FIG. 125) executed by the sound ramp control device 113, the final score effect setting process 4 is executed in contrast to the above-described fourth embodiment. It is different in that Here, the contents of the final score effect setting process 4 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 130 is a flow chart showing the contents of the final score effect setting process 4. FIG. This final score effect setting process 4 (S2854) differs from the above-described final score effect setting process 3 (see FIG. 125) in the processing content for selecting a variation pattern using the difference given score. are the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same elements, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 130, when the final score effect setting process 4 (S2854) is executed, the same processes of S7201 to S7205 as the final score effect setting process 3 (see FIG. 125) are executed. And, when the processing of S7205 is completed, the final variation pattern is selected using the final variation pattern selection table 222da (S7251), and this processing is terminated.

<About the second production example>
You may use the production|presentation shown below with respect to each embodiment mentioned above. For example, in the above-described third embodiment, a configuration is used in which the player can be notified in advance of the number of specific effects to be executed in the final variation of the score effect. A configuration that can notify the player in advance of the performance execution timing may be used. Here, with reference to FIGS. 131 to 137, a description will be given of a second effect example capable of notifying the player in advance of the execution timing of the specific effect executed in the final variation of the score effect.

In this second effect example, the execution timing of the specific effect executed in the final variation of the score effect is the final variation during the variation one before the final variation (pre-final variation) among the plurality of variations in which the score effect is performed. It is configured to execute a notification effect (countdown effect) capable of informing the player of the timing at which the specific effect is executed by variation. By configuring in this way, the player can be made to predict in advance the content of the effect to be executed in the final score effect of the score effect, so that the player can play a game with a sense of expectation. can.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that a long variation time is easily selected when a special symbol jackpot is won. Therefore, the length of the period notified by the countdown presentation can heighten the expectation that the score presentation of this time is executed corresponding to the special pattern of winning the jackpot.

First, with reference to FIG. 131, description will be given of the content of the effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 in the second example of effect. Figure 131 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the countdown effect is executed in the pre-final variation, and Figure 131 (b) 10 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display screen of a countdown effect at the time when the final variation is started; FIG.

As shown in FIG. 131 (a), when the countdown effect is executed in the pre-final variation, the timing at which the specific effect is executed in the next variation (final variation of the score effect) is the first countdown display area Dg10a and the second 2 is displayed in the countdown display area Dg10b.

Here, in the second example of effect, as the above-described countdown effect, a plurality of specific effect execution timings to be executed in the final change of the score effect can be displayed. The execution timing of the specific effect to be executed first in the final change of is displayed, and the execution timing of the specific effect to be executed later in the final change of the score effect is displayed in the second countdown display area Dg10b.

According to the example shown in FIG. 131(a), "15 seconds" is displayed in the first countdown display area Dg10a, and "preparing" is displayed in the second countdown display area Dg10b. Here, a method for setting the display contents displayed in the first countdown display area Dg10a and the second countdown display area Dg10b as the countdown effect will be briefly described.

In the variation pattern corresponding to the final score effect executed in the final variation of the score effect of the second example of effect, a period in which a specific effect can be set at a point where a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has passed since the start of the change is provided (for example, the end timing of the first notice period (see FIG. 126(a))).

Furthermore, when the countdown effect is started based on the variation time counted by the variation time counter 223h and the variation pattern set by the variation display setting process, it is possible to measure (determine) the remaining variation time before the final variation. I have set up a means. Then, the value (time) obtained by adding the remaining variation time of the final pre-effect and the predetermined period from the start of variation of the final variation is displayed in the first countdown display area Dg10a. By configuring in this way, even if the execution timing of the countdown performance (timing to determine that the countdown performance is to be executed) is changed, the timing of executing the specific performance can be accurately notified to the player.

When time passes from the state shown in FIG. 131(a) and the final variation is executed, "10 seconds" is displayed in the first countdown display area Dg10a as shown in FIG. 131(b). "30 seconds" is displayed in the second countdown display area Dg10b. As a result, the player can be notified of at least the number of specific effects to be executed during the final variation and the timing of executing each specific effect, so that the player can grasp the timing of executing the specific effects. It is possible to execute the final score production in the state of

Here, as the contents of the performance that can be executed as the specific performance, there are the performance of giving points and changing the display mode of the storage gauge Dg, and the performance of increasing the expectation of winning the jackpot, so that the countdown performance is notified. Depending on whether the timing (execution timing of the specific effect) is, for example, the timing at which it is difficult to give points (timing at which the score giving effect is not executed), the specific effect to be the target of the countdown effect is determined in which effect mode. It is possible to let the player predict whether the Therefore, the player can enjoy the score presentation to the end while predicting the result of the current score presentation in advance.

In addition, in this second example of effect, a countdown effect is used to notify the execution timing for a plurality (two) of specific effects, but the number of specific effects for which the execution timing is notified is not limited to this, It may be one, or three or more. In addition, in the second example of effect, the period until the specific effect is executed is displayed in the first countdown display area Dg10a. Also good.

In addition, in the second example of effect, the countdown effect based on the actual time is used in order to notify the execution timing of the specific effect to be executed in the final variation. It is only necessary to have a configuration that can suggest the execution timing to the player. For example, the time until a plurality of specific effects are executed may be calculated, and the calculated times may be added up and displayed. By configuring in this way, it is not possible to accurately grasp the timing at which each specific effect is executed, but it is possible to allow the player to grasp the total time, so the final fluctuation (final score effect) It is possible to predict the timing and the number of times the remaining specific performance is executed each time the specific performance is executed. In this case, it is preferable not to notify the player of the number of times of the specific effect executed during the final variation (final score effect).

Furthermore, the above-described countdown effect that changes the variable display mode to the extent that it is possible to grasp whether the period until the specific effect is executed is short (for example, within 2 seconds) or long (for example, 30 seconds). may be used instead of Furthermore, during the pre-final fluctuation, the second countdown display area Dg10b displays "preparing" (see FIG. 131(a)), and after that, when the final fluctuation is executed, the character "preparing" is displayed as a jackpot winning It may be configured to change the display mode (for example, "chance") to increase the degree of expectation. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide an unexpected performance to the player who thought that the timing of execution of the specific performance would be notified. In this case, it is preferable to change the display mode so as to show contents more advantageous to the player than the various effects that can be executed as the score giving effects. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from being dissatisfied even if the specific effect recognized to be executed is not executed.

As described above, by executing the countdown effect of the second example of effect, it is possible to predict the degree of expectation for a big win while grasping the progress of the countdown effect and the progress of the score effect, and the effect of the effect. can increase

In addition, instead of displaying the countdown display mode for all the specific effects, if some of the countdown display modes are displayed as "preparing", the countdown display mode is displayed corresponding to the execution timing of each specific effect. It is preferable to display and let the player grasp only the execution order of each specific effect. Thus, it is possible to predict at what timing the specific performance corresponding to the countdown display mode displayed as "preparing" will be executed based on the countdown display mode corresponding to the other specific performance.

Further, the period displayed in the countdown display area may be changed when the final variation of the score effect is executed (when the final score effect is executed). As a result, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect. In this case, it is preferable to configure the period displayed in the countdown display mode to be longer. Since the pachinko machine 10 in the second presentation example is configured such that the longer the variation time is, the higher the expectation of the jackpot is, the period displayed in the countdown display area is varied so as to be longer. So you can increase your chances of winning.

Further, when the countdown display mode displayed in the countdown display area is to be varied, it is preferable to provide determination means for determining whether or not to vary according to the operation content of the operation means (frame button 22) by the player.

In the second production example, in order to execute the above-described countdown display, in the fluctuation display (pre-final fluctuation display) immediately before the final fluctuation of the score production, determination processing for judging whether or not to execute the countdown display. is executed, and when it is determined that the countdown display is to be executed, the remaining period of the fluctuation (pre-final fluctuation) is calculated, and in the remaining period, a predetermined period of the final fluctuation (for example, 10 seconds), that is, the final fluctuation is Processing is executed to display in the countdown display area the total period obtained by adding the period that will surely elapse regardless of the type of fluctuation.

Then, when executing the final variation of the score effect (final score effect), it is determined whether the countdown effect is being executed, and if it is determined that it is being executed, after a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the change (for example, 10 Seconds later), it is preferable to configure so that one specific effect is executed. By configuring in this way, the countdown effect can be easily executed.

Further, in the above-described third embodiment, all periods of the variation pattern corresponding to the final variation of the score presentation are set as the period in which the score presentation can be executed. An initial predetermined period (for example, the first 10 seconds) may be set so that the specific effect is not executed, and set as a pseudo specific effect period for the countdown effect. By configuring in this way, when executing the countdown effect in the pre-final variation of the specific effect, in addition to the remaining period of the variation, the timing of 1 from the range of the first 10 seconds of the variation time of the final variation Even if the summing period is selected and set, there is no problem in setting the fluctuation pattern of the final fluctuation. Therefore, it is possible to easily set the specific effect.

In addition, when a new charge is acquired during the final variation of the score effect (the given score reaches a predetermined amount), the specific effect may be executed immediately, or the specific effect is performed within the change. A countdown display of the period until the execution may be performed. Also, a plurality of countdown displays may be executed at the timing when one specific effect is executed. That is, when the specific effect is executed after 10 seconds, a plurality of countdown displays may be displayed in different display modes indicating 10 seconds. In this case, for example, it is preferable to make the counting speed of each countdown display different so that the player can understand that the same timing is indicated as the timing for executing the specific effect approaches. As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to the display modes of a plurality of countdown displays, and the production effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, the above-described countdown effect is used as an effect indicating the execution timing of a specific effect that is executed during the final change of the score effect, but it may be used for other purposes. When a jackpot is won, the predetermined timing during the jackpot game to be executed after the final variation may be indicated by a countdown display. With this configuration, it is possible to set a countdown display mode that is longer than the change time of the final change of the score effect.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the second production example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 in this second production example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 132(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second example of effect, and FIG. 132(b) is the 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM of the audio ramp control device 113; FIG. This second effect example differs from the above-described embodiments in that a first countdown flag 223ea and a second countdown flag 223eb are added.

The first countdown flag 223ea is a flag for indicating that a countdown effect is to be executed. value) (S7106 in FIG. 134: Yes), the countdown setting process (see S7151 in FIG. 135) is set to ON (see S7304 in FIG. 135). Then, it is referred to in the final score effect setting process 5 (see S2854 in FIG. 136) for setting the final score effect to be executed during the final variation (S7271 in FIG. 136), and when it is determined that it is set to ON. (S7271 in FIG. 136; Yes), after the countdown effect is set in the executed countdown effect setting process (S7272 in FIG. 137), it is set to OFF (see S7402 in FIG. 137).

The second countdown flag 223eb is a flag for indicating that the condition for displaying the second countdown display area Dg10b as a countdown effect is satisfied, and is given by the score giving effect executed during the pre-final change. When the score exceeds the lap value (the value that maximizes the storage gauge Dg) (S7106 in FIG. 134: Yes), the second countdown effect is executed in the countdown setting process (see S7151 in FIG. 135). If it is determined (S7305 in FIG. 135: Yes), it is set to ON (see S7307 in FIG. 135). Here, the determination of S7305 is executed by determining whether or not the lap value has been exceeded twice in the processing of S7106 of the final pre-score effect setting processing (see S2872 in FIG. 134). Then, in the final score effect setting process 5 (see S2854 in FIG. 136) for setting the final score effect to be executed during the final fluctuation, it is referred to in the countdown effect setting process (S7272 in FIG. 137) ( S7405 in FIG. 137), when it is determined that it is set to ON (S7405 in FIG. 137: Yes), the second countdown effect is set (S7407 in FIG. 137), and then set to OFF (S7407 in FIG. 137). S7402).

<Regarding control processing of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second example of effect>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 133 to 137, the contents of the control processing of the sound ramp control device 113 in this second example of effect will be described. In this second example of effect, as described above, the final score effect is executed in the final variation of the score effect, and the execution timing of the specific effect to be executed during the final score effect is notified to the player during the execution of the pre-final variation. A process for executing a countdown effect is executed.

First, the content of the effect setting process 5 (S2704) in this second example of effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 133 is a flow chart showing the content of effect setting processing 5 (S2704). This effect setting process 5 (S2704) is different from the effect setting process 2 (see FIG. 95) in the second embodiment described above, and is a special effect in the pre-final change that is the change immediately before the final change in the score effect. The difference is that the setting process is executed, and the other elements are the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

When the effect setting process 5 (S2704) is executed, the processes of S2851 and S2852 which are the same as the effect setting process 2 (see FIG. 95) are executed, and the value of the effect change number counter 223m is less than 0 in the process of S2851. is not large (S2851: No), the processing of S2855 to S2858, which is the same as the effect setting processing 2 (see FIG. 95), is executed, and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2852 that the value of the effect variation counter is 1 (S2852: Yes), final score effect setting process 5 is executed (S2873), and this process ends. Also, when it is determined that the value of the effect variation counter is not 1 in the processing of S2852 (S2852: No), it is then determined whether the value of the effect variation counter is 2 (S2871), and effect variation When it is determined that the value of the number counter is 2, a pre-final score effect setting process is executed (S2872), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2871, if it is determined that the value of the effect variation counter is not 2 (S2871: No), the pre-score effect setting process 3 (see FIG. 124) is performed as in the above-described fourth embodiment. Execute (S2853) and terminate this process. By configuring in this way, the process of setting the final score effect corresponding to the final variation and the pre-final effect corresponding to the pre-final variation are set as the processing for setting the effect contents of each variation during the score effect. It is possible to perform the process of setting the pre-score effect differently from the process of setting the pre-score effect corresponding to other variations.

Next, with reference to FIG. 134, the contents of the pre-final score effect setting process (S2872) executed in the effect setting process 5 (see FIG. 133) will be described. FIG. 134 is a flow chart showing the contents of the pre-final score effect setting process (S2872). In this pre-final score effect setting process (S2872), a countdown setting process for executing the above-described countdown effect is executed. Other processing is the same as the above-described preliminary score effect setting processing 3 (see FIG. 124), and the same elements are assigned the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the pre-final score effect setting process (S2872) is executed, the same processes of S7101 to S7109 as the above-described preliminary score effect setting process 3 (see FIG. 124) are executed. Among them, after the processing of S7108 is executed, the countdown processing is executed (S7151). In other words, in this example of effect, a process for executing a countdown effect is executed when the lap value (the upper limit value of the gauge) is exceeded in the pre-final variation.

In this production example, since it is configured to execute the countdown production only in the pre-final fluctuation, for example, when executing the special design fluctuation, when the main control device 110 executes the special design fluctuation start process Even if the variation pattern (variation time) selected by the value of the special symbol holding ball counter is different, the countdown effect can be executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 135, the contents of the countdown setting process (S7151) executed in the pre-final score effect setting process (see FIG. 134) will be described. FIG. 135 is a flow chart showing the contents of the countdown setting process (S7151). In this countdown setting process, a countdown period corresponding to the execution timing of the specific effect executed in the final score effect is set, and a display command for displaying the countdown effect is set.

When the countdown setting process (S7151) is executed, first, the remaining period from the countdown start timing, that is, the remaining fluctuation period from the timing at which the countdown setting process is executed in the pre-final fluctuation is calculated (S7301). 10 seconds is added to the remaining period (S7302). In this example of effect, which will be described later with reference to FIG. 137, when the countdown effect is executed, a specific effect (pseudo specific effect ) is configured to execute the process for executing Therefore, in the process of S7302, by adding 10 seconds to the remaining period, it is possible to set the execution timing of the specific effect in the final variation which is the next variation.

After completing the processing of S7302, next, the first countdown command for display corresponding to the added number of seconds is set (S7303), and the first countdown flag 223ea is set to ON (S7304). Then, it is determined whether or not the second countdown effect is to be executed (S7305), and if it is determined that the second countdown effect is to be executed (S7305: Yes), a second countdown command for display indicating "preparing" is set. (S7306), the second countdown flag 223eb is set to ON (S7307), and the process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S7305 that the second countdown effect is not to be executed (S7305: No), the processing of S7306 and S7307 is skipped and the processing ends. Here, the processing contents of S7305 will be described. As described above with reference to FIG. 131, in this production example, when the number of points given in the pre-final fluctuation exceeds the lap value, the player is notified of the execution timing of the specific production executed in the final fluctuation. It is configured to execute a countdown effect for doing. Furthermore, as a result of giving a large amount of points in the pre-final fluctuation, when the lap value is exceeded twice, the execution timing of the specific production a plurality of times (twice) to be executed in the final fluctuation is played as a countdown production. It is configured to execute a countdown effect for notifying the person.

Then, in the processing of S7405, a pre-final variation performance in which a large amount of points are given in the pre-final variation is set, and it is a processing that is executed by determining whether or not the lap value is exceeded twice in the pre-final variation. . Specifically, this determination method is determined based on the value of the notified number counter 223bb updated in the pre-final score effect setting process (see FIG. 134).

<Regarding the second operation effect example of the operation score effect in each embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 138 to 144, another example of the operation effect executed in each of the above-described embodiments will be described. In the first operation effect example described above with reference to FIGS. 101 to 107, the effect modes of the first and second notice effects that are set in duplicate are varied according to the execution timing of each notice effect. It was configured as Further, the first notice effect is an operation effect executed when the player performs a predetermined operation on the frame button 22, and the effective period of the operation effect (predetermined operation on the frame button 22) is set to the second effect. By setting so as to overlap with the notice effect, the effect mode executed in each notice effect can be changed according to the timing when the player operates the frame button 22.例文帳に追加

More specifically, the effective period of the operation effect (predetermined operation on the frame button 22) is a first period before the timing when the second notice effect is executed, and a second period during the second notice effect period. , and a third period after the second notice period, it is discriminated which period corresponds to the timing when the player operates the frame button 22, and based on the discriminated result, the presentation mode of each notice presentation. was configured to be variable.

On the other hand, in the second operation effect example, it has a configuration in which a plurality of notice effects can be set independently, and the effect mode (notice content) of each independently set notice effect is determined. A configuration is used in which the execution timing of each advance notice effect is adjusted based on the determination result. By configuring in this way, when a plurality of advance notice effects are executed for one effect target (for example, score giving effect), the effect content of the advance notice effect executed first is the effect content of the advance notice effect executed later. It is possible to solve the problem that when the content is more reliable than the performance content, the meaning of the advance notice performance to be executed later is lost and the performance effect is lowered.

In addition, compared to the first operation effect example described above, there is no need to change the effect mode. Since there is no need to provide a display mode for the content to be displayed, the amount of data for executing the advance notice effect can be reduced.

Furthermore, in the second operation effect example, at least one of a plurality of independently set advance notice effects is an operation effect that is executed when the player performs a predetermined operation on the frame button 22. In addition, when the settings are made at overlapping timings, the execution timing of each notice effect is made different based on the timing at which a predetermined operation is performed on the frame button 22.例文帳に追加As a result, each of the advance notice effects can be executed in an appropriate order even if the advance notice effects whose execution timings are changed by the player's operation are used.

Next, with reference to FIG. 138(a), the content of the effect of the second example of operation effect will be described. FIG. 138(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of effects in one example when a plurality of advance notice effects overlap. According to the example shown in FIG. 138(a), the first notice effect and the second notice effect executed based on the predetermined operation to the frame button 22 overlap. Specifically, the first notice effect is the operation effect executed in the main display area Dm shown in FIG. 102(a), and the second notice effect is displayed in the small area Ds2 shown in FIG. 102(a). An effect similar to the announcement effect using the treasure box is executed.

In the first notice effect, a frame button operable range (operation effective period) of 10 seconds is set after a 2-second notification period (a period in which the player is notified that the effect for operating the frame button 22 will be executed). After that, the notice effect display period of 8 seconds is set, and the notice effect is configured to be 20 seconds in total. Here, when the player operates the frame button 22 within the frame button operable range of 10 seconds, the first notice effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 138(a), the second notice effect notifies the player of the period during which the notice effect of 5 seconds is executed (the second notice effect period) and the execution of the second notice effect. The second advance notice period is divided into a second advance notice period 1 (10 seconds) and a second advance notice period 2 (8 seconds). Configure. When the second advance notice effect is executed alone, the notice effect is executed for 5 seconds at the timing when the second advance notice period (18 seconds in total) has passed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 138(b), the relationship between the operation timing of the frame button 22 as the operation means, the execution timing of the first notice effect, and the execution timing of the second notice effect will be described. Diagram 138(b) is a diagram showing the relationship between the operation timing of the frame button and the advance notice display timing. As shown in FIG. 138(b), in this second operation effect example, when the first notice effect and the second notice effect are set to overlap as shown in FIG. The first notice display timing and the second notice display timing are different according to the first notice display timing of the effect, that is, the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22 within the frame button operable range of the first notice effect. I'm letting

Specifically, if the timing at which the frame button 22 is operated is the "first period", the first notice display timing is set to "after the first period", and the second notice display timing is set to "the second advance notice". period 1 later” is set. Further, if the timing at which the frame button 22 is operated is the "second period", the first notice display timing is set to "immediately after the operation", and the second notice display timing is set to "same as the first notice display". be done. It should be noted that executing the second notice display at the same timing as the first notice display timing is a concept that includes a slight error that the player cannot recognize, and the range in which the player can recognize that the display is the same. Good if

If the timing at which the frame button 22 is operated is the "third period", "immediately after the operation" is set as the first notice display timing, and "after the second advance notice period" is set as the second notice display timing. set. Also, if the frame button is not operated within the frame button operable range (10 seconds) of the first notice effect, the first notice display is not executed, and the second notice display timing is set to "second advance notice period 2 later” is set.

As described above, if the frame button 22 is operated during the first period within the frame button operable range, the advance notice display of the second notice effect is executed after the advance notice display of the first notice effect is executed. . Also, when the frame button 22 is operated during the second period, the advance notice display of the first notice effect and the notice display of the second notice effect are displayed at the same timing (including an error to the extent that the player recognizes that they are displayed at the same time). ). Furthermore, when the frame button 22 is operated during the third period, the advance notice display of the second notice effect has already been executed (after the second advance notice period 2 has elapsed, the notice display of the second notice effect is is displayed), the advance notice display of the first notice effect is executed after the notice display of the second notice effect is executed.

By configuring in this way, when a plurality of notice effects overlap, the execution timing of each of the plurality of notice effects that are set in duplicate is set based on the timing at which the notice display of one of the notice effects is executed. Therefore, it is possible to execute a plurality of advance notice effects in an appropriate order.

In addition, when the above-mentioned second notice effect is executed alone, after an advance notice period of 18 seconds (the period in which the treasure box in FIG. 103(a) is displayed), the notice display of the second notice effect ( (see FIG. 104(a)) is set in advance to be executed, but as shown in FIG. If the frame button 22 is operated during the first period or the second period within the frame button operable range of the operation notice effect (first notice effect), the notice of the second notice effect is given during the second advance notice period. Display (see FIG. 104(a)) can be executed.

Furthermore, in the second advance notice period 1 of the second advance notice periods for notifying in advance that the second notice effect will be executed, the notice display of the second notice effect is performed regardless of the timing when the frame button 22 is operated. is not executed, it is possible to reliably ensure a period for notifying in advance that the second notice effect will be executed.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the second operation effect example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 139, the electrical configuration in this second example of operation presentation will be described. This second operation effect example differs from the first embodiment in that the contents of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the MPU 201 of the sound lamp control device 113 are changed. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 139(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 201 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second operation effect example. In this second operation effect example, a first comment notice selection table 222ea and a second comment notice selection table 222eb are added to the ROM 222 (see FIG. 30(a)) in the first embodiment. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The first comment notice selection table 222ea is a data table for selecting the effect mode (notice content, execution timing) of the first comment notice, which is the notice effect (first notice effect) used in this second operation effect example. A plurality of presentation modes are defined corresponding to the value of the first comment lottery counter (not shown) of the presentation counter 223f. This first comment notice selection table 222ea is referred to when selecting the effect mode of the first comment notice in the comment notice setting process (see FIG. 141) (S7501 in FIG. 141).

The second comment notice selection table 222eb is a data table for selecting the effect mode (notice contents, execution timing) of the second comment notice, which is the notice effect (second notice effect) used in this second operation effect example. A plurality of presentation modes are defined corresponding to the value of the second comment lottery counter (not shown) of the presentation counter 223f. This second comment notice selection table 222eb is referred to when selecting the effect mode of the second comment notice in the comment notice setting process (see FIG. 141) (S7502 in FIG. 141).

It should be noted that the above-described first comment notice selection table 222ea and second comment notice selection table 222eb are composed of different data tables, respectively, and are configured to independently select the mode of presentation.

FIG. 139(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 201 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second operation effect example. In this second operation effect example, a first comment flag 223ea and a notice duplication flag 223eb are added to the RAM 223 (see FIG. 30(a)) in the first embodiment. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The first comment flag 223ea is a flag for determining whether the first comment notice is to be executed, and is set to ON to indicate that the first comment notice is to be executed. The first comment flag 223ea is set to ON (S7503 in FIG. 141: Yes) when it is determined that the first comment notice is to be executed in the comment notice setting process (see S2951 in FIG. 141), which will be described later (see S2951 in FIG. 141). (S7504 of FIG. 142), referred to in the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 6 (see FIG. 142) (see S3051 of FIG. 142), and after setting the notice command for display in the notice mode setting processing 6 (see FIG. 143), it is turned off. It is set (see S3077 in FIG. 143).

The notice duplication flag 223eb is a flag for indicating that the first comment notice and the second comment notice are set in a period in which the first comment notice and the second comment notice overlap, and when it is set to ON, the first comment notice and the second comment notice are displayed. and are set in overlapping periods. This notice overlap flag 223eb is set to ON (S7509) when it is determined that there is an overlap period (S7508 of FIG. 141: Yes) in the comment notice setting process (see S2951 of FIG. 141) described later (see S2951 of FIG. 141), and the frame button It is referred to in the input monitoring/rendering process 6 (see FIG. 142) (see S3052 in FIG. 142), and is set to off (see FIG. 143) after the display notice command is set in the notice mode setting process 6 (see FIG. 143). (see S3077 of ).

<Regarding the control processing of the second operation effect example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 140 to 144, control processing in this second example of operation presentation will be described. In the second example of the operation effect, when the change pattern executed during the score effect includes the comment notice, the processing for setting the comment notice is executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 140, the contents of the score giving effect setting process 6 (S2803) will be described. FIG. 140 is a flow chart showing the contents of the score giving effect setting process 6 (S2803). This score giving effect setting process 6 (S2803) is different from the score giving effect setting process (see FIG. 65) of the first embodiment described above in that a process regarding a comment notice is added in place of the operation score effect. Other than that, they are identical. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

When the score giving effect setting process 6 (S2803) is executed, first, the same processes of S2901 to S2910 as the above-described score giving effect setting process (see FIG. 65) are executed. , the comment notice setting process is executed (S2951), the above-described process of S2908 is executed, and this process ends.

Here, the content of the comment notice setting process (S2951) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 141 is a flow chart showing the contents of the comment notice setting process (S2951). In this comment notice setting process (S2951), there is a process for setting whether or not to execute the comment notice with the variation pattern determined this time, and the effect mode (notice content, execution timing) of the comment notice to be executed. executed.

As shown in FIG. 141, when the comment notice setting process (S2951) is executed, first, the first comment notice is selected using the first comment notice selection table 222ea (S7501), and then the second comment notice is selected. A second comment notice is selected using the table 222eb (S7502). In the process of S7501, it is determined whether execution of the first comment notice is selected (S7503), and if it is determined to execute the first comment notice (S7503: Yes), the first comment flag 223ea is turned on. setting (S7504), next, it is determined whether execution of the second comment notice is selected in the process of S7502 (S7504), and if it is determined to execute the second comment notice (S7505: Yes), The announcement content selected as the first comment announcement and the announcement content selected as the second comment announcement are determined (S7506).

Then, the first comment notice execution period and the second comment notice execution period are set based on the determination contents of S7506 (S7507). It is determined whether there is a period that overlaps with the period (S7508). If it is determined in the process of S7508 that there is an overlap period (S7508: Yes), the advance notice overlap flag 223eb is set to ON (S7509), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7508 that there is no overlapping period (S7508: No), the process of S7509 is skipped and the process ends. Here, if it is determined in the process of S7508 that there is no overlapping period, each comment notice is executed based on the first comment notice execution period and the second comment notice execution period set in the process of S7507. .

Next, with reference to FIG. 142, the contents of the button input monitoring/effect process 6 (S2107) executed in the main process (see FIG. 56) of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second operation effect example will be described. FIG. 142 is a flow chart showing frame button input monitoring/effect processing 6 (S2107). In this frame button input monitoring/effect process 6 (S2107), a process for displaying the effect corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 at each timing on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

When frame button input monitoring/effect processing 6 (S2107) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not pressing of frame button 22 has been detected (S3001). This process is terminated as it is. If it is determined that pressing of the frame button 22 has been detected (S3001: Yes), it is determined whether the first comment flag is on (S3051). If it is determined that the first comment flag is on (S3051: Yes), the operation complete flag is set to on (S3003), and it is determined whether the advance notice overlap flag is on (3052). If it is determined that the notice duplication flag is ON (3052: Yes), the notice mode setting process 6 is executed (S3053). This advance notice mode setting process 6 (S3053) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the process of S3053 is executed, the process of S3004 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S3052 that the advance notice duplication flag is off (S3052: No), the process of S3004 is executed. In the process of S3004, a display press command corresponding to the button press is set (S3004). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3051 that the first comment flag is off (S3051: No), it is determined whether it is the other operation period. If it is determined that it is the other operation period, the process of S3004 is executed. After executing the processing of S3004, this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S3005, if it is determined that it is outside the other operation period (S3005: No), this processing ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 143, an advance notice which is one process in the button input monitoring/effect process 6 (S2107) executed in the main process (see FIG. 56) of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second operation effect example. The content of mode setting processing 6 (S3051) will be described. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing the advance notice mode setting process 6 (S3051). In this advance notice mode setting process 6 (S3051), a process of setting various effects based on the timing when the frame button 22 is pressed is executed.

When the advance notice mode setting process 6 (S3051) is executed, first, it is determined whether the pressing timing is in the first period (S3053). If the pressing timing is the first period (S3053: Yes), the execution period of the first comment notice is set after the first period (S3071). The execution period of the second comment notice is set after the end of the second advance notice period 1 (S3072). After that, the process of S3055 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3053 that the pressing timing is outside the first period (S3053: No), it is determined whether the pressing timing is within the second period (S3056). If it is determined that the pressing timing is within the second period (S3056: Yes), execution of the first comment notice is set (S3073). Execution of the second comment notice is set (S3074). After that, the process of S3055 is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S3056, if it is determined that the pressing timing is outside the second period (S3056: No), execution of the first comment notice is set (S3075). After that, the execution period of the second comment notice is set after the end of the second advance notice period 2 (S3076).

In the processing of S3055, the advance notice command for display corresponding to the set mode is set (S3055). After that, the first comment flag and the notice duplication flag are set to OFF (S3077), and then this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 144, the content of effect update processing 6 (S2112) in this second example of operation effect will be described. FIG. 144 is a flow chart showing the content of effect update processing 6 (S2112). In this effect update process 6 (S2112), a process for setting the execution period of the notice effect executed when the frame button 22 is not operated during the execution period of the first notice effect is executed.

When the effect update process 6 (S2112) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the first comment flag 223ea is set to ON (S3171), and if it is determined to be set to ON (S3171: Yes) Then, it is determined whether the second period has passed (S3172). Here, whether or not the third period has been determined is determined using the time counted by the variable time counter 223h of the RAM of the audio ramp control device 113. FIG.

In the processing of S3172, if it is determined that the second period has passed (S3172: Yes), it is determined whether the operation completion flag 223r is ON (S3173), and it is determined that the operation completion flag 223r is not ON. If so (S3173: No), then it is determined whether or not the advance notice duplication flag 223eb is set to ON (S3174).

On the other hand, in the process of S3171, if it is determined that the first comment flag 223ea is not ON (S3171: No), in the process of S3172, the second period has not elapsed, that is, the current period is the first notice effect period. If it is determined to be in the middle (S3172: No), and if it is determined in the process of S3173 that the operation completion flag 223r is set to ON (S3173: Yes), this process ends.

In the processing of S3174, if it is determined that the notice duplication flag 223eb is set to ON (S3174: Yes), the execution period of the second comment notice is set after the end of the second advance notice period 2 (S3175), and the notice The duplication flag 223eb is set to OFF (S3176), the first comment flag is set to OFF (S3177), and this process is terminated. That is, when the first comment notice and the second comment notice are set overlappingly as described above with reference to FIG. is not operated for a predetermined period (until the second period elapses), the execution period of the second comment notice is set.

As described above, in the first embodiment, as the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 corresponding to the special symbol lottery, it is possible to set the continuous effect executed across a plurality of special symbol variations. It consists of In this way, by suggesting the lottery result of the target special symbol by using the fluctuation period of the special symbol executed before the target special symbol, a longer-term effect is provided to the player. can be provided and the production effect can be enhanced. In addition, the result of the lottery of the special symbols (for example, loss) can be executed continuously without being highlighted each time, so that the player's desire to play can be prevented from occurring. can.

Furthermore, there is an effect (score giving effect) for giving points for changing the predetermined level information (gauge amount) to different level information (gauge amount), and when the level information becomes specific level information (gauge amount reaches 6 and the charge amount is accumulated), and a specific effect (charge effect) that can be executed is executed. Overall, in the scoring effect that is executed as a continuous effect, the stage information varies a lot, and the more the charge amount is accumulated, the higher the expectation that the lottery result of the special symbol that is the target of the scoring effect will be a big hit. It is configured to be

As a result, during the period during which the score effect is being executed (a plurality of special symbol fluctuation periods), the score giving effect is executed so as to gradually change the stage information, thereby increasing the player's expectation of winning the jackpot. It is possible to visually notify the player, prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early, and enhance the presentation effect.

In addition, in the above-described first embodiment, as the score giving effect, the score is displayed (given) on the display screen of the third design display device 81 during the variable display of the special design, and the displayed (given) score is placed. When a fixed amount (for example, 6) is accumulated, a specific effect (charge effect) is executed. Thus, by grasping the score displayed in the third pattern, the presence or absence of execution of the specific performance and the execution timing of the specific performance can be predicted, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

In the above-described first embodiment, as a method of giving points to be given during the score effect, the total given score is set when it is determined that the score effect is to be executed, and each time each variable display is performed during the score effect , is configured to set the given score so as not to exceed the total given score. As a result, it is possible to smoothly set the effect mode during the score effect.

Further, in the second embodiment described above, as a method of giving points to be given during the scoring effect, when it is determined that the scoring effect is to be executed, the number of times of the specific effect to be executed during the scoring effect is set in advance. It is configured to set the total number of points corresponding to the set number of specific effects. As a result, the total number of points can be set within a range in which the number of times the specific effect is executed is the same, so the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the above-described third embodiment, the specific effect is configured to be executed only during the final variation of the score effect, that is, during the variable display corresponding to the winning information command that caused the decision to execute the score effect. In the variable display in which the score effects up to that point are executed, the stock effects are executed to ensure the number of times the specific effects are executed.

By constructing in this way, the score performance can be enjoyed to the end, and since there is no need to set to execute the specific performance in the variable display other than the final variation, setting processing of the variable display is easily executed. be able to.

In addition to the configuration of the third embodiment described above, when it is determined to execute the score effect, it is determined that the score effect will be executed from the pre-variation period of the score effect (special symbol variation in which the score effect is started As the pattern of giving points to be given during the period until the special symbol fluctuation (final fluctuation) corresponding to the winning information starts), one giving scenario is set from a plurality of giving scenarios having different giving patterns. The score giving timing is managed by using the given giving scenario, and the final variation period of the score presentation (the period during which the special pattern variation corresponding to the winning information determined to execute the score presentation is executed) The effect mode of the effect display (final score effect) to be executed during the game is configured to be selected based on the set provision scenario.

As a result, it is possible to intentionally change the effect mode of the score giving effect executed during the score giving effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the total number of points to be given in the current score presentation at an early stage, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

Furthermore, it is different in that the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot indicated by the performance mode selected as the final score performance is configured to vary according to the set granting scenario.

By configuring in this way, the degree of expectation for a big hit can be varied depending on the content of the score presentation process (score giving process) and the variation display (final score presentation) executed in the final variation. The player can continue to have expectations until the end of the scoring performance.

In each of the above-described embodiments, it is configured to execute the score effect using multiple variations of the special symbol, but the score effect executed in each of the above-described embodiments is within one variation of the special symbol. It may be configured to run at In this case, for example, one time variation pattern of the special symbol is divided into a plurality of blocks, and a setting means is provided for setting the plurality of blocks into the first half block and the second half block, and the period set in the first half block is set in advance. It is preferable that the scoring effect is executed, and the final scoring effect is executed in the period set in the second half block. By configuring in this way, the effect mode of the second half block can be set based on the effect mode of the first half block of one special symbol, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced. In addition, the technical concept described in each of the above-described embodiments may be combined with a configuration in which the score effect is executed within one special symbol variation.

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, a configuration is provided in which a plurality of scenarios are set. As a result, it is possible for the player to understand various scenarios set during the score presentation, so that it is possible to provide the enjoyment of inferring the performance result of the score presentation.

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, a configuration is used in which the gauge amount (level information) is varied when points are awarded in the score giving effect. When an effect (fake effect) is executed (for example, a score giving effect in which 0 points are displayed), a measuring means for measuring the number of times of the false effect is provided, and the number of times measured by the measuring means is a predetermined number ( For example, variable means may be provided to vary the gauge amount (step information) when the number of times reaches 5 times. As a result, even when the counterfeit effect is executed in the score giving effect, it is possible to make the gauge amount (level information) variable, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In addition, means for determining whether a predetermined condition (for example, operation of the operation means (frame button 22)) is established when it is decided to give a score (for example, 1 point) in the score giving effect, and a predetermined Effect switching means may be provided for switching between a normal score giving effect and a giving effect using false information based on the condition being satisfied.

Also, in each of the above-described embodiments, when it is determined that the continuous notice effect is executed, the number of points (total number of points) to be given in this continuous notice effect and the number of times of specific effects to be executed (total number of specific effects) It is configured so as to set an effect mode of each variable display to be executed during the continuous advance notice effect according to the decided contents. Then, as the production mode of each variable display, the number of remaining fluctuations to be executed during the continuous advance notice production, with the above-mentioned total number of points and the total number of specific production times as the upper limit, and the validity of the prize information to be the target of this continuous advance notice production. Based on the judgment result, the score to be given and the number of times of the specific performance are determined by lottery from a plurality of ranges.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to appropriately set the effect mode of each variable display executed during the continuous advance notice effect for the continuous advance notice effect, and to set various effect modes. . However, since it is a configuration that randomly sets the given score for each variable display unit that is executed during the continuous notice production, the score is intentionally set so as to have relevance (story) throughout the entire period of the continuous notice production. There was a problem that it could not be given.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, for example, when it is determined that the continuous notice effect is to be executed, the determination result of the winning information to be the target of the continuous notice effect, and the number of variable display times executed during the continuous notice effect ( The number of special symbols) and the variation type included in the winning information that is the target of the continuous notice effect. can be

Specifically, the scenarios set here include a scenario in which a large number of total points are given in the first half of the continuous notice effect (scenario A), and a scenario in which a large number of total points are given in the latter half of the continuous notice effect (scenario B). , a scenario (scenario C) in which the total points are given evenly during the continuous advance notice effect, and a scenario (scenario D) in which the total points are given at random during the continuous notice effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the scores given during the continuous announcement effect have relevance (story). Therefore, the production effect can be enhanced.

In addition, when the above-described scenario (score-giving scenario) is provided, it is preferable to set an effect mode corresponding to the set score-giving scenario. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the continuous announcement effect.

In the above example, the scenario is set for the scoring pattern for the entire period of the continuous advance notice effect. In addition, a scenario may be set so as to have relevance (story) to the score to be given in the variable display period, and a variable display effect corresponding to the scenario may be executed.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the third symbol display for showing the lottery result of each symbol to the player is performed by one display means (third symbol display device 81), but other configurations are used. For example, among the third symbols, different display means may be provided for displaying the main symbol to be displayed in an emphasized manner to the player and for displaying the sub-symbols. Also, as the configuration of the display means, a configuration other than the liquid crystal display may be used.

In each of the above-described embodiments, a right-handed game aiming at the right side area of the game board 13 is executed in the case of the game state (time saving state) that is advantageous to the player, and the left side area of the game board 13 is executed in the case of the normal game state. However, it suffices if the target area of the game board 13 is changed according to the game state, and the left-handed game is executed during the time-saving state, and during the normal state. may be caused to execute a right-handed game. Also, it may be possible to execute games in different game states while aiming at the same area.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the frame buttons 22 and 23 are used as the operation means that can be operated by the player. may be used, such as a lever-shaped operation means that can determine whether the player is operated by tilting left or right or front and back, or a lever-shaped operation means that can be operated by the player touching or approaching. A touch sensor type operating means that can distinguish between them, or a wireless operating means that can distinguish that an operation has been made by transmitting a predetermined radio wave may be used. In addition, each of the movable valve 750, storage device (first storage device 770, second storage device 771), second frame button (release button) 22b (1022b, 1122b), and third frame button (release button) 22c A part or all of the operation control may be performed by the sound lamp control device 113 instead of the main control device 110 .

The present invention may be applied to a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) may be implemented as Further, after the big winning pattern is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines combining a pachinko machine and a slot machine may be implemented.

In the slot machine, for example, the pattern is changed by operating the control lever in a state where the pattern effective line is determined by inserting a coin, and the pattern is stopped and fixed by operating the stop button. It is. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value under the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is equipped with a ball launching handle. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols, and the player is given a special game. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown.

<Characteristic group A> (Score accumulation depending on whether or not specific effects are executed)
A specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect within a predetermined effect period, an execution determination means determining that the specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means, and a stage capable of displaying step information of a plurality of stages. information display means; step information changing means for changing the step information; and step information setting means for setting the step information to be changed by the step information changing means according to the determination result of the execution determination means. A gaming machine A1 characterized by having:

Here, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that executes a variable effect for a predetermined period of time to suggest to the player whether or not the game has been won. Then, a game configured to be able to execute a pre-notification effect (countdown effect) for informing the player in advance of the timing at which a specific effect (for example, cut-in effect) is executed among the effects to be executed for a predetermined period. there is a machine (For example, JP-A-2013-198568).

Such a conventional gaming machine can execute a specific effect when the score reaches a predetermined amount, so that it is possible to preliminarily prompt whether or not the specific effect will be executed, thereby enhancing the effect of the effect. it was possible. However, when it is determined that the advance notification effect is executed at the timing at which the specific effect is executed, the period for executing the advance notification effect (that is, the start timing and the end timing) is set. There is a problem that the content becomes monotonous and the player quickly becomes bored with the presentation.

According to the gaming machine A1, it is possible to determine that the specific effect is to be executed by the execution determining means, variably set the stage information based on the determination result, and display it on the stage information display means. As a result, it is possible to associate the variable state of the stage information with whether or not the specific effect is executed. Therefore, by looking at the stage information displayed on the stage information display means, it is possible for the player to predict whether or not the specific performance will be executed, so that there is an effect that the performance effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine A1, the stage information setting means sets specific stage information as the stage information when the execution determining means determines that the specific effect is to be executed. .

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when it is determined that the specific effect is to be executed, the specific stage information is set as the stage information by the stage information setting means. As a result, it is possible to associate the variable state of the stage information with the execution or non-execution of the specific effect. Therefore, the player can play the game while expecting that the stage information displayed on the stage information display means will be the specific stage information, thereby suppressing early boredom with the game.

In the gaming machine A2, the stage information setting means can set at least a plurality of stage information different from the specific stage information as the plurality of stage information.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, at least a plurality of pieces of stage information different from the specific stage information are displayed as a plurality of pieces of stage information by the stage information display means. As a result, by looking at the stage information displayed by the stage information display means, it is possible for the player to grasp that the stage information has changed. Therefore, since it is possible to heighten the sense of anticipation for the change to the specific stage information, there is an effect that it is possible to make the player pay attention to the effect that is executed.

Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3 has a period determining means for determining a specific period during which the specific effect executing means executes the specific effect, and the step information setting means determines the determination result of the period determining means. The game machine A4 is characterized in that the step information to be changed by the step information changing means is set accordingly.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the period determining means can determine the period during which the specific effect is executed in the effect period, and set the step information based on the result of the determination. As a result, the stage information can be varied in accordance with the timing of execution of the specific performance, and the execution timing of the specific performance and the displayed stage information can be associated with each other. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets bored with the game early.

In the game machine A4, when it is determined by the execution determination means that the specific effect is to be executed, a predetermined variable period is made longer than the specific period in correspondence with the specific period determined by the period determination means. A gaming machine characterized in that it has a variable period setting means for setting a variable period in advance, and the stage information setting means sets the specific stage information during the variable period set by the variable period setting means. A5.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the variable period setting means sets the variable period corresponding to the specific period during which the specific effect is executed, and the step information setting means sets the specific stage information during the variable period. As a result, the timing at which the specific stage information is displayed by the stage information display means and the timing at which the specific effect is executed can be associated with each other. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

In any one of the game machines A1 to A5, an operation means that can be operated by the player, an operation determination means for determining that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and a determination result of the operation determination means. a stage information operation variable means for varying the stage information according to the stage information; and a stage information operation setting means for setting the stage information to be varied by the stage information operation variable means. A6.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the operation determination means determines that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means operable by the player, and the step information operation setting means sets the step information according to the determination result. As a result, it is possible to change the displayed step information according to the operation content of the operation means. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's willingness to participate in the game, and to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early.

In the gaming machine A6, the stage information varying means can vary the stage information a plurality of times, and at least one of the stage information varied a plurality of times is varied by the stage information operation varying means. A gaming machine A7 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the stage information is varied a plurality of times by the stage information varying means, one of which is varied by the stage information operation varying means. Thus, the step information can be changed by using the step information that is changed according to the operation on the operating means and the step information that is changed without corresponding to the operation on the operating means. Therefore, it is possible to set a wide variety of stage information, and there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

A gaming machine A8 characterized in that the game machine A7 comprises correction means for correcting the variable mode of the stage information varying means in correspondence with the stage information varied by the stage information operation varying means.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the correcting means corrects the variable mode of the other step information corresponding to the step information changed by the step information operation varying means. Thus, even if the variable aspect of the step information is changed according to the operation of the operation means, the same step information is displayed when the specific period is reached by correcting the variable aspect of the other step information. can be made Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a situation in which an uncomfortable performance is executed depending on whether or not the operation means is operated.

In the game machine A8, the stage information setting means presets operation stage information to be set when the predetermined operation is executed by the operation determination means.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the step information set by the step information setting means, step information corresponding to the operation step information set when a predetermined operation is performed on the operation means is set. As a result, when a predetermined operation is performed on the operation means, the preset operation stage information can be used as it is. There is an effect that the processing load for displaying the stage information can be reduced.

Instead of the configuration of the game machine A9 described above, it is also possible to set in advance step information corresponding to the operation step information set when a predetermined operation is not executed by the operation determination means. The operation stage information preset by the stage information setting means may be determined according to the difficulty level of a predetermined operation set for the operation means. If an easy operation (for example, an operation of pressing the frame button 22, which is an operation means, once within a predetermined period) is performed as the operation of , it is set when a predetermined operation is performed on the operation means. Stage information corresponding to the operation stage information is set in advance, and a difficult operation (for example, the period for operating the frame button 22 as the operation means is set short and a plurality of In the case of an operation to press the frame button 22, which is an operation means, or an operation during an operation presentation in which the player cannot grasp the period during which the frame button 22, which is the operation means, is operated, if a predetermined operation is not performed on the operation means It may be configured such that step information corresponding to the set operation step information is set in advance.

The game machine A8 has operation result storage means capable of storing a plurality of determination results of the operation determination means, and determination means capable of determining the determination results stored in the operation result storage means, wherein the step information The game machine A10 is characterized in that the setting means presets, as the operation stage information, operation stage information corresponding to the determination result of the determination means.

According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a plurality of determination results of the operation determination means are stored in the operation result storage means, and the determination results stored in the operation result storage means are determined by the determination means. Then, step information corresponding to the determination result of the determining means is set by the step information setting means. Thereby, the stage information corresponding to the player's operation can be set in advance by the stage information setting means. Therefore, for example, for a player who actively operates the operation means, step information corresponding to operation stage information set when a predetermined operation is performed on the operation means is set in advance, and the operation stage information is set in advance. For a player who does not operate the means, it is possible to preset step information corresponding to the operation step information set when a predetermined operation is not performed on the operating means. Therefore, it is possible to save the trouble of correcting the step information using the correcting means, and it is possible to further reduce the processing load for variably displaying the step information.

In any one of the game machines A1 to A10, a dynamic display for dynamically displaying for a predetermined period a determination means for executing determination when a predetermined determination condition is established, and identification information for indicating the result of determination by the determination means. means, privilege game imparting means for imparting a privilege game when the identification information for indicating a specific determination result is stopped and displayed after the dynamic display by the dynamic display means, and the identification by the dynamic display means a presentation period setting means for setting a period in which information is dynamically displayed as the predetermined presentation period.

According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A10, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a predetermined effect period is set using the period during which the identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means is dynamically displayed. As a result, it is possible to indicate the display mode of the staged display displayed during the performance period as the degree of expectation for the award of the privilege game. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make the player pay attention to the content of the presentation, and to enhance the presentation effect.

Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A11 has limiting means for limiting the step information set by the step information setting means when the execution determining means determines that the specific performance is not to be executed. A gaming machine A12 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine A12, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A11, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the execution determination means determines that the specific effect is not executed, the restriction means restricts the setting of the stage information by the stage information setting means. Thereby, whether or not the specific effect is executed can be predicted by the step information set by the step information setting means. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the stage information that is variably displayed, so that there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

In the game machine A12, the game machine A13 is characterized in that the restriction means restricts setting of the specific stage information by the stage information setting means.

According to the gaming machine A13, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A12, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the setting of the specific stage information is restricted by the restricting means. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the specific stage information from being set when the specific effect is not executed. Therefore, since it is possible to inform the execution of the specific effect by the step information, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

In the gaming machine A12 or A13, the stage information setting means facilitates setting of semi-specific stage information different from the specific stage information when setting of the stage information is restricted by the restriction means. A gaming machine A14 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine A14, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A12 or A13, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the setting of the level information is restricted by the restriction means, the semi-specific level information is easily set by the level information setting means. As a result, the player can predict whether or not the specific effect will be executed according to the step information set by the step information setting means, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine A14, the stage information setting means enables the stage information to be set a plurality of times, and the stage information indicating the semi-specific stage information is similar to the specific stage information. Characterized game machine A15.

According to the gaming machine A15, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A14, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the quasi-specific stage information that approximates the specific stage information is displayed. Thus, when the semi-specific level information is displayed, the player can expect that the specific level information will be displayed next. Therefore, there is an effect that a sense of expectation can be given continuously to the end.

<Characteristic group B> (Set the production of the second half period based on the production process of the first half period)
In a gaming machine having period effect setting means for setting a period effect for a predetermined period, and period effect executing means for executing the period effect set by the period effect setting means, the period effect setting means has a predetermined period effect. a first period effect setting means for setting a first period effect in the first period; and a second period effect setting means for setting a second period effect in a second period set after the first period. wherein the second period effect setting means sets the effect mode of the second period effect according to the effect mode of the first period effect executed by the period effect executing means. Game machine B1 to play.

Here, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that executes a variable effect for a predetermined period of time to suggest to the player whether or not the game has been won. Then, a game configured to be able to execute a pre-notification effect (countdown effect) for informing the player in advance of the timing at which a specific effect (for example, cut-in effect) is executed among the effects to be executed for a predetermined period. there is a machine (For example, JP-A-2013-198568).

Such a conventional gaming machine can execute a specific effect when the score reaches a predetermined amount, so that it is possible to preliminarily prompt whether or not the specific effect will be executed, thereby enhancing the effect of the effect. it was possible. However, when it is determined that the advance notification effect is executed at the timing at which the specific effect is executed, the period for executing the advance notification effect (that is, the start timing and the end timing) is set. There is a problem that the content becomes monotonous and the player quickly becomes bored with the presentation.

According to the game machine B1, a period effect for a predetermined period is set by the period effect setting means, and the period effect is executed by the period effect executing means. Furthermore, as the period effect setting means, a first period effect in a predetermined first period is set by the first period effect setting means, and a second period effect in a second period after the first period is set by the first period effect is set by the second period effect setting means according to the effect mode.

Thus, it is possible to set the effect mode of the first period effect as the effect mode during the period effect and the effect mode of the second period effect according to the effect mode executed during the first period effect. , the series of performance contents executed during the period performance can be executed as a performance that does not give the player a sense of discomfort. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In game machine B1, determination means for executing determination when a predetermined determination condition is satisfied; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the result of determination by the determination means for a predetermined period; bonus game imparting means for imparting a bonus game when the identification information for indicating a specific discrimination result is stopped and displayed after dynamic display by the target display means; a storage means capable of storing a plurality of pieces of the entering ball information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined number until the predetermined determination condition is satisfied; and a preliminary determination means for executing preliminary determination based on the entering ball information, and when the result of the preliminary determination by the preliminary determination means satisfies a predetermined condition, the period effect setting means performs the storage The game machine B2 is characterized in that the period effect is set using the dynamic display period corresponding to a plurality of pieces of the entering ball information stored in means.

According to the game machine B2, the identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means for a predetermined period, and when the determination result of the determination means is the predetermined determination result, the privilege game providing means A privilege game is provided. When the income condition is met, the acquisition means acquires the entering ball information, and the storage means stores a plurality of information up to a predetermined number as the upper limit. Then, the preliminary discrimination is executed by the preliminary discriminating means based on the entering ball information stored in the storing means, and when the discrimination result satisfies a predetermined condition, the plurality of entering ball information stored in the storing means are corresponded. A period effect using the dynamic display period is set by the period effect setting means. As a result, it is possible to execute a period effect using dynamic display periods corresponding to a plurality of pieces of entering information, so that the effect period of the period effect can be lengthened and the effect of effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine B1 or B2, a determining means for determining a final rendering mode, which is a rendering mode at the end of the first period rendering, and a starting rendering mode, which is the rendering mode at the start of the first period rendering, are determined by the determining means. a performance scenario setting means for setting a performance scenario for making the determined final performance mode.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effects of the game machine B1 or B2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the final performance mode of the first period performance is determined by the determining means, and the performance scenario setting means sets the performance scenario for making the start performance mode of the first period performance the final performance mode of the first period performance. Therefore, since the presentation mode during the first period presentation can be varied according to the presentation scenario, there is an effect that the presentation effect of the period presentation can be enhanced.

The gaming machine B3 has scenario storage means for storing a plurality of the production scenarios that can be set by the production scenario setting means, and the scenario storage means stores a predetermined first production scenario and its first production scenario. and a second effect scenario in which the start effect mode is changed to the final effect mode in a different process.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a plurality of production scenarios having the start production mode as the final production mode are stored in different processes in the production scenario storage means. As a result, it is possible to intentionally change the content of the first period effect in the first period, so that it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game during the first period effect. be.

In the gaming machine B4, the second period effect setting means sets at least the effect mode of the second period effect according to the effect scenario set by the effect scenario setting means. Game machine B5.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second period effect setting means sets the effect mode of the second period effect according to the effect scenario set by the effect scenario setting means. As a result, since the second period performance corresponding to the performance scenario set during the first period performance can be set, it is possible to provide the player with a performance that does not make the player feel uncomfortable, and to enhance the performance effect. has the effect of

In the game machine B5, the second period effect setting means sets the effect mode of the second period effect according to the final effect mode of the first period effect.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in addition to the effect scenario set by the effect scenario setting means, the effect mode of the second period effect is set by the second period effect setting means according to the final effect mode of the first period effect. Thus, even if the final effect mode of the first period effect is the same, it is possible to vary the effect mode of the second period effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to diversify the effect mode of the entire period effect.

A game machine B7 characterized by having suggesting means for suggesting the effect scenario set by the effect scenario setting means in any one of the game machines B3 to B6.

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effects of the game machines B3 to B6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the suggesting means suggests the production scenario set by the production scenario setting means. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the set production scenario, and to enhance the production effect.

A game machine B8 characterized in that in the gaming machine B7, the suggesting means suggests the effect scenario set by the effect scenario setting means during the first period.

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effects of the game machine B7, the effect scenario set by the effect scenario setting means is suggested during the first period by the suggesting means. Therefore, the first period effect can be executed in a state in which the effect scenario set by the player is predicted, so that there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In any one of the game machines B1 to B8, the period effect is for indicating the determination result of the determination means corresponding to the entering ball information for which the result of the preliminary determination satisfies a predetermined condition. Gaming machine B9.

In the gaming machine B9, the determining means determines the final effect mode according to the determination result of the determining means corresponding to the entering ball information for which the result of the preliminary determination satisfies a predetermined condition. Characterized game machine B10.

In any one of the game machines B1 to B10, the second dynamic display period for indicating the determination result of the determination means corresponding to the entering ball information for which the result of the preliminary determination satisfies a predetermined condition. A gaming machine B11 characterized by having second period setting means for setting a period.

<Feature Ca group> (Adjustment of execution timing of duplication notice effect)
A specific performance executing means capable of executing a specific performance within a prescribed performance period, and a first suggestive performance for suggesting that the specific performance is executed by the specific performance executing means are executed at a prescribed first timing. A second suggesting effect executing means and a second suggesting effect different from the first suggesting effect for suggesting execution of the specific effect by the specific effect executing means at a predetermined second timing. an execution timing adjustment means capable of adjusting at least one timing of the first timing at which the first suggestive effect is executed and the second timing at which the second suggestive effect is executed. and a gaming machine Ca1 characterized by having:

Here, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that executes a variable effect for a predetermined period of time to suggest to the player whether or not the game has been won. Then, there is a game machine configured to be able to execute a plurality of advance notice effects for suggesting to the player whether or not he has won a prize. (For example, JP-A-2013-198568).

Such a conventional game machine can execute a plurality of advance notice effects, and can enhance the effect of the effect. However, depending on the display timing and display contents of a plurality of advance notice effects, it may not be possible to make the player have expectations for all of the advance notice effects, and the player quickly becomes bored with the effects. was there.

According to the gaming machine Ca1, at least one of the first timing at which the first suggestive effect is executed and the second timing at which the second suggestive effect is executed is adjusted by the execution timing adjusting means. As a result, when a plurality of suggestive effects are executed, each suggestive effect can be executed in an appropriate order.

In the gaming machine Ca1, a first suggested effect period setting means for setting a first suggested effect period in which the first suggested effect is executed, and the first suggested effect period set by the first suggested effect period setting means. A first suggested effect period discriminating means to be determined, a second suggested effect period setting means for setting a second suggested effect period in which the second suggested effect is executed, and the second suggested effect period setting means set by the second suggested effect period setting means. a second suggestive effect period discriminating means for discriminating a second suggestive effect period; an overlap period discriminating means for discriminating whether at least a part of the first suggestive effect period and the second suggestive effect period overlap; , wherein the execution timing adjustment means adjusts the at least one timing according to the determination result of the overlapping period determination means.

According to the gaming machine Ca2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Ca1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first suggested effect period is determined by the first suggested effect period determining means, and the second suggested effect period is determined by the second suggested effect period determining means. Then, it is determined by the overlapping period discriminating means whether or not at least a part of the first suggestive performance period and the second suggestive performance period overlap, and the execution timing is adjusted by the execution timing adjusting means according to the determination result. . As a result, it is possible to adjust the execution timing of each suggestive effect when the execution period of each suggestive effect set independently overlaps, so when multiple suggestive effects are executed in a short period of time , each suggestive effect can be executed in an appropriate order.

The game machine Ca2 has a prior notification executing means capable of executing prior notification for notifying in advance that the first suggestive effect execution means will execute the first suggestive effect, and the first suggestive effect period is set. The gaming machine Ca3 is characterized in that the means also sets a pre-notification period during which the pre-notification is executed as the first suggestion effect period.

According to the gaming machine Ca3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Ca2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the advance notification executing means executes the advance notification for notifying in advance that the first suggestive performance will be executed, and the first suggestive performance period setting means sets the advance notification period during which the prior notification is executed. As a result, even if the period in which the suggestive effect is not actually executed but the period in which the suggestive effect is executed overlaps with the period in which another suggestive effect is executed, the suggestive effect You can adjust the execution timing of the production. Therefore, there is an effect that each suggestive effect can be executed in an appropriate order.

In the gaming machine Ca3, the execution timing adjusting means determines that at least a part of the prior notification period and the second suggestive effect period overlaps with the overlapping period determining means, the first The game machine Ca4 is characterized in that it adjusts the execution timing of the suggestive effect.

According to the gaming machine Ca4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Ca3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the overlapping period determining means determines that at least a part of the preliminary notification period and the second suggestive effect period overlap, the execution timing adjusting means adjusts the execution timing of the first suggestive effect. . Thus, the timing of executing the first suggestive effect can be varied based on the execution timing of the second suggestive effect. Therefore, it is possible to execute the first suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect at appropriate timings, and to enhance the effect of the effect.

The gaming machine Ca4 has operation means operable by the player and operation determination means for determining that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and the second suggestive effect execution means The game machine Ca5 is characterized in that the second suggestive effect is executed according to the determination result of the operation determination means.

According to the gaming machine Ca5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Ca4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second suggestive effect is executed in accordance with a predetermined operation performed on the operating means. Therefore, the execution timing of the second suggestive effect can be changed according to the player's operation, so there is an effect that the player can be motivated to participate in the game.

Further, even if the execution timing of the second suggestive effect differs according to the operation timing of the player, the execution timing of the first suggestive effect can be adjusted according to the execution timing of the second suggestive effect. There is an effect that the first suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect can be executed at proper timing, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

The gaming machine Ca5 has valid period setting means for setting an operation valid period during which the operation determining means effectively determines that the predetermined operation has been performed on the operating means, wherein the valid period setting means , the operation valid period can be set so as to overlap with the advance notification period, and the execution timing adjustment means can determine the operation during the operation valid period set to overlap with the advance notification period. The game machine Ca6 is characterized in that the execution timing of the first suggestive effect is adjusted based on the determination result of means.

According to the gaming machine Ca6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Ca5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the operation effective period is set by the effective period setting means so as to overlap with the advance notification period, and the execution period of the first suggestive effect is suggested based on the determination result of the operation determining means in the overlapping set operation effective period. It is set by the performance execution period setting means. Thus, the execution period of the first suggestive effect can be varied depending on whether or not the second suggestive effect is executed while the advance notification period of the first suggestive effect is being executed. Therefore, even if the first suggestive effect executed according to the player's operation is used, the first suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect can be executed at proper timing, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. has the effect of

In the gaming machine Ca5, the advance notification period setting means provides a first advance notification period for executing the advance notification regardless of the determination result of the operation determination means, and the previous notification period according to the determination result of the operation determination means. A game machine Ca6 characterized by setting a pre-notification or a second pre-notification period for executing the first suggestive effect.

According to the gaming machine Ca6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Ca5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the advance notification period setting means sets a first advance notification period during which only the advance notification is executed and a second advance notification period during which the advance notification or the first suggestive effect is executed. As a result, during the second advance notification period in which the advance notification is being performed, the player can immediately execute the first suggestive effect by executing the predetermined operation. Therefore, it is possible to flexibly set the execution timing of the first suggestive effect, and there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In addition, by providing the first advance notification period, it is possible to reliably notify in advance that the first suggestive effect will be executed even when the player executes a predetermined operation, so that the player can understand. There is an effect that an easy production can be executed.

<Characteristic group D> (Specific effect with predetermined stage display)
stage information display means for displaying stage information of a plurality of stages; stage information changing means for varying said stage information; stage information setting means for setting said stage information varied by said stage information changing means; said stage information A game machine D1, characterized by comprising a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect when the specific stage information is displayed by the display means.

Here, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that executes a variable effect for a predetermined period of time to suggest to the player whether or not the game has been won. Then, a game configured to be able to execute a pre-notification effect (countdown effect) for informing the player in advance of the timing at which a specific effect (for example, cut-in effect) is executed among the effects to be executed for a predetermined period. there is a machine (For example, JP-A-2013-198568).

Such a conventional gaming machine can execute a specific effect when the score reaches a predetermined amount, so that it is possible to preliminarily prompt whether or not the specific effect will be executed, thereby enhancing the effect of the effect. it was possible. However, when it is determined that the advance notification effect is executed at the timing at which the specific effect is executed, the period for executing the advance notification effect (that is, the start timing and the end timing) is set. There is a problem that the content becomes monotonous and the player quickly becomes bored with the presentation.

According to the gaming machine D1, when the specific stage information is displayed on the stage information display means, the specific effect executing means executes the specific effect. As a result, it is possible for the player to predict whether or not the specific effect will be executed based on the variable state of the step information, and the effect of enhancing the effect of the effect can be obtained.

In the game machine D1, a condition determining means for determining whether a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the step information display means so that the specific stage information is not displayed until the condition determining means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied. and restriction means for restricting setting of the level information by the level information setting means.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, until the condition determination means determines whether the predetermined condition is satisfied, the restriction means limits the setting of the stage information by the stage information setting means so that the specific stage information is not displayed until the predetermined condition is satisfied. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the specific stage information from being displayed when the specific effect is not executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

In the gaming machine D2, the step information setting means facilitates setting of the forward specific step information different from the specific step information when setting of the step information is restricted by the restricting means. A gaming machine D3 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the setting of the step information is restricted by the restricting means, the forward specific step information is easily set. Therefore, even in a state where the setting of the level information is restricted by the restricting means, it is possible to provide an effect that arouses the player's interest.

In the gaming machine D3, the stage information setting means is capable of setting the specific stage information when the forward specific stage information is set.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D3, the following effects are exhibited. In other words, the specific step information is set by the step information setting means when the normal step step information is set. This makes it possible for the player to expect that the specific stage information will be set next when the forward specific stage information is set. Therefore, even in a state where the setting of the level information is restricted by the restricting means, it is possible to provide an effect that arouses the player's interest.

In any one of the game machines D1 to D4, a special performance executing means capable of executing a special performance, an execution timing determining means for determining the execution timing of executing the special performance by the special performance executing means, and the stage information display. a remaining period determining means for determining a remaining period from when the specific stage information is displayed by the means until the execution timing determined by the execution timing determining means, wherein the specific effect executing means is configured to perform the specific effect. A game machine D5 characterized in that a period notification effect is executed according to the determination result of the remaining period determination means.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the remaining period until the special effect executed by the special effect executing means is executed is determined by the remaining period determining means, and the period notification effect corresponding to the determination result is performed as the specific effect. As a result, there is an effect that the presentation effect can be enhanced.

In the game machine D5, determination means for executing determination when a predetermined determination condition is satisfied, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the result of determination by the determination means for a predetermined period, a privilege game imparting means for imparting a privilege game when the identification information for indicating a specific determination result is stopped and displayed after the dynamic display by the target display means; acquiring means for acquiring information; and storage means capable of storing a plurality of pieces of the entering ball information acquired by the acquiring means up to a predetermined number until the predetermined determination condition is satisfied; The specific effect executing means uses the dynamic display period corresponding to the plurality of pieces of the entering ball information stored in the storage means to notify the period when the specific stage information is displayed by the stage information display means. The game machine D6 is characterized by executing a performance.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the period notification effect can be executed across a plurality of dynamic display periods, there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine D6, dynamic display remaining period determination means for determining the remaining period of the dynamic display executed when the specific stage information is displayed by the stage information display means, and the dynamic display remaining period. specific period determination means for determining a specific period until the special effect is executed in the dynamic display executed next to the dynamic display whose remaining period is determined by the determination means, and the remaining period. The game machine D7 is characterized in that the determination means determines the remaining period based on the determination result of the dynamic display remaining period determination means and the determination result of the specific period determination means.

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the period notification effect that is executed across a plurality of dynamic display periods can be reliably executed, there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the game machine D7, the special effect executing means executes the special effect at a specific timing after the dynamic display is executed by the dynamic display means.

According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the period notification effect that is executed across a plurality of dynamic display periods can be reliably executed, there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

<Feature group E> (Adjustment of display content of overlapping notice effect)
A performance period setting means for setting one performance period out of different performance periods, a specific performance execution means for executing a specific performance in a specific period set within the one performance period, and executed by the specific performance execution means. a suggesting effect executing means for executing a suggesting effect for suggesting a effect result of the specific effect to be executed within the effect period, wherein the suggesting effect executing means executes at least a first suggesting effect. 1 suggestion performance executing means, a second suggestion performance execution means for executing a second suggestion performance different from the first suggestion performance, and a suggestion performance execution for setting an execution period of the first suggestion performance and the second suggestion performance. execution period determination means for determining the execution period of the first suggestive effect set by the suggestive effect execution period setting means and the execution period of the second suggestive effect set by the suggestive effect execution period setting means; and and an effect mode setting means for setting the effect mode of the first suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect to be executed by the suggestive effect execution means in accordance with the determination result of the execution period determiner. Gaming machine E1.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines perform a winning lottery and execute a variable display effect for showing the lottery result on a display device. In such a conventional game machine, a plurality of suggestive effects are provided for suggesting the result of the lottery, and as part of the plurality of suggestive effects, the suggestive effects are executed based on the operation result of the operation means that the player can operate. A gaming machine has been proposed that has an operation suggesting effect to play (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-128603). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, a period for effectively determining the operation to the operation means is provided for a predetermined period in order to execute the operation suggestive effect, so the normal suggestive effect execution timing and the operation suggestive effect There is a problem that the execution timing may be changed, and the performance effect of the suggested performance is lowered, causing the player to quickly become bored with the game.

According to the gaming machine E1, the execution period of the first suggestive effect and the execution period of the second suggestive effect can be discriminated, and the effect mode of each suggestive effect can be set based on the discrimination result. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the player and prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

The game machine E1 has operation means that can be operated by the player, and operation determination means for determining that the operation means has been operated, and the first suggestive effect executing means is determined by the operation determination means. The gaming machine E2 is characterized in that the first suggestion effect is executed according to the result.

According to the gaming machine E2, even if the timing of executing the first suggestive effect differs according to the operation timing of the operation means, an appropriate effect mode can be set. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the player and prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

In the gaming machine E2, the suggestive effect execution period setting means is capable of setting an execution period of the first suggestive effect and an execution period of the second suggestive effect so as to overlap. E3.

According to the game machine E3, since the execution period of the first suggestive performance and the execution period of the second suggestive performance can be set so as to overlap, more suggestive performances can be executed within a limited period. can be done.

<Feature F group> (Expectation degree production according to stage notification mode)
Determination means for performing determination when a predetermined determination condition is satisfied; Dynamic display means for performing dynamic display for indicating the result of determination by the determination means for a predetermined period; privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game when the determination result is a predetermined determination result; suggestion mode setting means for setting a suggestion mode for suggesting that the determination result by the determination means is the predetermined determination result; suggested mode execution means for executing the suggested mode set by the suggested mode setting means for the predetermined period during which the dynamic display is performed; stage information display means for displaying stage information of a plurality of stages; and the stage information display. step information changing means for changing the step information displayed by the step information changing means, and the suggestive mode setting means, when the step information changing means changes the step information to predetermined first step information a first suggestion mode suggesting that the discrimination result by the discriminating means is a predetermined discrimination result and that the degree of expectation is high; and a second suggestion mode suggesting that the discrimination result by the discrimination means is expected to be a predetermined discrimination result is high.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines perform a winning lottery and execute a variable display effect for showing the lottery result on a display device. In such a conventional gaming machine, based on the result of the lottery, points are awarded when the granting conditions are satisfied, and the greater the amount of points awarded, the higher the expectation of winning (ready-to-win performance) is executed. A gaming machine has been proposed (for example, JP-A-2011-62560). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when the award amount is small, the ready-to-win effect with a low expectation of winning is executed, so the player gets bored with the game before the ready-to-win effect is executed. , there is a problem that the interest of the player is reduced.

According to the gaming machine F1, when the stage information is changed to the predetermined first stage information by the stage information changing means, the determination result by the determination means is the predetermined determination result, which suggests that the expectation is high. and a second suggestion mode suggesting that the degree of expectation that the determination result by the determination means is the predetermined determination result when the stage information is changed to the predetermined second stage information by the stage information changing means is high. , can be set, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game and losing interest in the game due to the variable state of the step information.

In any one of the game machines showing the concepts of various inventions described above, the game machine Z1 is characterized by being a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

In any one of the gaming machines representing the concepts of the various inventions described above, the gaming machine Z2 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win prizes, and a value corresponding to the number of prizes won Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

In any one of the game machines representing the concepts of the various inventions described above, the game machine Z3 is characterized in that the game machine is a combination of a pachinko game machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.
<Others>
2. Description of the Related Art Among game machines such as pachinko machines, game machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional gaming machine, symbols are variably displayed on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, thereby giving a player a big winning game. In addition to the patterns, the display device also displays various images such as characters and landscapes. As a result, the display contents have been diversified and interest has been improved (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2003-325886).
However, further enhancement of interest is required.
The present technical idea has been made to solve the above-described problems, etc., and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest of the player in the game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of Technical Thought 1 comprises step information display means for displaying step information of a plurality of steps, step information varying means for varying the step information, and step information varying means for varying the step information. step information setting means for setting the step information, and specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect when the specific step information is displayed by the step information display means.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, comprising: condition determining means for determining whether a predetermined condition is satisfied; and restriction means for restricting setting of the stage information by the stage information setting means so that the specific stage information is not displayed by the stage information display means.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 2, wherein the level information setting means differs from the specific level information when setting of the level information is restricted by the restricting means. This facilitates the setting of the order identification step information.
A gaming machine according to technical idea 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of technical ideas 1 to 3, and includes a special effect executing means capable of executing a special effect, and the special effect executing means executes the special effect. execution timing determination means for determining execution timing; and remaining period determination means for determining a remaining period from when the specific stage information is displayed by the stage information display means to the execution timing determined by the execution timing determination means. , and the specific effect execution means executes a period notification effect as the specific effect in accordance with the determination result of the remaining period determination means.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 5 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 4, which comprises a determining means for performing determination when a predetermined determining condition is satisfied, and identification information for indicating the result of determination by the determining means. dynamic display means for dynamically displaying for a predetermined period; and privilege game imparting means for awarding a privilege game when the identification information for indicating a specific determination result is stopped and displayed after the dynamic display by the dynamic display means. an acquisition means for acquiring entry information when a prescribed acquisition condition is satisfied; and storage means capable of storing a plurality of pieces of information stored in the storage means, and the specific effect executing means stores the plurality of the entering ball information stored in the storage means when the specific stage information is displayed by the stage information display means. The period notification effect is executed using the dynamic display period corresponding to .
<effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, there are step information display means for displaying step information of a plurality of steps, step information varying means for varying the step information, and the step information varied by the step information varying means. and a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect when the specific step information is displayed by the step information display means.
Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 1, the following effects are achieved. That is, condition determination means for determining whether a predetermined condition is satisfied, and stage information display means for preventing the specific stage information from being displayed until the condition determination means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied. and limiting means for limiting the setting of the stage information by the setting means.
Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the step information setting means makes it easy to set the forward specific step information different from the specific step information when setting of the step information is restricted by the restricting means.
Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
According to the game machine described in technical idea 4, in addition to the effects of the game machine described in any one of technical ideas 1 to 3, the following effects are obtained. That is, special effect executing means capable of executing a special effect, execution timing determining means for determining the execution timing of executing the special effect by the special effect executing means, and the specific step information being displayed by the step information displaying means. a remaining period determining means for determining a remaining period until the execution timing determined by the execution timing determining means, and the specific effect executing means determines the remaining period determining means as the specific effect. A period notification effect is executed according to the result.
Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 4, the following effects are obtained. Namely, determination means for executing determination when a predetermined determination condition is satisfied, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the result of determination by the determination means for a predetermined period, and the dynamic display means. a privilege game granting means for imparting a privilege game when the identification information indicating a specific determination result is stopped and displayed after the dynamic display by the dynamic display, and acquisition of entering information when a predetermined acquisition condition is satisfied and a storage means capable of storing a plurality of pieces of the entering ball information acquired by the acquiring means up to a predetermined number as an upper limit until the predetermined determination condition is satisfied, and executing the specific effect. The means executes the period notification effect using the dynamic display period corresponding to the plurality of pieces of the entering ball information stored in the storage means when the specific stage information is displayed by the stage information display means. It is something to do.
Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
113 Audio lamp control device 113 (Period effect executing means)
222ca scoring scenario selection table ( storage means)
S2853 First period effect setting means S2854 Second period effect setting means S7008 Determining means

Claims (1)

display means capable of displaying a display mode corresponding to any one of the plurality of stage information;
display mode changing means capable of changing the display mode displayed on the display means to a display mode corresponding to different stage information;
A game machine having period effect execution means capable of executing a period effect executed in a effect period including at least a period in which the variable effect for varying the display mode can be executed multiple times,
a first period effect setting means capable of setting the effect mode of the first period effect at least in the first period in which the variable effect can be executed in the effect period;
a second period effect setting means capable of setting the effect mode of the second period effect in a second period after the first period in the effect period and in which at least the variable effect can be executed;
first step information corresponding to a first step as a step of changing from the first step information to the second step information different from the first step information among the plurality of step information; is a different process, and a plurality of process information including at least second process information corresponding to the second process as a process of changing from the first stage information to the second stage information is stored. a means of storage;
determining means capable of determining predetermined process information from among the plurality of process information stored in the storage means before the first period ;
The first period effect setting means can set the effect mode of the first period effect based on the predetermined process information determined by the determining means,
The second period effect setting means can set the effect mode of the second period effect corresponding to the display mode displayed by the variable effect executed during the first period effect,
The game machine is
Regardless of the type of the process information determined by the determination means, the variable effect can be executed at a specific timing in the first period,
When the execution condition is established based on the establishment of a predetermined first condition during the first period production executed in the production mode based on at least the predetermined process information, the variable during the first period production A gaming machine capable of executing an effect, and configured to be able to end the first period effect without executing the variable effect when the execution condition is not established. .

Images